Home

Gecdis v8

1. 273 XVIII 2 1 Creating a Stream Dedicated to SeapiX Communication 273 XVIII 2 2 Configuring SeapiX Module nnne nnn nnns 273 XVIIL2 2 1 Step 1 Stream Configuration 0 cc ccccsseeccccccccseessseeseececsesssueesseeecessesauseseeeeeesssssaaesseeees 273 XVIIL2 2 2 Step 2 Installation Configuration ccccccccccscesseesseeccesecsaseeseeccesesssseeseeeeeesssssaaaeeseeees 274 XVIIL2 2 3 Step 3 Database Configuration eiiis enar nnns 274 XVIIL2 2 4 Step 4 Check SeapiX Mobile Availability eese 274 XVIII 2 3 Configuring Bathymetry and Sediment Modules ccccseeeseeeeeeeceeeseseeeeeeeeeeaaesseeeeeees 275 XVIII 2 3 1 Bathymetry Module 275 XVIII 2 3 2 Sediment Module when available 275 A E USING SEAPIX a 276 XVIII 3 1 Overview of SeapiX Fire Modes nnne nnne nnne nnn nnns 276 XVIII 3 2 SeapiX Menu and Dedicated Toolbars AANEREN 277 XVIII 3 3 Start sounder acquisition sseeeeesssssesesssseseeseeeeenenn nennen nnne nnns 279 XVIII 3 4 Use Echogram View 280 XVIIL 3 4 1 Echogram Construction Ange 280 XVII 342 Echogram RTE 281 XVIII 3 5 Record and Display Seabed DatamHealfme 282 AVULSO e te Dia e ODIO EE 284 XVII1 3 6 1 Overlap Management in Real Time Database nnns 284 XVIIL3 6 2 Height Of Tide Correction isses nane enhn aar nnne nnns nna a aane nn 284 XIA S
2. 309 IXBLUE CONTACT SALES 1 1e leeoreee KEE KE enean nnn aueh KEREN REENEN REE KEREN erae nun 310 elei 311 A GLOSSARY serene 311 B ECDIS INFORMATION MANDATORY ssssassssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn nnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 320 B 1 LOKS TADIG e E E nee ee E E eee eer 320 B 2 Applied Giandarde cccccccccssssecccccsesseceeeceeeseceeecaeaseceeseeeaeeceeeseeaseceeessaaseceesssageeeeessaageees 320 C THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY CHART 1 eeeee eene e nnn nnn n nnn nuuuuu aaa uu suas asas assa sas a nennen 321 C 1 Information about the Chart Display A BI 321 C 2 Natural and Man Made Features CDEN 322 C 3 POM FC QUO RE 322 C 4 Depths Currents etcIHI nennen EES nnns nnne a nnns 323 C 5 Seabed Obstructions Pipelines etc J K L ascnssssecoensannmartandeneaunmenceacsnieunenneanemnneateonennts 323 C 6 Trane THOU SS OD mt 324 C 7 Special Areas N M TE 324 C 8 Aids and Services P R S TU 325 C 9 BUOYS and Beacons Q MN Em 325 C 10 elei ET 326 C 11 Color Test Diagramm 326 D EQUIPMENT THAT CAN BE INTERFACED WITH GECDIS eeeeeeee eere 327 D 1 List of NMEA Sentences Used nennen nennen nnne nnns nnns 327 D 2 List of binary AIS Messages Used nennen nnne nnne nnns 328 D 3 Fleet Mobile Buoy Tage 329 D 3 1
3. Search object Man OyverBoard Spacing 5 Diagram type Parallel C Square spiral Length L 10 0000 nm Sector Vessel count Parallel Vessel number Figure 151 Configuring parallel route Depending on the number of ships you can draw different diagrams The number of ships should depend on the radius and the length of the lines This type of route is drawn in a rectangle whose sides are S and RH S First line Ship s trajectory Figure 152 Diagram with two ships Ship s trajectory 10 6 2 6 106 2 6 10 4774310 34974 CMS EMT a 94544 Y B 4 1 1 4 B 1 4 8 Figure 153 Diagram with three ships 186 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual Ship s trajectory B Z e 2 6 2 6 y 3 wt ff 3 fa CP 3 F H E 3 CP y Teu Ve let Legt Upg 5 G 4 d 134 8 1 4 E Figure 154 Diagram with four ships To create a parallel type SAR diagram Step Action 1 Click the Navigation menu and then Create SAR Diagram 2 If not already done check the Draw SAR Diagram and then fill the General properties and Search conditions fields 3 In Diagram type area click Parallel 4 Enter your desired values for Spacing S and for the fields of the Parallel area 9 Click OK The diagram is displayed in the main view 6 End of procedure ISD M 038G EN September 2014 187 exar LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual
4. sss 105 IV 6 2 4 Spying Input and OUIput DATA EE 106 IV 6 2 5 Transmitting Sentences via a Stream 107 IV 6 2 6 Checking Transmitted Sentences sss sen annees nans nhan nnns 109 IV 6 3 Creating Mobiles and Fleets seeseeessesseseeeeeeeenn nennen nnne nnne nnns 109 IV 6 4 Assigning Information to a Mobule nnn 111 Do CONOUNNO WT OMI DE 112 IV 6 5 1 CS ee 112 IV 6 5 2 Seg E 113 IV 6 5 3 OCC HOS TBD EE 114 IV 6 5 4 aug P 115 V Se wd din e Be Ve denti PTT TUM 116 IV 6 7 Sensor Synthesis cccccccsseeseececceeseeececeeeseeeeecaeeseceeeseaeaeeeeesseaeceeessaaseceesseaaeeeeessaageeeeeeaas 117 IV 6 7 1 Synthesis in Basic and Advanced MOOS esee nnns 117 IV 6 7 2 Displaying Real Time Jntormaton seeeiessseiissssees senes 118 IV 6 7 3 Printing the Summary Windouw sese enn nane nnns nnn aar nnns aaa 119 V7 ED RECKONING c 120 V MRO SETI ON ce M 121 IV 8 1 PIG FOS IO ES 121 IV 8 2 Display of Fix Positions esssssesssseeseseseseee eene nnne nnn nnn nnns 121 IV 8 3 Fix Position Settings eeessssssssssesseeseee nennen nennen nennen nnne n nnns nna nnn nnn 121 V CHARTS 122 V 1 ei iae wp iBecl rm 122 V 1 1 Displaying the Chart Coverage enne nnne nnne nnns nnns nnns
5. 175 VES GEOGRAPHIC CALCULATIONS geesde ees 177 Vra Bee EE 179 VEAL e 179 VIA2 Using leid eh EE 180 VLS SAR IAG E 182 A a lk TE 182 UA OCUATE SD l e 183 VI 5 3 Sector Route 184 og Bio MED ici e 185 VII USER OBJECTS E 188 WIT EE 188 VIFZ MANAGING USER OBJECT Sircsiisescisssssicscsctnsaseusesneweetonsanskiiensiamutsnsutsewencensutsnsearuteesinasticantewewesensuies 189 VII 2 1 General Operation on User Objects suresidir nininini aaia i nnne 189 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 xi xii 8 X E Ka 5 4 A a B S DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual VIL2 2 List of User e 189 VIL 2 9 COMMOUFING the TC 190 VII 2 4 Importing User Objects sssseeeesseeseeeeeennnnmnnennnnnnn nnnm 190 VILZ 4 1 T rboWin Turbo2000 e e e iei tti reta tra rro ro to Ia nta reae ta tias 191 Me CIS TO RETE 191 Me TUDO TV elei GE 192 UI IE AV MDO dE 192 VIZ QUOC IIS IOUT EE 192 VII 2 5 Exporting a User Obiect cecccccccccecceseeeeseeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeceeeessseaeeeseeeeeeesssaaaseeeeeeessaaggeses 193 WES e Rem 194 VU a e die Le EE EE 194 VO SE e EH Gei 196 Vael ee ip ee enn ere ne ere nee ne ee ene errr rere 196 VIO WAY OOS FICS EE 196 UI E TACTOOIOAl ene CN 197 AC GC ONE Planning a e 199 VII 3 4 Duplicating a el EE 200 VIL35 Representation ofa FOULS aE E 200 VSOT FAO EE 201 EE EE 201 VIL3 5 3 X Alternative Route that is Hohiohted osse 201 VI 3 5 4 Planned Route that is Hig
6. eeeeesseeeeeeeeeennnnennnnnn 74 cec M YOY 73 97 Source taD E 112 ee 72 97 specific AP PCANANCE siaivansnasaceannassceannacvesocnanscaatnassaserabwessasanses 90 specific EE 113 Static CNS ebe 111 342 ISD M 0386 EN Gecdis v8 User s Manual oo H 224 steering course autopilort 204 stream Fr COM ere 103 Stream M 105 TOP 103 Ee ON c M P 100 ug T H 106 submersion EE 98 SWayIng CRHESE sett Seege een EEN eege 98 swaying speed i isesiracesscavecsiesaawadeuseaweasisdavacewiduadnvedaviarmvenrieentdes 98 VDO E 92 system information sscsiccccdedccsscassdacnsdssscadececocserdensestacnadsoears 94 system information configuration cccccccessecccceeseeeecaeeeceeseeeesecessuasecessuaeeeeees 94 T eet 108 re E 103 TEP 78 elt EET UU T 94 i Kole LE 35 inserting a button cc cceccccsseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeecesseaeeeeees 35 Tooltips GUIS el e EE 46 track glat 211 ee E UE 9 true E IT 97 true WING E 99 PM GUTS WW Le 73 TurboWin mode 48 E dr 224 U Mp 101 BP dine me 101 User lee We E 38 User interface COMPU ALO BE 45 KEE eet 38 SSS E 39 VIG eeh 94 UTC of reference position 97 V CONS PEN RN 86 Pi Ange 67 Usel a 25
7. 12 ES ey Go mm 6 6 8 t M 13 1 3 1 6 Information WindOWes 1 1ccccseccccsecccseeeccseecccseeesseeessueeessueeessusesssueessaeessaesesseeessaeessaeeesseeesans 13 1 3 1 7 Secondary Windows 1 cccccccsseeeecccnsusseecesnauseceesaauusecessaaeueeesssaceseesssauaeeesssaaaeeesssaaessessaaqes 15 L3 10 Information about CharmCell ie ege EEN 16 PON E EE 16 I 3 1 10 Be Ecol C IP 17 1 3 2 TENS CMS OF E 17 1 3 3 STN VOWS R 18 1 3 4 ACCESSING COMM Le EE 18 1 4 IMPORTANT FEATURES TO KNOW ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeessssssseeeeeeeeeeeeseeaooooggeesssssnneseeeeeeeeeees 19 1 4 1 TRE ein SAN E 19 1 4 2 ECDs and E5515 cover mrbtidt e epthumervPRE DIU IEPVER ieee ema aereratactes 19 1 4 3 Man Over Board 20 1 4 4 Stadl VO E yb EE 21 1 4 5 WS nee EE 21 1 4 6 BACK le 22 I 5 WHAT TO DO BEFORE DEPARTURE 2 22 0sssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecccocconnsssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeoooooooannsssssess 23 1 5 1 CUSTOMIZING EE 24 1 5 1 1 Configuring your Screen Size ou eeeccccccccssssesseseeccceessssesseeccessssaueeseeceessssaseneeeecesssssaaanesseeessnsas 24 5 1 2 CUSIOMIZING GECOIS Screen aceccctee che o EE PI Et EE Recte e eu A E o ze pA EANN Ea ai 24 1 5 2 eue EE 24 Loc WEE 0 EEN 24 E0742 2870 ee 24 L523 o ipium 24 5 2 4 Route Management 24 ISD M 038G EN
8. lt ENC DATA NON ENC DATA Figure 119 The Presentation Library To skip to the next page click with the left button of your mouse After the last page you return to the first one To scroll the pages in reverse order right click To display the meaning of a symbol place the mouse on the symbol D i Figure 120 Tooltip information in Chart 1 V 2 12 4 Security Options Security is an option allowing you to define different key depth levels There are four different depth levels shallow contour safety contour safety depth and deep contour These levels constitute four out of the six editable fields of the Safety Options dialog box see Figure 121 The other fields safety height represents the secured height of the ship e g if it gets under a bridge and Safe chart scale represents the minimum chart scale to have a safe navigation They aim at defining alarms to inform the mariner Furthermore there are two different modes e A bicoloured mode or Safe mode representation of the bathymetry with 2 colors a White maritime zones above 0 O Blue zones between 0 and safety contour In that mode the following values are equal shallow contour safety contour deep contour ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 149 I X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e A four colour mode or Unsafe mode representation of the bathymetry with 4 colors a White the maritime zones above O fores
9. System Information properties Pilot Position passerelle Ups Universal Polar Stereog raphic Configuration Unit Geographic Degree Gea Degree Minute Geo Degree Minute Second UTM Standard UTM Signed northing Loran C UPS Universal Polar Stereographic The Own Ship coordinates in the Information window will now be expressed in UPS coordinates 4 To display the UPS coordinate as display coordinates for the cursor In the Windows 160 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action area of the Information windows dialog box select System and in the Information area select Curseur Then click on ET button The nformation properties dialog box opens 9 Choose UPS Universal Polar Stereographic for the Unit field then click OK uF d Information windows Windows Information Information Bar Label Parent information System UTC Critical Informations Curseur System Information Pages a UTC Cursor position Es Distance Navire System Distance Own Ship ES Relevernent Navire System Bearing Own Ship My ship System Pilot Information properties Curseur Geographic Degree Configuration Unit Geographic Degree Geo Degree Minute Geo Degree Minute Second UTM Standard UTM Signed northing Lora
10. Arpa WASSP 1 0s 35 11264 S 174 15 351E 28kn 257 0 323 7 20 01 4 End of procedure Recording and displaying data in real time Step Action 1 In Gecdis menu select WASSP and click Recording e To display Bathy data click in the Bathy menu Surface or Isolines e To display sediments data in the Sediments menu click Show Official Data Important The display of sediment data in 3D view implies that you have activated the 2D chart option in the 3D view parameters right click in the 3D view 2 To stop recording click again on Recording 3 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 261 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Example of Bathy display Example of Sedi display hardness IST D Navire e Meet mr va ws T GS WAIL Caps 7S Prades SOME ER v e AT Wassp data acquired in real time temporary database can be archived on a permanent basis via the command Archive Current Record Real time recorded data will be imported in a Wassp database You can type the name of a new database to create it Store data in database The new database created with the recording in progress is listed in the WASSP Settings dialog box You can delete or export a stored database by selecting it and by clicking the button corresponding to the action you want to carry out Databases Data Biomass Check databases your want to i
11. x e we om maen x 3s we um mam x pe we Irun maen x ze weien use mae x O wengs SPISAG maen ze wenn sparar mae x sm Wee sese SPRBY mae x Swuw me mees The timeout value is the default delay from which in case of non receipt of a new sentence for a mobile previously acquired it is automatically deleted Important NMEA PTSAG PLEASE NOTE THAT THIS OWNER SENTENCE CAN EITHER BE USED FOR DECODING IXSEA GAPS MOBILE OR EITHER OF THE GEONET TRAWL NET SEE DA A AND D 4 5 C A L_ LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES D 3 2 NMEA Information Table Unlike XML Mobile format that is open the data acquired through the NMEA frames are etched in stone Here is a summary of the various informations and settings managed on a mobile based nu NMEA formats and derivatives X OX ox x ox ql beam conning X offsets ENNEN mm mm MMSI mm teret target Informations Symbol amp color ID type nu m X X num target X orc X X X Mobile type target target target State X Geo position X X M X m MMSI px x px e Geo accuracy pf ESES Bearing distance Water temp X X E E E NN mm NEN buy NEN NN ox poe ox KH H E NEN oe ox e pepe LL X m C C C m m m m num buoy X C C E C C Batte
12. Import Cells Reset Database Coastal 1 90 000 04 05 2010 04 05 2010 01 02 2010 Figure 110 Accepting or denying updates To display the detail of an update click the Last Import tab For further details on the import report refer to the section V 2 4 page 132 To update a cell Action Access the Charts Database dialog box The semi automatic updating module can be used to update e Import Commercial Exchange Set see section V 2 3 1 e Import Catalogue see section V 2 3 2 e Import Cells see section V 2 3 3 So click one of the button and browse to the update files When import is over imported ENCs charts are listed in the Last Import tab with the status Inserted Modified Deleted Select the updates you want to reject and click Reject Update Close the Charts Database dialog box by clicking the little cross in the upper right corner End of procedure ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual WHEN YOU REJECT AN UPDATE IT IS ANNOTATED WITH AN ORANGE MARK AND A TEXT THAT INDICATES THIS HAS BEEN REJECTED UPDATE IS APPLIED V 2 11 2 Manual Updating Manual updating is the second type of updates It consists in modifying the ENC cell by creating a user object and modifying a chart object or a mariner s object that has already been created Mariner s objects can be either a point or an area All the objects are annoted with an orange mark You can e C
13. available in SeapiX menu KO ve Show settings page available in SeapiX menu SYSTEM XVIII 3 3 START SOUNDER ACQUISITION Step Action 1 Start sounder acquisition e In cartographic view bottom left check that sounder status is Connected e In SeapiX menu or SeapiX toolbar click Start Sounder Sounder is now waiting for fire activation e Display STV view end right click on it to access to fire control parameters e Set correct parameters for the fire Right click to access to fire settings D Working depth which means the range depth to be applied to all fires STV QO Power Power level of the ping Use Auto e n same menu choose STV activation to start pinging Data are displayed both in STV view and in echogram view if activated Important STV fire is main fire It has to be activated in order to be able to build echogram to record seabed data or to know depth below surface 2 Activate STV main fire mode STT SAT SAV a Modulation Signal modulation 3 If needed activate secondary fires modes STT SAT SAV e Display STT SAT ou SAV view and right click on it to access to fire control parameters e Set correct parameters for the fire refer to previous step especially tilt fire to use e n view menu choose fire activation to start pinging Data are displayed in swaths view ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 217 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DE
14. ef 1 D 1 i EN du Or ter EN NAM E KEE EEN KEEN Ee LT KEE EEN EE FE WEE A SN ee cid SCENE eg EE Ur Lis LT P UR EE Dee SEPT ILL PEE M Dp ET NE Get eeng P a DL z d LI 4 H DER A A dea 1 d Se CL ef LI i LI LI e mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm E mm mm mm ee Figure 161 Alternative route VII 3 5 2 Planned Route The heading route is displayed with a thick dotted red line Each waypoint is represented with a circle whose centre is the waypoint The lane is displayed with a thin broad spaced out red doited line If you have planned your route the planned speed for each leg is displayed in a little square L DI A 1 1 AL j D D Be 4 DLL dade f i ere lc ecleeeccececee eese eee ee creer 4Ics Ell SE SSSI NIST ASIII ISIS IG SSSI SISA SSI ISI onnon noon Figure 162 Planned route VII 3 5 3 Alternative Route that is Highlighted The alternative route is displayed with a thin and tight orange dotted line Each waypoint is represented with a circle around the waypoint Around each waypoint there is a square At the end and beginning of each leg a line crossing and closing the lane is displayed The lane is displayed with a plain and thick red line The heading route of a leg is displayed in the middle of this leg If you have planned your route the pla
15. REA 7 maan 7 JW TU 001 S0 E 12 36 11 B 50 57 875 N 001 43 603 E 10 35 13 A Own Ship ixBlue replace ixBlue DR V ack A Figure 39 TurboWin mode In this mode the top menu bar and toolbars are hidden Controls This bottom menu is controlled by the mouse and keyboard Horizontal displacements ao lo Ki Change the menu selection BEN Perform the selected command or call another menu if the text is underlined Left button E Exit the menu to perform an action with the mouse in another window CJ acknowledge an alarm for example Middle button 48 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C x s LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual LE Change the current menu by returning to the previous or jumping to the next if the first level Right button Following are the item states Unselected Here is unselected command Unselected Here is unselected command with a long description WINCentral clic or Home key to return T O Figure 40 Inactive menu after pressing Home Figure 41 Inactive menu after opening a dialog When the menu loses focus if the operator presses the Home key or a command opens a dialog box for example it changes appearance to indicate inactivity In this case to return to the menu press the Home key the middle click or close the dialog box Main menus Important WARNING THESE MAY CHANGE DEPENDING ON THE MODULES AND SOFTWARE LICENSE
16. After this validation another section can be deleting To exit and return to the SML Edit window press Esc key or the right button mouse At the top of the page the button bound defines the extreme points of the profile using the same filtering window described in List filtering when the filtering is disabled The bounds are then shown at the top of the window The profile format is identical between screen edition and printer However the screen edition has the advantage of providing information simply by moving the mouse cursor in the area of the profile The cursor is then redrawn on the line curve Geographic distances cable and upstream and downstream slack are shown In this case the slack is calculated with remote points three times the depth It is also possible to query the slack between any two points by using the left mouse button The profile is built from probe values of SML points and it is possible to use the interpolated values provided by the bathymetry module by checking the checkbox Bathymetric datas used ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 303 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Filename System name GSLD 304 E SM Properes TAT8D3 TAT 8 D3 General description Position list Profile Lean Rp 2 quarter A Geo lg 287 4 km X Scale 1 1 293 000 2500 m A Cable lg 291 km 302 6 km 329 8 km ACL 3 325 ACL 3 317 Slack 7 9 Slack 7
17. Asia Pacific APAC 65 6747 4912 iXBlue Pte Limited Singapore 15A Changi Business Park Central 1 04 02 Eightrium Singapore 486035 Offices Australia China India 310 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 K P WW C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES A GLOSSARY Term Accuracy of Data Acquisition Timeout Altitude Apparent Wind Area Basic display Bearing Range Lines Bridge Height Calculation rate CCRP Channelling Gecdis v8 User s Manual Appendices Definition An area within which the best estimate of the overall accuracy of the data is uniform The overall accuracy takes into account for example the source accuracy chart scale digitising accuracy etc An area with a uniform estimated degree of general data accuracy General accuracy takes into account source accuracy chart scale and digitization accuracy for example Delay since last acquisition after which the piece of information is considered as invalid Mechanism that announces with a sound and visually a condition that requires attention The vertical distance above or below a datum Wind value that results from two movements the speed of the ship and the true wind The apparent wind is the wind that a person feels on a moving ship i e the wind that is acquired by and anemometer and a weather vane Polygon that is inserted by the user and can be associated with a radar alarm The measure of atmospheric pressure tha
18. DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII USER OBJECTS VII 1 Databases and Folders Step Step Step 188 A database can be compared to a cabinet in which you would store much information All user objects that you will create will be stored in databases By default a database called IxBlue is created while installing Gecdis This database is a mdb file the typical database files All user objects will be added to it Gecdis allows you to create as many databases as desired So you can add a new database and change the current one To add or change a database Action In the System menu click Settings User Objects and then Database Management In the dialog box that displays do one of the following e f you want to change the current database browse to your desired database select it and click Open Database e f you want to add a new database click New Database enter the name and click Create End of procedure Folders can be compared to the drawers of a cabinet They contain all the user objects you create You can add a folder and change the current folder To add a folder Action In the User Objects menu click Open Objects list Click New Folder enter the new folder name and click OK End of procedure To change the current folder Action In the User Objects menu click Set Current Folder Select a folder in the list of folders and click OK End of procedure ISD M 038G EN September 2
19. Figure 150 A Sector To create a sector type SAR diagram Step Action 1 Click the Navigation menu and then Create SAR Diagram 2 If not already done check the Draw SAR Diagram box and then fill in the General properties and Search conditions fields 3 n Diagram type area click Sector 4 Click OK The diagram is displayed in the main view 9 End of procedure VI 5 4 PARALLEL ROUTE Parallel route is recommended when two or more ships take part in the search operation on a wide area This type of route is drawn in a R width rectangle Each ship implied in the search follows a trajectory The trajectory of your ship is drawn with a bolded orange line whereas this of the other ships are drawn in dotted lines To configure parallel route you should specify e The spacing between lines S e The width of the search rectangle HR e The length of each line L e The initial position of the diagram P e The number of ships that take part to the search N which ranges from 2 to 5 e The number of the ship s trajectory that corresponds to the ship s number ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 185 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES SAR diagram X General properties h Draw SAR diagram Initial position 48940871 18M n4 5z2 a 710w tH Initial course 026 5 Radius R width 10 00000 nm Search conditions visibility 3 000 nm
20. Gecdis v8 User s Manual The name of the chart This piece of information is also displayed in the Chart List pane of the Chart Database dialog box The value of this field is normally set to United Kingdom because ARCS charts are produced by the UKHO There are eleven chart disks This field shows to which disk the current chart belong in the following format RCx where x is the number of the disk The number of the chart panel 0 means that the panel is a whole chart If the panel is only a part of a chart the value is different from O The name of the panel which is displayed in the Panel List pane of the Chart Database dialog box The number of the edition When the chart is edited for the first time 1 is displayed The edition date of the panel The date when the file has been saved The date when the chart has been edited This date should correspond to the edition date of the file The code of the latest notice to mariners that has been inserted in the panel If O is displayed in this field this means that no notice to mariners has been found in the current panel The date when the latest notice to mariners has been edited If 00 00 00 is displayed in this field this means that the chart hasn t been updated since the last edition of the chart CDs Display Information Mercator 325000 Rakakian 0 0n0 Projection Scale Ellipsoid Mame REFERENCE ELLIPSOID 1380 Horizontal Datum Depth Datum Vertica
21. TESS Biblioth amp ques 3 End of procedure V 2 3 3 Importing One or Several ENC Cells You can import S57 file Step Action 1 Click Import Cells 2 Select e one file and click Import e orafolder and click Import Folder E Emplacements r cents Biblioth ques 3 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 04 04 2014 10 05 Gecdis v8 User s Manual Fichier 031 romer Fallar 131 X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 2 4 GETTING AN IMPORT REPORT Each time you are proceeding to an import of cells a Last Import tab displays in the Charts Database dialog box The Last Import pane describes the result of the process import and the result of an update cell by cell Fen T HE 68 cells imported 482 update s applied 0 cels deleted 0 file s rejected E5400483 000 Quality of data Deleted Imported E5400483 001 Ed 2 1 issued by ES o Canna SS x wigat sys of marks Delete Ree ae Imported E5400483 002 Ed 2 2 issued bv ES Quality of date Inserted Imported E5400483 003 Ed 2 3 issued by ES Coverage Inserted Arer Import E5400483 004 4 yy Navigational system of marks Inserted Imported 5400483 005 Ed 2 5 issued by ES ramar rock Gesi nnas ud Underwater Delete Imported 5100167 000 Ed 4 0 issued by E Underwater awash leted Imported E5400487 001 Ed 4 1 issued by ES Depth area elete Impo
22. e Mobile is out of the area if the mobile leaves the area ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C xSL_L Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To create an area Step Action 1 Click User Objects and then Create Area drag the mouse in the main view clicking each time you want to define the limits of a side of your area 2 Right click to end the area creation process 3 Inthe New Area dialog box enter a name for this area in the Name field and a date in the Date field General Alarms Points List Mame Date 11 07 2013 15 24 21 Type Closed Area Spline Open Line Appearance Line Pattern ee S Colour em Comment OK Cancel 4 Click the Closed Area radio button if you want your area to be closed or the Open Line radio button if you want your area to be opened 9 Inthe Appearance section choose a colour a pattern and a line for this area Note In ECDIS mode all user objects are drawn with the orange color see 1 4 2 page 19 6 Enter if you want a comment for this area You will be able to consult this comment in the area s Object Information window if you select this area 7 Click the Alarms tab This tab must be filled in a logical way In the Send Alarm when area do one of the following e Click The Own Ship if you want to send an alarm when the Own Ship crosses the Zone e Click A mobile in and select one of the mobile in the scrolling list o
23. Figure 146 SAR Diagrams dialog box Search routes are configured through the SAR diagram dialog box This dialog box contains some general information that concerns all diagrams and information that is specific to each diagram So before selecting the type of diagram to be used general search properties should be Set e The initial position of search e The initial route i e the orientation of the first leg which is generally run head wind If the true wind heading is available the Initial course field is filled with the corresponding field e The R radius of the route The radius differs according to the type of diagram The spacing S is automatically computed according to values that are selected for Visibility and Search object The spacing S i e the distance between each line will be all the wider as the visibility is better and the search object huge So a 3 nm visibility and a searched man overboard implies a 0 4 nm spacing S On the contrary a 20 nm visibility for a 24 m searched ship implies a 18 1 nm spacing S ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual To open the dialog box allowing you to configure SAR diagrams Click the Navigation menu then click Create SAR Diagram WHEN WORKING IN A NETWORK SAR DIAGRAMS ARE NOT REPRODUCED IN DIFFERENT MACHINES SO IT IS POSSIBLE TO PREPARE A DIAGRAM ON ONE MACHINE WHILE WORKING ON ANOTHER DIAGRAM ON ANOTHER MACHINE
24. Figure 21 ECS mode Figure 22 ECDIS mode In this case mobile appearance is non ECDIS user In this case mobile appearance is ECDIS forced objects have their own colors and user objects are always drawn in orange 1 4 3 MAN OVER BOARD Man Over Board is a very important command in Gecdis This command is available in different ways e Inthe menu Navigation by selecting the first line Man Over Board e Inthe horizontal toolbar by default there is an assigned button 20 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X3L UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e With the shortcut F8 key This command is not confirmed a man overboard is created just after validation A visible symbol corresponding to the event is created at the Own Ship position and bearing range line is added 1 4 4 PRINTING THE SCREEN Anytime the software allows you to print the main view as shown in the screen provided with mobiles and user objects Everything outside the main view views bars and even dialog boxes does not appear in the printout This function is included in the System menu For greater convenience you could press the Print Screen key of your keyboard This key allows you to access directly the Windows print dialog box The default orientation of the print is always fixed in landscape mode ENC Mercator 1 50 000 WGS84 Overscale d 5 Soundings Heights in m tres Affichage
25. GECDIS v8 USER S MANUAL exar uE GHT SHARPER SENSES LA L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Revision History ISD M 038 A EN 12 07 2013 ECDIS software user manual ISD M 038F EN np 01 01 2013 Appendix D rewrited Update of the backup restore ISD M 038F EN 11 12 2013 Gecdis v8 GE l Application of the iXBlue charter Addition ISD M038 D EN m 24 01 2014 Gecdis v8 1 3 of chapters VIII to XIX Update of chapters 1 3 1 1 4 2 and II Addition of chapter 1 4 6 ISD M 038 E EN 19 03 2014 Gecdis 8 2 1 Update of sections 1 3 1 4 6 V 2 12 4 ISD M 038 F EN 24 06 2014 Gecdis 8 3 1 V 2 13 VII 1 VII 3 1 VIII S 1 Update of appendices B 2 E Addition of section V 2 15 Universal Polar Stereographic Projection ISD M 038 G EN 17 09 2014 Gecdis 8 4 1 Update of Import bathy Section XIII 3 Seapix Update Chapter XVIII Addition of Biomass menu chapter XVII Copyright All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means whether electronic printed manual or otherwise including but not limited to photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose without prior written permission of iXBlue Disclaimer iXBlue specifically disclaims all warranties either expressed or implied included but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with respect t
26. ISD M 038G EN September 2014 277 LUE C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES NT HISTOGRAM 278 Gecdis v8 User s Manual Table 3 SeapiX toolbars Seapix toolbars are available when SeaXpert package is installed with SeapiX mode Keep centered on the ship available in Display menu Start 3D view available in View menu Show Bathymetry 2D layer available in Bathy menu Show Isobaths 2D layer available in Bathy menu Show Hardness histogram to adjust sediment colors available in Sediment menu Show Biomass 2D layer available in Biomass menu Start SeapiX acquisition available in SeapiX menu Show STV view available in SeapiX menu Show Sediment 2D layer available in Sediments menu Show Swaths 2D layer available in SeapiX menu APIX Bearing Range Line Navigation tools available in Navigation menu Store temporarily and Archive seabed data Bathymetry Hardness available in SeapiX menu Create a Mark available in User Objects menu yes Show Biomass histogram to adjust fish W I colors Zub available in Biomass menu Show SONAR view available in View menu Show SAV view available in SeapiX menu ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Show STT view available in SeapiX menu Gecdis v8 User s Manual p Show ECHO view available in SeapiX menu
27. So you can create a toolbar customized to your activity and your needs 11 5 1 INSERTING A NEW BUTTON ZOOM ZOOM Figure 26 Configuring the Toolbar To create a shortcut button in the toolbar Step Action 1 Inthe System menu click Settings and General Configuration or right click directly on the toolbar and then select Customize 2 Onthe Toolbar page select the button where you want insert after your new button 3 After selecting the emplacement click Insert Button The new button is added to the desired location 4 You need to select in the tree structure of the menus the associated command for the new button Items already in the toolbar are automatically disabled ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 35 11 5 2 36 IX 2 LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action 9 Select an icon from the library by clicking the button Image or browsing the hard drive for the desired image by clicking button 6 Validate by clicking OK 7 End of procedure CONTROLS The following list describes the various controls used to manage the configuration of toolbars Use large buttons allows the use of large buttons 64x64 or small 32x32 This parameter affects the size of the toolbar and possibly the information bar Show tooltips controls whether a tooltip is displayed or not when the cursor hovers over a button Toolbar 1 Toolbar 2
28. Tum TEENS omatic SE UPS Universal Polar Stereographic m E lt Automatic gt MM lt Automatic gt Temperature Automatic zm ET Pressure _ lt Automatic gt Automatic LITM default zone Auto ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 139 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action 3 Click OK 4 End of procedure To choose the UPS coordinates as display coordinates for the Own Ship and the cursor e Inthe information pages e Inthe information bar e Inthe critical information window Step Action 1 Inthe nformation pages right click then select Customize option in the contextual menu The Information windows dialog box opens 2 To display the UPS coordinate as display coordinates for the own ship In the Windows area of the Information windows dialog box select the name of the Own Ship i e My ship in the example hereafter and in the Information area choose Position field Then click on H button The Information properties dialog box opens 3 Choose UPS Universal Polar Stereographic for the Unit field then click OK ab Information windows LJ Windows Information Information Bar Label Parent Information Information Pages B Position passerelle OWN SHIP Position conning Critical Informations E Vecteur fond OWN SHIP Ground vector T ON Vecteur surface OWN SHIP Water vector My ship TT
29. VI 5 2 SQUARE SPIRAL ROUTE Square spiral route is normally used for a single ship if the wind drift is low Spiral is drawn in a square each side of which is equal to twice the specified radius in the dialog box When you select this type of route the Spacing S can now be editable This field allows you to enter the length of the two first lines The size of the two following lines will be 2S the two after will be 3S and so on For example if the spacing value is 1 nm the two first lines will measure 1 nm the two following lines 2 nm the two after 3 nm and so on adding 1 each time until reaching the limits of the square spiral that have been defined by the radius xj Search conditions visibility General properties Initial position 3 000 nm 48940871 18M n4 52 no 710w Search object i ud Initial course 026 5 ManOverBoard E Radius R width 10 00000 nm Spacing 5 1 00 nm Diagram type Parallel Ce Square spiral Length L 5 0000 nm C Sector vessel count C Parallel Vessel number Figure 147 Square Spiral Configuration The fist S length line is generally run head wind The square spiral shape is as follows 18 9S Centre of the square spiral Radius Figure 148 Square Spiral ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 183 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To create a square spiral SAR diagram Step A
30. Waypoint Mame Position OO OO OOO00N OO0 O0 OO000E P Turn radius Comment Previous leg Max ATE 1000 0 m Type Rhumb line Great circle Display Context lt None gt OK Cancel Figure 160 New waypoint dialog other than for the 1 point To delete a waypoint Do one of the following actions e n the Route Properties dialog box select one of the line of the table and click A In the main view the selected waypoint is removed if you click OK A new leg links the waypoints that used to be positioned before and after the deleted waypoint e Select a route and then the waypoint you want to delete in this route right clicking it Click Delete Wpt in the pop up menu The waypoint is deleted ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 Step a 2 U DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual To edit a waypoint and change its properties Action Double click the line of the waypoint you want to change or click it and click The Waypoint Properties dialog box is displayed This dialog box is divided in one or two areas Waypoint and optionally Previous Leg if you have selected any line but the first one Modify the properties in the Waypoint Properties dialog box displayed Click OK End of procedure VII 3 3 PLANNING A ROUTE Step Planning a route aims at estimating the duration and speed of your journey To calculate the ETA Estimated Time of Arrival for each waypoint you just need t
31. e Chart e User objects 10 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X I E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual P INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Mobiles ownship target data provided by the sensors available onboard radar trawl system sensors Additional data provided by commercial databases current bathymetry sediments oceano 1 3 1 2 The Menu Bar Gecdis is a Windows based software containing different menus System Display Mobile Navigation User Objects Radar View o Figure 8 The menu bar Here is the list of the basic menus and their use This list can increase depending on your options Radar Oceanography etc Side Mobile Navigation User Centre on Own Ship Fe Orientation Li Relative motion Ctrl F2 Centre on Place Scale Window Zoom zoom 10 zoom Fa Zoom F4 zoom 10 Charts Colour Mode Ecdis Mode Hide All User Obj w True Vectors User Objects Groups k Figure 9 An example menu the Display menu The Windows type menu bar lists all software menus A menu is a list of commands that have in common the action they allow to do It consists of Submenus allowing you to access another menu example Orientation Those kinds of submenus are followed with an arrow Commands allowing you to open dialog boxes example Centre on Place Those commands are followed with suspension points Commands running directly an action example Ecdis Mode Selec
32. e wm em e wl 6 End of procedure 220 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual VIII THE RADAR MODULE Vill 1 Configuring the Radar Source Radar information can be obtained in several ways e Via a digitizer that gives information on a radar overlay e Via a file generally used for simulation This file can bea snr ora srd file Racor Tactical Tools View Display Radar Overlay v Interference Rejector Scan to Scan Echos Average uc oir Controls MetRadar Colours Playback ee E Link to Scale Configure Koden To configure a radar source Step Action 1 Click the Radar menu point to Source and then select your desired source once selected the source is checked 2 df you have selected NetRadar your machine looks for the radar image digitizer 3 End of procedure VIII 2 Turning the Radar On Off Once configured your radar source the first thing you must do is to activate it to turn it on To activate the radar Step Action 1 Click the Radar menu and then Display Radar Overlay 2 The radar is activated and displays information on a layer that overlaps other layers 3 End of procedure ISD M 038G EN September 2014 22 X 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To disable the radar In the Radar menu uncheck Display Radar Overlay Vill 3 Configuring Information of the Radar S
33. 17 01 2014 13 39 43 v Iconbar gt 4 4 b b QM Last quarter 24 01 2014 05 21 Night Day Graph H 16 38 2 2 0 2 DC X 39 2 Station name of the station for which you consult data More than 10 000 stations are listed Date UTC date of consultation of the tidal gauge The date that is written corresponds to the beginning of the tidal curve Icon bar The icon bar allows you to change the date and time of the consultation of the station height of tide Graph The graph is represented with two axes The horizontal axis represents the time and the vertical axis represents the height of tide The dark part represents the night period and the light part represents the day which is the period from the sunset to the sunrise ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 239 C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Gecdis v8 User s Manual To configure a tidal curve Action Click Tide and Display Tide Gauge to display the tide gauges in the main view Display the Tidal Curve window doing one of the following e Click Tide and Tidal Curve e Select a tide gauge and then click the Tidal Curve context sensitive button In the Station scrolling list of the Tidal Curve window do one of the following e Click inside the field and enter your desired place As you type the name you will see the list scrolling e Scroll the list to select the place the tide gauges of which you want to see the evolution In the Date
34. 43 440 N 001 Jf 415259553000 imin 51 01 893N 002 09 613E 0 0kn 216 0 249 09 0 0 51 01 893 N 002 J AIS AIS station 23 6 0s 51 07 966 N 001 20 556 E 51 07 966 N 001 lt 7 AIS AIS station 23 11 05 51 07 329 N 001 20 603 E 51907329 N 0019 7 4 b Figure 67 List of Mobiles Centre on Centres and controls a mobile on the main view The Centre on button is then pressed Display Displays the selected mobile if hidden When a mobile is displayed its specific pieces of information are displayed in black Hide Hides the selected mobile in the main view When a mobile is hidden its specific pieces of information are displayed in grey Dead Reckoning Opens the Dead Reckoning dialog box see section 0 page 120 Appearance Opens the mobile or fleet appearance dialog box see section IV 5 1 page 84 If you click this command after selecting Ships in the left hand pane the mobile general appearance dialog box is displayed If you select a mobile the specific appearance dialog box of this mobile is displayed Configuration Opens the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box See section IV 2 page 74 Own Ship Gives the Own Ship status to the selected mobile see section IV 2 page 74 The button is pressed if the Own Ship is selected Select with cursor Allows to select several mobiles close the ones from the others by dragging the mouse in the main view To open the list of mobiles Click M
35. Chart has no reference Navigate cautiously An error message will also be displayed in the Alarms window Arbitrary reference plane to which both heights of tides and water depths soundings are referenced on a chart Chart datum level to which elevations and heights are referenced Some units are used depending on charts meters fathoms feet fathoms fractions Fathoms Feet no depth V 3 3 2 Mariner s Notes ARCS charts include many notes that are located either landward or seaward When they are landward they take up more space than seaward where you can only see their name and the See note mention Each chart is assigned a list of mariner s note So when you change the current chart you also change the list Wherever you are in a chart it is possible to consult this list Please note that the name of the note on the chart might not be the same as the name of the note window This window will display more generic names Navaids Depths View etc So the chart s dumping prohibited name will be noted as Regulations in the note window Left click Miscellaneous Vertical Datums IALA Region Sources WGS Shifts A SES Nates SEE FELATED ADMIRALTY PUBLICATIONS Notices to Mariners recent imminent and temporary charges Sailing Directions local conditions direct ons regula ions port informationi List of Lights List of Radio Signals navigational warning and weather t ansmissions vessel tra
36. Figure 181 SML querying samples XX 2 2 6 SML Properties Window This resizable window is displayed when the operator edits a SML This is a direct access for viewing and printing the general description the list of issues profile and diagram of SMLs Consultation is possible in each dedicated page Printing depends of the general configuration of Windows 294 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual E SML Properties Filename TATSD Type Optical M System name TAT 8 D3 Segment name General description Position list Profile GSLD Properties Transmission properties Landing country n 1 Fr Power feeding current Landing country n 2 Bu Power feeding voltage 1 Cable ship vercors Power feeding voltage 2 Laying date 12 11 1988 PFE redundancy level Starting date 30 11 1988 Withdrawal date Capacity Initial length between stations 361 648 km Signal specific treatment Initial length between extremity Number of circuits Repeater count Equalizer count Specific gear count Recovery operation Armoured length Buried length In service Figure 182 SML properties window general description General The general description of the SML is divided into 3 parts grouping properties by SESCH categories main general and transmission The properties of the general description can be edited directly in the window Key properties These properties are located in the upper a
37. Gecdis Settings Io Mobiles folder and they will have a spy extension spy System 4 TCP Stream Input Parameters Spying le COMI GPS j n NET1 UDP og TCP1 555erveur TCF1 EE FILE ON Input datum S eb um v On Input TCP1_In spy ER ARPA Range 0 4E ARPA Marker On Qutput TCP1_Out spy LAB Ant Band type Add Delete Close Apply Figure 83 Spying a stream ISD M 038G EN September 2014 E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To spy input and or output data Step Action 1 In System menu click Settings O and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens 2 Inthe left hand list of the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box select the communication port whose data you want to spy 3 Click the Spying tab 4 Doone of the following or both e f you want to spy incoming data check the On Input box and click Apply e f you want to spy outgoing data check the On Output box and click Apply A file is generated in the following access path Gecdis Settings Mobiles TIo You can open it to check data This file is generated as the sentences come or go To be refreshed it needs to be closed and re opened 9 End of procedure IV 6 2 5 Transmitting Sentences via a Stream Gecdis allows you to transform your PC into a sentence simulator transmitting NMEA sentences EN
38. ILIO 2 EECH E tr tirdihumdidnoen betta esco Fire Pra mdr L Qi De ite OL GUT 47 TOP T 3360 8 deele EE 47 L11022 FOV MOOG EE 48 INN OTTEN el Cd Idee VIC 51 vill ISD M 038G EN September 2014 N E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES HE lt GECDIS DISPLAY EEN 54 Ill 1 d EIERE 54 1 2 GOT OR Je 55 1 3 CENTRING ON A EE eege 57 IL A CENTRING ON A MOBILE ececcececnceecececncnececececnenecececacnenecececnsnececececusnecececusnscececusesnsaeeeeuenscesens 59 IL A El Ben RE o rosters 59 1 4 2 OT AY MODIG eege 59 1 4 3 Motion Control 60 1 4 3 1 Relative and True Motion 60 1 4 3 2 Main VIEW Te EE 61 II EE RE 63 IEN The Alarm Window ira i ra iiri erigi 63 HWI 5 2 WRC 425 EE 64 1 5 2 1 COU tee 64 1 5 2 2 Configuring the Display of the Cvente nennen nennen nnn annis 65 11 6 THE VIEW MENU eege 67 IL GINTER Adel OC a 69 IV MOBILES AND FLEETS ccceccccccccccnccccccncccnccenennnceneenecnneennennennneennennesnnenneennenneennennennnenns 72 IV 1 INAV IGA Nd el NER RR 72 IV 1 1 Mobiles Vechors mI Ime Rete nR reme eret re rememeeirereme resi sa esee aa e essais ase aaa 72 IV 1 2 Apparent Wind and True Wind seeeesssesesseseeseeeeeee nennen nnn nnns 73 IV 2 THE DWN Eco pc 74 IV 2 1 KE 74 Vir e TT 75 IV 2 3 Navigation parameierg nennen nnne nnne nn snn inr ssa sns na sss na anrea an
39. PROVIDED Following are the main menus st 1 menu Z00M ZOOM lt ZOOM gt lt lt WINDOW gt gt OWNSHIP NAVIGATION PRINT SETTINGS QUIT 2 menu wen sum pay Immo iecur mem ass M cewrne ow d 3 menu vum vam sm mome 7777 mmm CREME Settings Tava SATHY DISPLAY MARK DISPLAY omone een ISD M 038G EN September 2014 49 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Navigation wmm t tm owns ere mom ee swa emus TI we Te ee en een ee cee wer sorveemwe serm weer eneare cue eem enr weu sawaywl uem wees oaa Tower Tam 5 mor am msn mon ass oa e How to stop using the TurboWin mode Here s how to deactivate the TurboWin mode Step Action 1 Inthe first menu select and validate SETTINGS command ZOOM gt ZOOM lt wZ00Me lt lt WINDOW gt gt OWNSHIP NAVIGATION PRINT em 2 Inthe SETTINGS menu select and validate GENERAL command __ _BATHY DATA BATHY DISPLAY MARK DISPLAY onsem iomo 3 Select the User Interface tab A Uncheck TurboWin mode check box 9 Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply 6 End of procedure 50 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual 1 11 The Information Windows Gecdis gives you the possibility to config
40. Scale Issue Date 1 Application 4 BESVLENK 16 6 Coastal i en non 26 03 2010 06 04 2003 BE4VLBNK 4 7 Approach 145000 26 03 2010 06 04 2003 BESANTWIN 12 8 Harbour 122000 06 07 2010 12 10 2003 BESANT Ww 8 8 Harbour 12000 17 05 2010 01 10 2008 BESKGETE 2 0 Harbour iizDOD oz ogfz009 02 09 2003 BESOOSTE 6 0 Harbour 1 4000 12 02 2010 12 02 2010 BESZEEBR 5 0 Harbour 1 4000 23 03 2010 23 03 2010 BH450064 3 0 Approach 145000 05 07 2010 05 07 2010 BH465014 4 0 Approach 145000 06 07 2010 06 07 2010 BH515014 4 0 Harbour iizDOD 06 07 2010 06 07 2010 E5200203 2 30 General 1700000 07 07 2010 24 06 2008 ESz01080 1 47 General 1700000 22 04 2010 12 08 2005 E5201082 1 15 General 1700000 25 06 2010 09 07 2008 E5201083 1 3 General ii7 n nnn 26 05 2010 8 07 2008 Show only visible cells es Show only visible charts is an option allowing you to list only the charts that are displayed in the main view By default the window lists all the charts available Click Select to load and display the cell End of procedure ISD M 038G EN September 2014 137 V 2 11 IX3LLE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES UPDATING V 2 11 1 Semi Automatic Updating 138 ux I This type of updating consists in importing copying or updating a cell from removable media like CDs IHO or their distributors provide these updates After updating one or more cell s a report tab named Last Import is displayed in the Chart
41. September 2014 ix DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual IV 6 1 2 Mobiles Information The following pieces of information are used to configure mobiles Position dead reckoned acquired Reference position software UTC of position reference software Position bow software Position stern software Position conning software SOG software acquired COG software acquired SOW dead reckoned acquired COW software True heading dead reckoned software acquired Leeway angle dead reckoned acquired Drift speed dead reckoned software The geographical position of the mobile that corresponds to the sensor position e g GPS antenna or a periodic maintenance Example 12 52 294 N 115 21 150 W The last observed position starting setting estimated position etc This position cannot be maintained it is added to the mobile s list of pieces of information whenever Position is available Example 32 06 01500 S 060 46 30500 E lt WGS84 gt The UTC that corresponds to the last reference position of the mobile Example 14 12 2001 11 14 54 The position of Own Ship s stem that relates to the conning position as defined in the Sizes tab of Own Ship s characteristics To open this tab and change the value you should click the name of the desired mobile and then edit the L length field in the Sizes tab Example 12 52 294 N 115 21 1
42. Step 70 display context in the Save current views configuration as field of the Save Configuration dialog box The current configuration of the software display context display of windows zoom factor is saved If you further change the general display context of the software and you want to display this display context you just have to select it End of procedure To select a display context you have already defined Action Click View menu and point to Display contexts A new menu opens If you have already defined display contexts the list of the display contexts is displayed in this menu Select your desired display context End of procedure To update a display context Action Click View menu point to Display Contexts and click Define In the left list of the Display Contexts dialog box select the display context you want to update and click Update The selected display context has been updated to the current configuration of the software To close the dialog box click Close End of procedure ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual Important DO NOT CONFUSE UPDATED WITH THE SELECTION OF A DISPLAY CONTEXT To delete a display context Step Action 1 Click View menu point to Display contexts and click Define 2 Inthe left list of the Display contexts dialog box select the display context you want to delete and click Delete 3 To close the dia
43. TCP Stream Input Parameters Spying CS EN System A d COMI GPS SE NET1 UDP 7 CH TOPI s5Serveur Comment 555erveur TCP1 Par 1001 x Server Address 5S55erveur E 4 Add Delete Close Apply Figure 79 TCP stream client configured with a server name TCP Stream Input Parameters Spying Input Output amp Mobile Configuration EN System a d COMI GPS SE NET1 UDF EB TEPI Ss5erveur Comment 555erveur TCP1 Se ER Input datum 1 NMEA output Pot 1001 EZ d XML output o hE File Emission s server Address me urc d3 AG ARPA Range vi 4 k Add Delete Close Apply Figure 80 Configuring a TCP stream server To use a TCP Stream Action In System menu click Settings I O and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens Select the desired TCP stream in the left hand list of the nput Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box In the Port field of the TCP Stream tab enter the number of the port to be used If you have a client machine in Server Address enter either the name of the server machine or its IP address To learn more about finding the IP address of a machine see Finding the IP Address of a Machine Optionally fill in the Comment field The comment is displayed into brackets in the left hand list after the name of the network stream Clicking allows you to check incoming and outgoing da
44. THE DEEP CONTOUR IS ALWAYS SUPERIOR TO SAFETY CONTOUR AND SAFETY DEPTH Safe chart scale it represents the minimum chart scale to have a safe navigation When a route is created or modified and if that route passes through a chart the scale of it being inferior to the safe chart scale this danger is listed in the associated danger list of the route To define the security contours Step Action 1 Inthe System menu click Settings Charts and then Objects Detection 2 Click the Safe mode or Unsafe mode radio button depending on your desired mode 3 Enter the different values in the fields depending on your needs 4 Click OK You can go back to the default values clicking Default Values 9 End of procedure V 2 13 DANGER DETECTION OR ANTI GROUNDING The danger detection option also called anti grounding is used to detect dangers the ship may cross because they are located on its way This option is only available with the ENC chart module When a danger is detected on ship s run an alarm is generated This alarm is reproduced each time the danger is present in the anti grounding perimeter You can set anti grounding selecting a limit range or period of time e f you select a range danger detection is made in front of the ship according to the range e f you select a period the system computes how far from the Own Ship to detect dangers The maximum detection distance is 12 nautical miles and the maximum detection tim
45. The chart area is then centred on the selected cell with its compilation scale 3 End of procedure V 2 8 IMPORTING DELETING UsER PERMITS The permit file license is a txt file that is required by the application to install all purchased charts This file via USB key CD mail etc is delivered when purchasing official charts It contains as many lines as the number of purchased chart iii permit txt Bloc notos f E x Fichier Edition Por Chart Name Fp ee 13 08 lon Code required to encrypt the chart IEN IBB3vLBME 2O0Q0704058ELEG3DRZFGEFDD22OBLEG3DRZEGEDD22EQULIB3D302jJE281F9 0 pp2210002007 040576538ACETJG6B2D5671 6358ACEdO6BZ2D5657 156465A165535655B8BEOB 0 pEsle6Q00320070405Cc40067CDpFO8sB2BlCCdAQ065 CDFS83B2BlcCO 4dS7FCAOCDO Ab358F58 DpEsle60042007 040585588Fl54B5AGBBO0B5BSSFl54dB5ASBBBOAGOUSDOBBO3I55CB5 Q l 3 5 J DES1T6650200 70405 9BC4 2142 FO0R 0K AE SBC4 21A FODRORAEEADCASEBADIDSBBLE 0 1 DEINORSOZ2Q0070405B55FBS5BlSE QOBAABSOFBSSLSE QQ0BAAFAGEAF275736BAl2 0 8 DR 4 BORNHZ00 S04 OS BL BAD S024 SSI A04SFRLBADS D2 95S A024 sPRETADZCUSOCOSIESEB 0 d DRA RATGNZ OO 704 O5SB2DCE9Cs 2ODFOERSBZDCESCS2ZODFOER SB H1L9F 3S 0 D4110 0 1 DR AR ATGESZ00 70405 ARE ODSACBLIBCI AS AREODSACBLIBC4I ADS SODEY ZO ESD 0 1 DE2NORSOZ2Q007 0405824565214AEU5D3382282458521AEU5DGG220EFS2FBAdBOSCAEG 0 1 DK SKARK ZOO UA 050228401495 9RDR64 62784014 953 9RDBS4 699062 5546245420 0 7 DR 4 SUNDTZ00 7 0405 55
46. UTC field change the date and time field for which you want to see the tidal gauges doing one of the following e With the left and right arrow keys select information of the field and manually change the date pressing the up and down arrow keys e Click the arrow of the date field optionally change the forecasting month with the side arrows of the calendar and click the day of the selected month e Enter directly a date with the keyboard Click P to centre the main view on the gauge of the station you have selected When you drag the trackball in the tidal curve the height of the tidal gauge and the time for this height are indicated End of procedure 236 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual X 3 Configuring the Tidal Stream Display Reference Station Tidal Stream 0 8 n mi above entrance Alloway Creek New Je To configure the tidal stream display Step Action 1 Click Tide and then Settings 2 Choose Tidal Stream tab Reference Station l idal Stream Max B 0 kc Auto Type Tide Arrow EM 3 In the Max field enter the value you want to be considered as the higher tidal stream for the tidal stream arrow display For example if you enter 3 0 the largest arrow available will represent 3 0 kn If there is a tidal stream superior to 3 kn in the main view this field is no longer taken into account and the highest value is as
47. Z coordinates collections from a DXF file and making them available as a standard Gecdis bathymetric source The sounding coordinates are identified from DXF TEXT objects in which Z coordinate is interpreted as a depth in meter negative value XX 3 Definitions Definition Cable Management System DSLD Detail Submarine on Line Diagram _ Drawing exchange Format EvenEnvi General type involving event and environment GSLD General Submarine on Line Diagram MMS DOS MMS DOS Technology mo Submarine Link cable or pipeline Marine cable Management System 308 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 e X3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES iXBlue CONTACT SUPPORT 24 7 CUSTOMER SUPPORT HELPLINE FOR NON EMERGENCY SUPPORT support ixblue com FOR GENUINE EMERGENCIES ONLY North America NORAM 1 888 600 7573 Extension 2 Europe Middle East Africa Latin America EMEA LATAM 33 1 30 08 98 98 Asia Pacific APAC 65 6747 7027 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 309 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES iXBlue CONTACT SALES North America NORAM 1 888 600 7573 iXBlue Inc Boston area US 11 Erie Drive Natick MA 01760 US Office Houston US Europe Middle East Africa Latin America EMEA LATAM 33 1 30 08 88 88 iXBlue SAS Marly France 22 avenue de l Europe Marly le Roi 78160 France Offices Dubai Germany Netherlands Norway UK Italy
48. cir 20 0 coastline surveyed land elevation pipeline overhead coastline unsurveyed i vegetation m cable overhead xb river stream road Fixed bridge Q name D p ei Dn x L amp H x Figure 201 Chart 1 screen 3 C 3 Port Features F This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 and 5 52 Edition 3 4 shorline construction lock gate dam PORT FEATURES E breakwater tidal basin timber yard Figure 202 Chart 1 screen 4 322 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 Gecdis v8 User s Manual C 4 Depths Currents etc H I This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 DEPTHS CURRENTS ETC H I and 5 52 Edition 3 4 pocos P SE to 4 5 DU ape us ee etai em dredged area swept area unsurveyed incompletely surveyed Le vwd x l ki l 1 3 L O G3 Las quality of data zone B Kr of data zone mim rs pee m b o0 tidal stream data quality of data zone ui area of depth less than safety contour lows drying line Dr 32 accuracy shallow contour i a2 82 low safety contour Kn Kn KT accuracy Bd deep contour ee LN Q 2 ar 4 colours For symbolizing of depth areas Figure 203 Chart 1 screen 5 C 5 Seabed Obstructions Pipelines etc J K L This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 SEABED OBSTRUCTIONS PIPELINES ETC J K L fehind Fag rr TE A0 9 c mte Trini mu ERG T dere e Q o D EE gt a ANN T
49. e Correction date corresponding to the most recent date among all elements The list consists of several columns e N is the point number of the line A point with note picture is indicate with n p character e S section number equivalent to the calculated one with repeaters e Comment the point corresponds to the commentary e Position corresponds to the geographic or UTM point e Depth corresponds to the depth point ISD M 038G EN September 2014 297 C IX LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual e Burial a negative value data shows a suspension height while a positive value data shows a deep burying The unit is the same as for the depth e PGL corresponds to the partial geographic lengths for the point e CGL corresponds to the cumulative geographic lengths for the point e Slack corresponds to the slack between two points calculated from cable and geographic partial lengths not for pipeline e PCL corresponding to partial cable length set for the point not for pipeline e CCL corresponding to cumulative cable length set for the point not for pipeline e Cable reference corresponds to the cable reference not for pipeline Context menu Centre on Display notes Edit SML edit Figure 184 Context menu list A right click on an item opens a context menu to perform actions e Centre on Refocus on the geographical point see Center on one element e See details about the point Edit the item see Editing
50. height temperature pressure and angular velocity and the number of figures after the decimal point For example if 1 x has been configured for the Height field 20 44 knot will be rounded up to the first figure after the decimal point 20 4 knot 3d ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C LX KE LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual P INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To access the Format tab Step Action 1 Inthe System menu click Settings and General configuration 2 Inthe Configuration dialog box select the Format tab Configuration X Safety Synchronization User Interface Identification Format Display Time Datum Toolbar Users Alarms i Units Precisions Postion eee eer Ue UCET sei 13 Good Distance Nautical mile NM e zAutomatic Speed lt Automatic gt 1 x Size lt Automatic gt Automatic M Height depth alttude Automatic lt Automatic gt Temperature Automatic T lt Automatic gt Pressure lt Automatic gt e lt Automatic gt Angular velocity Automatic lt Automatic gt UTM default zone Auto e OK Cancel 3 End of procedure The configuration of the position is particular Five formats are available e Geographic Degree Representation of the position in degrees example 43 610N 007 265E e Geo Degree Minute DM Representation of the position in degrees minute example 43 36 585 N 004 15 902bE e Geo Degree Minute Seco
51. 0 36 mm at 1 237 mm viewing distance 1 1 2 INSTALLATION UNINSTALLATION Step AutoPlay Menu XSLUE INTEGRATED SOLUTIONS Install SeaXpert 1 2 5 Manual Contact us Figure 1 CD ROM AutoPlay Menu To install Gecdis into your hard disk Action Connect the HASP key on the USB port of your machine lf Windows asks you to install a new device cancel the procedure the pilot of the dongle will be installed with the installation of Gecdis Put the iXBlue s CD ROM into the appropriate drive ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step 4 Action Select the first line of the autoplay menu with product name reference or if the installation does not start automatically double click on the exe file in the setup folder Select the language for installation An install wizard guides you through the steps of Gecdis installation MEE uN W Welcome to the Seaxpert Setup Wizard This will install 5eaxpert version 2 0 B1 on your computer It is recommended that vou close all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENS Setup Seaapert Preconfiguration Choice Choose one available preconfiguration For the program Select a preconfiguration C Mode Seapix C Mode Turbowin Back Cancel Note You can if you want use Turbo Win menus and shortcuts To do
52. 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris Change time zone Daylight Saving Time ends on Sunday October 26 2014 at 3 00 AM The clock is set to go back 1 hour at that time v Notify me when the clock changes Get more time zone information online How do set the clock and time zone Case ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action 3 Click Change time zone select your desired time zone in the scrolling list and then click OK 4 Click OK 9 End of procedure x eM ER ant Length Offset 4 Source Checking ER Ant Beam Offset ER Cursor position n dn Distance Own Ship Cursor Cursor position AG TTG Own Ship Cursor External Final ETA c i Final destination Acquisition Timed ut U Us i EA VIE e Add Delete Clase Figure 74 Available Information about the Cursor The default information is as follows e The cursor position e The bearing from the Own Ship to the cursor e The distance from the Own Ship to the cursor e The TTG from the Own Ship to the cursor e The ETA from the Own Ship to the cursor e The CPA from the Own Ship to the cursor You can also add information about depth and height of tide in the location of the cursor To do so select one of the system s pieces of information click Add select Information and click the piece of information you want to aad EL e You cannot delete one of the default c
53. 0386 EN September 2014 77 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 6 2 STREAMS A stream is a continuous series of bits being transmitted down a transmission line In other words a stream allows your computer or your program to communicate with other programs or devices passing data into and out Gecdis includes three types of streams communication ports files and networks Each of them corresponds to a particular communicational need via external devices communication ports your own machine files or other machines network IV 6 2 1 Adding and Configuring a Communication Port Step 100 Usually communication ports in your machine are linked to external devices You can configure Gecdis to receive data coming from these devices The sentences are transmitted to the software for them to be analysed Input Output amp Mobile Configuration BHL EN System a SerialPort Input Parameters Spying GO d COMI GPS e EN Input datum S COMI Comment GPS ER NMEA output B XML output Baud Date 4800 ME File Emission E EN Parity i ZS NETI E Ho parity ER TCP1 555erveur SS Data Bits 8 0 4B UTC E ER ARPA Ranae M stop Bits 1 k Add Delete Close Figure 75 Information on Communication Ports To add and configure a communication port Action In System menu click Settings I O and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mo
54. 10 Zoom Zoom Zoom 10 Charte Ecdis Made Hide All User Obj w True Vectors User Objects Groups Einiira 4 rigure 4 Fe Ctrl F2 Crit Si p Le em 2 ne H ics k k k Dav Dusk Might Next Mode Fa Previous Made ShiFE Fa f Mext lt gt Previous e Use the shortcuts for that see section l 2 1 page 6 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Ill 3 Centring on a Place Wherever your main view is you can centre it on a specific place anywhere on Earth The places can also be edited deleted etc NL Centring on a place disable the motion mode on a mobile if it was active To centre the main view on a place Step Action 1 Click Display menu and then Centre on Place The following dialog box appears Centre an Position 2216 00002M 114 10 99998E H ok 5cale 1 250000 Cancel Places Genova al Gbraltar um Gironde Pilot Golfe de Fos Edit Delete 2 Inthe Centre on Place dialog box some default places are specified Select the place on which you want the main view to be centred 3 Optionally in the Scale field change the scale you want to display the place with This main view will be centred on this place with the scale you have just specified 4 Click OK 9 End of procedure Important IF YOU HAVE SPECIFIED A SCALE ALL FUTURE PLACES YOU WILL CENTRE ON WILL HAVE THE SAME SCALE IF YOU DO NOT
55. 3 Select the Video color scale 4 If needed define other settings then close the dialog box 9 End of procedure VIII 4 2 ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY IN THE VIEW Gecdis has an option that you can use each time you modify the radar image range This option enables to fit the main view display zoom in or out to the radar image To adjust the main view display In the Radar menu click Link to Scale Tactical Tools View O Display Radar Overlay v Interference Rejector Scan to Scan Echos Average Source Controls Colours ireto sae VIII 4 3 CONTROLLING RADAR DATA DISPLAY You can at any time control and change the radar data display ISD M 038G EN September 2014 229 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual To change display settings Etape Action 1 Inthe Radar menu click Controls The Radar Controls window displays Video Advanced 2 Click on Video This gives you access to four parameters G EA s 5 b ID EEEE EEEE These parameters are explained in section VIII 3 3 Click on Advanced This gives you access to sixparameters Advanced H Offset 0 0 V Attenuation en These parameters are explained in section VIII 3 s 4 If necessary modify the displayed parameters buttons 9 Fin de proc dure VIII 4 4 OPTIMIZING THE RADAR VIDEO DISPLAY Several ways exist to improve the radar video display e Interference rejector Mutual
56. 4 In the first field of the On the value area enter the slope ratio to correct the value if a continuous drift of the sensor occurs In the second field enter a value for the offset of the sensor e g the difference between the water and the sensor for a sounder 9 Click Apply 6 End of procedure If you apply a correction to the position of your ship as indicated in the above dialog box a blinking point is inserted in ECS mode not in ECDIS This point represents the position of the antenna see below Figure 91 Ship with a corrected position IV 6 5 4 Filtering Tab The Filtering tab is used to reject some acquired values if they go beyond defined thresholds 2 a EN Position Source Checking Corrections Filtering be ER UTE of position reference ER soc a coc Depth n SOW fee i 2 S Filtering by threshold wv 100 0 m Bee ER True heading Filtering by percentage 22 w 10 gt ER Depth Double wal tw m ER charted depth EE vee i Final ETS Filtering is only used with a real acquisition source Final destination E Add Delete Close Apply Figure 92 Filtering a Piece of Information ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 119 Bs E LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To apply filtering to the depth parameter Step Action 1 In System menu click Settings O and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box
57. 4 2 Echogram Display Double click to select a position Popup in pause mode used to know echo exact position i 43 20131 N 005 16 244 E 2013 03 01 16 02 15 23 4m Contextual menu right click Center On Selected Position To center 2D view on the echo Create Mark For Selected Position e Tocreate a mark at selected position Show Echos Positions on Map e To keep an optimal zoom based on seafloor depth Others bf pause jp Echos Enter echogram Pause mode where last hours of record can be visualized recorded Enter 3 Echo mode where 40 degrees on left right can be visualized besides the main central echogram Mouse controls e Use mouse roll on signal to change Display Gain or Filter click to change between both e Use mouse roll on depth to change Zoom level Gain e Use mouse roll on top of echogram to change Depth start level 3 Echos 3G EN September 2014 e X 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XVIII 3 5 RECORD AND DISPLAY SEABED DATA IN REAL TIME Step Action 1 In SeaXpert menu select SeapiX and click Start Record e Todisplay Bathy data click in the Bathy menu Surface or Isolines e Todisplay sediments data in the Sediments menu click Show Official Data db ecc dem Shemi m mn Gm KH i eS E ee gr D gem ps Dvo e ze 11 pe men yarm 3 iT cnm eet Own Ship ee Hh erg sm e ren Bus Example of Bathy display o
58. 6 5 2 Checking Tab The Checking tab allows you to check the informational update When data is written in red this means that the piece of information is invalid undefined or does not exist in SD M 0386 EN September 2014 t3 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES EE My GP52 4 Source Checking Corrections Filtering Ses ER Position E UTC of position reference A Position 9 sow 51 nB42318 N 00172306520 E Valid E True heading O5 07 2013 13 43 37 Acquistion TimeOut 30 0 Poo ER charted depth Elapsed Time From Refresh IEE Aca O4s ez ixBlue Add Delete Close Figure 89 Controlling a Piece of Information Is liable to change It gives the value of the selected piece of information and indicates the state of this data Undefined Invalid Valid High quality Gives the UTC of data provided with information or its timestamp when the value of the information has been obtained Acquisition TimeOut Gives the same value as defined in the Source tab in the above dialog box no acquisition timeout has been entered Elapsed Time from Refresh Defines the refreshing time i e the interval between two updates of the selected piece of information Acq Gives the elapsed time since last acquisition of the value for this piece of information IV 6 5 3 Corrections Tab The Corrections tab allows you to locate exactly the position of your ship Indeed y
59. CHANGE IT ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 97 e xau LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step To add a place to centre on Action Click Display menu Centre on Place and then New The following dialog box appears Mame Position 61 O2 10691N 001 34 26500E d Scale e Current t iy 250000 OK Cancel In the Geographic Place dialog box enter the Name of the new place its Position and choose your desired Scale Click OK End of procedure Step To edit a place Action Click Display Centre on Place and select the place you want to edit Click Edit and change your desired settings in the Geographic Place dialog box When finished click OK End of procedure Step To remove a place Action Click Display Centre on Place and select the place you want to remove Click Delete and Yes in the warning message In the Centre on Place dialog box click OK End of procedure 98 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X KE LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual 1 4 Centring on a Mobile Centring on a mobile is to move the main view but also to enable the motion control on this and update the orientation if head up mode is enabling a Centring command on a mobile is a flip flop command i e it is reversed depending on Ax the current state of the object with a mobile already centered with motion control this command stop th
60. CHARTS Q Gecdis can read several kinds of charts e Raster charts e Vectorial charts A raster chart is a scanned image of a paper chart whereas a vector chart is produced by capturing the details and information on the paper chart digitally The main advantage of the first one is the fact they all have already been produced as paper chart so it is easier to get them The second ones are more complex to produce but they offer more extensive possibilities such as clicking on an object to have information on it Before installing any kind of charts you must have licences or permits To do so you must follow procedures that will make you contact iXBlue s sales department Only the chart module that has been selected by the user can be operated at a time This guarantees projections and datums homogeneity especially concerning ARCS HOWEVER FOR A SAFE NAVIGATION IT IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED TO USE ENC CHARTS THAT ARE CERTIFIED BY THE AUTHORITIES THESE CHARTS OFFER A SET OF AUTOMATIC INTERACTIVE FUNCTIONS FOR SAFETY ALERTS SUCH AS SAFETY SOUNDING LINE DETECTION OF DANGER ON SHIP S ROUTE ETC ENC CHARTS ARE UPDATED REGULARLY Chart Catalogue DISPLAYING THE CHART COVERAGE Displaying the coverage area allows the user to view the outline of all cells available in chart databases ENC ARCS DNC BSB as well as the user objects and mobiles Each cell is symbolized with a frame As it is noted in the legend on the lower right p
61. Complet 51 06 188 N 001726590 E Gecdis v8 19 06 2013 13 47 13 Y 3 OOWIN 1 zo esa wi v4 Uc E 7 u 2 ar e ag s uvsodthiGoodwin gt e A eq DW 20s 15Mi D B5 ke wen ve i Gi d p Eh AO KA Le f eee gg cb lO ee jJ oe Ql eee EE EE ET P M Tren m e E P obs measdesocte ER A a wm wm A Mu p oo Si 5 v ON 3 3 vi G9 4 Sp T b d gt aS EE gem J Si A WS SP rit Ra p WW Bde Figure 23 Printing example 1 4 5 THE MODULES It should be understood that Gecdis is modular software i e that its features will be dependent on the number of installed and loaded modules according to the license provided with the software ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 21 X 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES As its features are not fixed in advance its interface is evolving accordingly It is for this reason that the sample screens in this manual may not always be in accordance with your system Two types are distinguished module The cartographic modules that are providers of chart data They are responsible for their own menus to manage their various parameters and display their data There can only be one active cartographic module In this category are such basic module Planisphere which manages the display of a world map and ENCs evolved module that manages the ECDIS cha
62. End of procedure VII 3 4 DUPLICATING A ROUTE Duplicating a route consists of copying a route you have already created This second route must overlap the first route If you do not modify the location of a waypoint in one of these routes you will only see one route To duplicate a route Step Action 1 Selecta route you have already created 2 Inthe context sensitive buttons on the right of the screen click the Duplicate button The Route Properties dialog box of the new route is displayed giving you the same details as those entered for the first route 3 Doone ofthe following e Click OK This route is superimposed upon the first route You will optionally change it later on when required e Change the parameters as you want for this new route 4 End of procedure VII 3 5 REPRESENTATION OF A ROUTE The representation of the route depends on the status of the route Indeed a route can either be planned or alternate highlighted or not 200 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 AN E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 3 5 1 Alternative Route The route is still displayed with a thin and tight orange dotted line Each waypoint is represented with an orange circle whose centre is the waypoint If you have planned a route the planned speed for each leg is displayed in a small square LI H 1 H 1 D LI LI H 1 LI LI LI 1 PN 1 ub D A i Ae UU 1 Lei e H T es 4
63. Eu muet A MLLELLLLLLLLES EXPL EELER e EE XX Ae eS e eege IC H d CCP IT LU LI LU L Figure 214 Before filtering After filtering there is only one jump the mobile fleet one of the GAPS unfiltered Orange center trace was not deflected juntas iin inches ias as es E ar eal in manas lassen eb as usto uo ts coon adu raisin ids asc de arsenal al quaes ipida is 2s arat tica amaris et iss ck tnmen cn tss aros ds casas Figure 215 After filtering ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 937 E 338 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES SHIP OUTLINE The file describing the ship s outline includes the key words used to identify the different ships parameters followed by their values The parameters are delimited with square brackets and It is highly important to respect the parameters orders The ship is always represented with the stem bow on top X axis is incremented to the right Y axis to the top The couple of points 0 0 is used as marker reference and is located in order to get the most perfect symmetry of the ship s outline and make the shipbuilding easier lt is not necessary to take the Sensor one point GPS antenna as the marker origin Make sure that the lines are well closed to get a nice shape the first and the last couple of points are identical Be careful when defining XY values since too small values can stop the ship s outline display si
64. FEBLOE ZA ZOE 455 ZEEBRLOE ZA ZOE ZAAZDDBEC3GAAAAGEEU 0 9 DRS BORNHZ00 S040 585567554 50Fs49E0A8556 7554 s0Fs9E6A95 CBF SBZIDUEGSGG 0 T DK GSMON2 OO 04 OS DKF SFCOBADIBOGS 2DRFSFCOSADSIBOUS ZO 6FCS PHF ZCHDDU FS 0 1 DRA KATON OO ZU 05 9loooo4 04 6601s01 GT ooob4 04 s60lLstlssCeBlovscarys ZA 0 9 DRA RATES ZOO ZU 05 59CF 564480 PCP S045 9CF 84480 PCP SOA 5CS9CP BBSTIFD3S88Bl 0 1 DRA SUNDT 200 ZU O5F O04 SDS 4C6F4 SOE SFOd4 obese 4C6F4 OES OBSSSF P41 FOF C452 0 2 DR IRCEBHZOO F040 5C D DZ2BED53 78 84 GC D DZ2BEDS537 8784G83FG38COC AA BEBSSA 0 2 FR3O010102007 04058F2O0SFBBOTGOBlAFSSF2OBFBBOIGBLlAFSE2AAQ03065CCDB 4 2665 0 3 0 FRAOlO0sO2007 0405d41dEpBSSCOS5DFl8FOdldESBSSCOSDFlSFGFGUS2CDOB3BUl455 0 1 0 GB2ZO0s000200 04 0582 EBTSSEAF FBDSGOGSB2EHTISSEAF FBD36535B5E2UIB5SDI2088A 0 21 0 GB203s 200200704 05BBSCACSFFLFSs4F56BSCACSFRL6s4F 534 6BS8F50C9C9S57E 0 12 0 d k E 0 d 0 Figure 108 Permit txt Any action importing deleting on the permits is done in the Permits tab of the Charts Database dialog box 134 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Step d ChartsDatabase ee xi Charts History Permits sa certificate User permit ao9FBo39z0228FE09F0274643833 Chat f Server Expiration Date comment Us R201130 Import Permits Delete Permits Delete All Permits Le Ke Bn Ren Men Si Wi Wl Rn Si 6 o o o To inform when a permit is or
65. Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES DpngnnE ECDIS ER Figure 19 ECDIS mode selected Figure 20 ECDIS mode not selected In this case indication is displayed with In this case indication is displayed with red reen color j green colo color and the text is crossed out in red When ECDIS option is not included in the license no indication is given Switching to ECDIS mode brings several changes in the display of geographical views and several functionalities e lf the current chart provider is not compliant ECDIS no map data will be displayed e The cursor has the same shapes as those defined by the ECDIS see 1 3 2 page 17 e The user objects follow ECDIS appearance they are orange e The symbol of event objects is drawn with special icon MOB for example e Some settings that relate to ships appearances cannot be performed see IV 5 page 117 So ship s appearance and the representation of its vectors labels etc may be different e he critical information window is docked if it were floating on the main view chart display mode only e he inconsistent position alarm is forced to activate if it was inactive SSE 25 The ENC permit for the celi bow expired The cell may be oot of date afd MUST ING Warning Vi dft choose to detect ab the dangers H r
66. INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES T MMeell 4Re 2 2 2 V 2 V 2 1 126 Dia Figure 99 Without the planisphere Figure 100 With the planisphere LI elei ear 5 Sel ye fiar To display the planisphere in background Click the Display menu select Charts Chart Display Mode and then check Planisphere In Background or Planisphere depends on the cartographic module ENC Charts iXBlue format INTRODUCTION Gecdis is an ECDIS Electronic Chart Display Information System an informational system for maritime navigation that is considered as the equivalent of an updated maritime chart Gecdis aims at e Improving sea security e Facilitating chart updates e Reducing the bridgework This nautical Geographic Information System GIS is an expert system which contains two elements e A database called ENC Electronic Navigational Chart containing any geographical information that is useful to navigate safely e Integrated equipment Before any ENC can be used in an ECDIS it is loaded into the hard disk and converted into the system s own internal formal SENC The ENC module aims at integrating and displaying completely ENC charts such that sailors do not have to be preoccupied with the format of the data to be used Indeed the SENC cartographic module does not display ENCs but a system of electronic navigational charts Moreover the ENC
67. Line and or Great Circle fields B point s position is automatically displayed in the dialog box Geographic Calculations E Bearing Range Calculations A 51 15 41366N 002 0340058E T Compute bearings and ranges B 50 4307478N Drees T Compute B gece iue 69 995 NI Bearing 242 449 Bearing A gt B 243 087 Bearing B gt A 061 815 Draw Rhumb Line Draw Great Circle End of procedure VLA Piloting fix VI 4 1 OVERVIEW Nowadays GPS is often used to specify ships position even if shore is in sight But this might fail to work and you might wish to test the reliability of such a system comparing it to fixes displayed with a bearing line or a range marker A bearing is the angle of a direction e g a landmark to the ship s axis The position of the ship can be estimated when several bearings are operated The ship will be located in the location where two bearings cross and in the crossing area of three bearings You can also estimate the position with a radar range A circle whose centre is the position of the landmark and the radius is the distance measured by the radar between the ship and the landmark will be displayed You can use bearings at the same as a radar range Bearings are often performed with landmarks in other words near coasts A bearing is a half line whose origin is the position of the landmark Gecdis allows you to operate bearings or radar ranges e From several landmarks at differ
68. Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens 2 Doone of the following e Click Add and then Information e Right click the name of the mobile to which you want to add this piece of information and then click Add and Information in the pop up menu The list of all the pieces of information that have already been added to the mobile are displayed Note that the pieces of information already added to the mobile are greyed 3 End of procedure IV 6 5 CONFIGURING INFORMATION After adding pieces of information you must configure them Depending on those that are selected you can configure or not some fields IV 6 5 1 Source Tab The Source tab allows you to configure the selected piece of information 112 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 I E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES ER My GP52 a Source Checking Corrections Filtering Position FA Position CG A lt Automatic Calculation rate Us Stream Automatic Specific header ER charted depth w Checksum Acquisition TimeOut 3n s ez Blue m Add Delete Clase Figure 88 Configuring the Source of a Piece of Information FeAutomatic TT Allows you to choose the source of your information You can estimate or acquire the major part of the information When you select lt Automatic gt Gecdis chooses in acquisition mode incoming sentences that are the most appropriate an
69. ROUTE PROPERTIES By route properties we mean information entered to create this route The Route Properties dialog box is the following Route Properties Mame Waypoints N bw PM fe Mame Comment Position Route Range Remains Total Range Max STE Turn Radius Speed Comment S0 40 022 N 00 39 444 E 13 82 MM 0 0000 m 18 0 kn 5n 38 132 N O00 35 650 E 231 97 3 053 WM 10 77 NM 3 053 NM 1000 m 100 0 m 18 0 kn 50 37 661 N 000 30 139 E 262 37 3 555 WM 7 214 MM 6 605 NI 1000 m 100 0 m 18 0 kn 5n 35 855 N 000 19 175 E es S 7 214 MM 0 0000 m 13 82 WM 1000 m s eb Shaw great circles detail OK Cancel Figure 159 Route properties dialog VII 3 2 1 Route Fields Name Name of the route By default the name is Route Comment Add any comment on the route VII 3 2 2 Waypoints Fields 196 Each line of the table matches a waypoint and when you double click on a line you can edit the waypoint properties Its equivalent to click on the ET button N Number of the waypoint It is incremented by one for each new waypoint Name Name of the waypoint You can edit this field by clicking the desired cell and entering a name Position Position of the selected waypoint Route Route to follow for the previous leg This field is not filled in for the first waypoint because when a route is indicated for a waypoint it concerns the leg linking the current waypoint to the previous one Range Dis
70. SHARPER SENSES D 4 1 System Information This information is related to the overall system Stream datum OTM o o S m e S iXSea PIXSE TIME MARELEC MA DD iXSea PIXSE HSPOS LONE Hadar cursor D 4 2 Own Ship System Information JJ N ep U 8 This information which the sensors are usually only can be inherited across all own ships Rudder centre starboard and port Propeller pitch centre starboard and port CHAUVIN ARNOUX Thermometer Propeller speed centre starboard and port CHAUVIN ARNOUX Thermometer JJ JJ JJ U U U MWD Wind bearing true MWV VWT Wind speed apparent e Wind bearing apparent S Water temperature Edi Air temperature mE Ir Absolute humidity mE MDA zzz De lt Wind speed true Z O d TS lt Z lt lt lt IL OIZ OIUJ A C rI r gt r gt D gt lt 332 SD M 038G EN September 2014 lt lt UJO B 7 Li L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES asm ewo O T Uwomme e w wwe e lmel ooo per e aswsm Wo o oer sie EECH am ei ere el D 4 3 Own Ship Information Position e iXSea PIXSE POSITI m iXSea PIXSE GPSIN iXSea PIXSE GP2IN iXSea PIXSE USBIN iXSea PIXSE HSPOS THALES PRPS POSL 001 THALES PRPS POSL 002 THALES PRPS POSL 003 THALES PRPS POSL 004 SOG S iXSea PIXSE SPEED COG 8 NM True heading e JRC PJRCD
71. Save exported objects as Current format Current format Ci Users TSTO01 Desktopi Nouveau dossier aze gdb Turbo 2000 format XML format Figure 158 Format select To export a user object Step Action 1 Open the list of user objects User Objects menu and then Open Objects List option select the object s you want to export and click Export in the menu bar of this ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 178 X E L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 3 VII 3 1 194 Step Action window 2 Inthe dialog box select the format of data to export Gecdis or TurboWin and click gt to search and select the destination database 3 You can also create a new database by entering the access path of a file that has not been created yet 4 Click Export and once the export process is done click Close 9 End of procedure Routes CREATING A ROUTE Step A route is a continuous itinerary followed by the ship that links two remote points and possibly separated with intermediate points There are two ways of creating a route e With the cursor e With the Route Properties dialog box To create a route with the cursor Action In the Navigation menu click Create Route with Cursor Click in the main view where you want to insert your first waypoint in the main view Drag the mouse and click where you want to insert your second waypoint Do the same thing for
72. September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step 2 3 To centre the main view on a panel Action In the Chart List dialog box select one of the charts of the Chart List pane The first panel of the chart is selected by default In the Panel List pane select the panel you wish to display Click OK End of procedure V 3 2 2 Installing Uninstalling Charts Step Charts are gathered into 11 CD ROMs After installing permits you will have to install your desired chart CDs on your hard drive in the same location as configured when launching the ARCS module for the first time When you install a new edition of a CD that you have already copied you do not need uninstall it before installing the new edition The folder of the old version is kept during the whole importation process If importation is correct the previous edition is deleted and replaced by the new one Otherwise it is unchanged So you will never lose data x r Install CD l ARCS charts to import D A Install ooo m Installed disk s WKO F_O7 Update CD United Kingdom 15 02 2007 Uninstall RC1 Chart CD United Kingdom 26 10 2006 RC11 Chart CD United Kingdom 30 10 2003 RC4 Chart CD United Kingdom 23 03 2006 Figure 132 Importing a Chart Disk To install a CD Action Click the System menu select Import Charts and then Chart Disks Click the browse button and th
73. September 2014 vii XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES PS EE 25 1 6 NAVIGATION EE 25 1 6 1 BEE 25 1 6 2 NOVAS Fan ME 25 Oe clo Pc TAINO E 25 Bo MEN Lo cael MEER 26 Hobo CIRE MIN METER 26 l 6 3 aio SILO NAG MER Us 26 1 6 3 1 Direct Positioning of Gensore essen annee nnn ann nna a nn nsns sara anna aan 26 L632 EE EE ENTE mm TUTTI 26 Pope eo MEE IL eU Ee aae TERTIO mm 27 1 6 4 TS TMG leet 27 DO MEE HACIA COIN EE 27 LOAZ eelere EE 27 16 4 3 Waypoint Approach Mode 27 1 6 5 MODRO EE 27 16 5 1 Display of Electronic Sea Chart 28 1 6 5 2 Display Of Conning Joniormaion essen nennen nnns nnn ann sna a asas snas aan 28 ESEE E EE 28 Foro 2E Manov BOIN GE 28 LOSS DOGO GE 28 Il GENERHALGONFIGUHATION WE 29 IN IDENTIFICATION E 29 II 2 DISPLAY onion 29 I1 2 1 EE eege EE EE 30 1 2 2 SOLO Oe EE 30 1 2 3 Motion Contro E 31 1 3 CONFIGURING THE MIN 32 1 4 RIESCH 34 1 5 TN OO 8 5 oa assess nee eee ee eta cites 35 1 5 1 Deering a New TU ON EE 35 5 2 Quoque EE 36 1 6 EE 37 II 7 THEU SENS o ae gat ews T MS 38 Il 7 1 ele inte USOT ra mm E 38 Il 7 2 Configuring Users Rights EE 39 1 7 3 Opening a New Session cccccccsessseccceeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseasaeeeeeeeeessueaeeeeeeeeessuaaaeeeeeeeeseuaageses 40 1 8 DAMGER EIEHEC HIEN eessen ed 41 1 9 SYNCHRONIZATION sirrane 43 SE USER UN KEREN 45 1 10 1 Tooltips in chart views 46
74. Single Beam e Select the ship on which the sensor is installed e Then select the flow e And then select the type of sentence 4 Incase of WASSP e Inthe Databases tab check Real time recording database 246 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action e Inthe Data tab select the WASSP output stream e Check the options you want to apply 9 End of procedure However official sediments are sediment databases Importing these databases is done directly from the source folder The access path to this folder is the following NiXBlueNSeaXpertNIXMSedi Thetable of sedimentslists the Thehistogram shows name of sediments registered Thevstuster sediment underthe cursor You can hide registered underthe cursor some gtinem ny Ofen Seng the corresponding box value in percentage and How data is distributed To display the histogram In the Sediments menu select one of the histograms To display the table of sediments In the Sediments menu click Sediments Table ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 247 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XIII BATHYMETRY MODULE SeaXpert bathymetry module is used to represent underwater topography on the chart Two types of visual representation are available e solines that are contour lines that join points of equal elevation given by sounding lines The application allows you to configure
75. System 4 Output Parameters Sentences to transmit d COMI GPS i ELE METI UDP Ea rm E NMEA output on NETI SP MERCHE vw Transmit enable v With checksum ad AML output PO File Emissian Hate Us Talker identifier El GER TCP1 55S5erveur Position format S aS FILEI Precision D xxxxx Datum wv 584 Pf Input datum m 4 k Add Delete Close Apply Figure 84 Parameters of Sentence Transmission Here is the description of the NMEA sentences transmission parameters e Transmit enable This check box allows you to permit the transmission process e With checksum This check box allows you to check that the transmitted sentences are correct The checksum calculates the value of the sentence and indicates it at the end of the sentence with the following syntax x where x defines a number The device that will receive this sentence will also calculate the value of the sentence If both values correspond the one to the other the sentence will be accepted Otherwise it will be rejected e Rate Defines the transmission rate The default value of this field is 1 0 s which means that sentences are transmitted each second ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 107 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e Talker identifier Allows you to indicate a specific talker to begin the transmitted sentences e Precision Defines the precision of the minutes in the position format You can choose to give a min
76. TES s a ee 70 chart database EEN 128 Jo 71 chart loading modes ENEE 136 BEE 70 Chart overview 68 sl 313 charted depth ENEE 98 CUL 98 checking SENTENCES MN 109 drift TEEN 98 CIC CHING TAI Dr 113 drift speed eei retire dte a leder dubie secans 97 COC KS INN EEN 107 Dynamic lee TREE 110 CISA el CAT 175 e ET d 177 E ele EE 176 MOVING 177 jq 175 MO MOTE A 176 See 314 340 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 W DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES elapsed time from ac elapsed time from refresh filtering Tier serere Noo cue mU E SIS threshold E Filtering Lab fixing the position of a ship cccccccssssecccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees fleet erp Amec specific appearance eeeessseeeeeeeeenneenenenn nen Rl AERIS TE ETE ic Gecdis itistallatioti ie cocer ENEE ede Qva E ege ER Pag eaa Geographic calculations ccccceccccseccceeeceeeeceeeaeeceeeneees Mele S TE RP E TT TT height of tide tege information Checking taD ocasion M IH MERI SI SENTIR EPI EEs AES E ENN rara a a TT PN EI E ETT T T correction tab EE GESEIS Site TAD RTT Information access e Run eer adding Information sje PIPER E leeway angle mnn Leeway ANGC cccccccssseccccesececceeseceeeaeeeceeseuaeceesseeeeeessua
77. VII 3 1 page 194 to create a route See section VII 3 6 page 202 to skip to route monitoring IA ISD M 038G EN September 2014 iv i C NX E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES See section VII 1 page 188 to learn more about user database 1 5 2 5 Charts Check that you have imported all the charts you need for your voyage in the chart databases See section V 2 3 page 129 to manage the ENC chart database See section V 2 12 4 page 149 to set values for different water contours and depths that will ensure safe navigation See section V 3 2 1 page 166 to manage the ARCS chart database 1 6 Navigation Tasks 1 6 1 OVERVIEW Navigation consists in four basic tasks e Voyage planning e Positioning e Steering e Monitoring 1 6 2 VOYAGE PLANNING When you plan a voyage you prepare it i e you define calculate and optimize the route You also have to prepare your charts insertion updating e Route planning e Chart calculation e Chart planning 1 6 2 1 Route Planning Route planning allows you to modify an existing route or create a new one A route is defined by the following elements e Position of each waypoint e Turn radius for each waypoint e Safe water calculation based on Safety limits e Lane for each leg cross track error Information is available e Alarm window to alert operator e The object information window to have information on the rou
78. VRM m 175 W WY ign V Z zone cr ation 557 WE 144 014 September 2 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 343
79. a distance that ranges from 1 nm to 1000 nm of the track or the whole track If you select a value that is superior to the length of the track the whole track is displayed Second Scrolling List This scrolling list allows you to select one of the filters and display the profile of this filter The Graph This graph gives you the profile of the parameter for your desired distance When you drag the cursor on one of the points represented in this graph the location to which this location refers in the main view is displayed ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 211 X aL L E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 4 5 CHANGING THE TRACK PROPERTIES Whenever you want you can modify the track s visual representation To change properties of a track Step Action 1 Selecta track and click the Properties context sensitive button 2 Inthe Track Properties dialog box change if you want the line and color and the maximum number of points to display 3 When you choose a color this color is displayed for the half segment of the current track the current segment is the line that starts at the last point recorded in the track 4 End of procedure Name Name of the tracked mobile and the date of creation of the track Line Type of line for the track There are 8 types of lines available Color Color of the track This color is applied only if no track color filter has been assigned to it In ECDIS
80. a specific time This position will be displayed as a target with the DR label and the UTC that corresponds to the fixed positionwill be displayed too This object is only displayed for the current session So if you close Gecdis all positions fixed will be removed from display for the next time you will launch it To fix a position of the Own Ship Do one of the following e Click the Navigation menu and then Fix Own Ship Position e Select your Own Ship and click Fix Position in the pop up menu To fix a position of a ship Select the ship and click Fix Position in the pop up menu IV 8 2 DISPLAY OF FIX POSITIONS Fix positions can be displayed from the Display menu To display the fix positions Click the Display menu and then Display Fix Position IV 8 3 Fix PosiTION SETTINGS Step You can define the duration of the fix position display To define the duration of the fix position display Action Click the Display menu and then Fix Position Filter Set up the display duration with the cursor from 0 to 24 hours Maximum Time for Fix Position Display Oh Only the last position is displayed If you choose 0 only the last fix position will be displayed whatever its creation date is When you open a new session the last settings are automatically applied End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 121 V V 1 V 1 1 122 X 3 E LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES
81. appearance for a mobile clicking Mis Mobile Open Mobile List selecting the mobile and clicking Appearance ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 93 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 6 Configuration IV 6 1 INFORMATION IV 6 1 1 System Information Step 94 System information is data concerning elements that are related to your machine The cursor information the stream information and the UTC are defined as system information e System gives you data about your machine e UTC identifies the date time piece of information that is used by Gecdis This piece of information can be obtained O by Windows selecting a software source In this case ensure that Windows time zone has been correctly set a With a NMEA sentence of your GPS selecting one of your desired NMEA sentences in the scrolling list To access system information Click Mobile and then Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens To configure your time zone Action For example under Windows Seven click the clock in the far right lower part of your screen ACK 1 x 3 07 PM 6 10 2014 In the windows that appears click Change date and time settings The Date and Time dialog box opens a Date and Time Date and Time Additional Clocks Y e A j CN Date E AA Tuesday June 10 2014 1 o J Time 3 10 28 PM Time zone i 1 1 1 UTC
82. closing are quite typical of Windows applications but you must be sure to have connected the dongle software on the computer A ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step To close Gecdis Step 1 To launch Gecdis Action On the desktop system there is definitely a shortcut to launch Gecdis Or otherwise in the Windows taskbar click Start Programs iXBlue then click the line corresponding to the product name as SeaXpert Gecdis C to open the last menu and click again on the line product name The welcome dialog box opens In the list of the User field select the user you want to log on and enter the password for this user in the Password field Welcome to SeaXpert mm Choose a user and enter password User Administrator w Password OK Exit Click OK Note At first start or if you have set a password or more users you will identifier just after the splash screen to continue launching the software Otherwise the identification step is ignored End of procedure Action Click System and then Exit A confirmation window is displayed Click Yes Note Before closing the software saves all the parameters necessary to restart in the same state End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 di X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 2 How to Use the Equipment 1 2 1 THE KEYBOARD SHORTCUT
83. dedicated to the 3D view The elevation gives the viewing angle of the camera compared to the horizontal The orientation is a compass giving the chart orientation The blue side of this compass stands for the geographical north C X KE LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual Note that when the 3D viewing angle is located under water orientation changes by 180 in such a way that North and South are reversed Information bar summing up the selected parameters You can choose to display information or not To do so use the 3D View Configuration dialog box Displayed information is Z X vertical exageration Canvas grid resolution that determines the accuracy of the representation Zoom option dedicated to the 3D view Orientation in Elevation shows camera angle between its direction and the horizontal axis Z Max maximum depth displayed in the 3D view A positive value is a value above O Z Min minimum depth displayed in the 3D view XIV 2 3D Tools This dedicated 3D toolbar cannot be configured Table 2 3D toolbar description zum eme um Canevas grid resolution determines the accuracy of the representation The lower the value is the less accurate the bathymetry representation is The higher the value is the more accurate the bathymetry representation is Automatic mode is a mode that adapts the canevas automatically acconding to the geographic area covered by the camera s vision The more you zoom the better the canev
84. enables to e Fora selected point Q Centre on the point in the main view 2D view Q Create a mark at this location e For the histogram portion that is displayed Q Display all the points of this portion in the main view 2D view Q Store the current portion Important ONCE THE RECORDING PROCESS IS STARTED IT REMAINS ACTIVATED EVENT IF THE PAUSE MODE IS USED WHEN THE PAUSE MODE IS DISABLED THE WINDOW SWITCHES AUTOMATICALLY TO THE SCROLLING MODE AND THE MOST RECENT PINGS ARE DISPLAYED 266 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 D X3 UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Using the mouse wheel enables to e Modify the threshold in dB when the mouse points to the echogram e Zoom the upper part of the echogram when the mouse points to the depth scale This function enables to hide the low part of the echogram the part dedicated to the seabed ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 267 X L LJ v Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XVII BioMAsS MODULE XVII 1 1 INTRODUCTION Biomass optional module allows sounder fish detections to be displayed in 2D map and 3D view It also provides a useful distribution tool to show fish repartition according to their acoustic intensity Supported sounders are SEAPIX multibeam sounder WASSP multibeam sounder and SIMRAD singlebeam sounder with BI500 output ES60 ES70 and others Fish detections in 2
85. for sediment modules e import export Wassp database e Deletes points from the database by a simple geographical selection You can find the module s tools in the Wassp menu rsa Tide View Recording The acquisition of data from the Wassp program is carried out using a quein EM ccu i Empty Current Record TCP stream Therefore Wassp owner software server and SeaXpert Display Points must be properly configured v Biomass Settings XV 2 Configuring and Using WASSP with SeaXpert XV 2 1 CREATING A STREAM DEDICATED TO WASSP DATA Step Action 1 Under System menu I O and Mobiles click Input Output Mobile Configuration and create a TCP nertwork stream Note you must have first disable the simplified mode 2 Inthe Comment field enter a name for the stream WASSP for example This will help you identify the stream 3 Enter the port number 18050 4 Enter the address for the Wassp server e 127 0 0 1 if the Wassp software is running on the same PC as SeaXpert application OR e The IP address or name of the network on which the Wassp software is running ISD M 038G EN September 2014 207 XBLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action usually this address is 192 168 65 10 EA System H 2 NET1 rejeu radar CEP TCP1 Rejeu Acoustic dE TCP3 Comment Wassp H TCP2 Acoustic E ag Our 0 4 Cursor position TCP Stream Input Parameters Spying P
86. from the View menu except the Object information window which is displayed after selecting an object in the main view e By default they are docked most of the time i e they are fixed in a location of the screen that has been previously defined They can be moved outside the area then they are in floating mode and it is possible to resize them You can also locate several views side by side or one above the other In the latter case the first view is displayed above the second one e heycan be part of a display context A display context is a configuration of the screen layout that contains amongst other things windows that have been previously selected by the user You can save this configuration to use and display it later see IIl 7 page 69 When selecting an object in the geographic view a window is displayed on the right of the screen by default It can be moved outside the area by clicking on the white arrow tip In the upper part of the window the selected object is described In the lower part of the window there are buttons to perform different actions based on the selected object ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 15 I X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES W 1 2 En c M Position conning 51905765 M 001 33 216 E Ground vector 18 0 kn 275 99 SOW 18 0 kn True heading 275 99 Depth 48 5 m A Additional Information A Parameters centre Fix Position H
87. group can use all the commands without any limitation If a user is not allowed to use a command he will not be able to open the corresponding dialog box tab etc Check in group columns the level From which the right is granted to the user Right Select windows layout Datum selection Consultation get description Change color mode Resize and move docked windows Edit places catalogue Acknolegde alarms Print charts Configure input output and Own Ship characteristics Set mobile dead reckoning Configure mobile appearance Display Hide mobiles Delete dynamic mobiles Configure information pages and bars mot F Step Captains Navigators Guests 4 x AM qa This command is allowed for all users x Administrators can use this command x x No user can use this command except Administrator Captains and Administrators can use this command UXXXXX XXXXXXXX Figure 29 Configuring Access Rights To configure access rights Action Click System Settings General Configuration and then the Users tab Click Configure Rights button The User Rights window is displayed see Figure 29 This window allows you to select the access rights for the Captain Navigator and Guest types of users ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 37 1 7 3 40 X E L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step d Step Action Do one of the following e To m
88. has the same speed as the ship but its direction is the opposite of the ship e True wind Apparent wind Ship s speed Wind configuration is performed in the nput Output amp Mobiles Configuration dialog box You can add e True wind speed e True wind bearing e Apparent wind speed e Apparent wind bearing Each of them can be dead reckoned computed by the software or acquired However to compute true wind the software requires that information on apparent wind be dead reckoned or acquired The same process occurs to compute apparent wind The following shows how to compute true wind and apparent wind e Example 1 If the vessel is heading west at 7 knots and the wind is from the east at 10 knots the relative wind is 3 knots at 180 degrees In this same example the theoretical wind is 10 knots at 180 degrees if the boat suddenly stops the wind will be at the full 10 knots come from the stern of the vessel 180 degrees from the bow e Example 2 If the vessel is heading west at 5 knots and the wind is from the southeast at 7 07 knots the relative wind is 5 knots at 270 degrees In this same example the theoretical wind is 7 07 knots at 225 degrees if the boat suddenly stops the wind will be at the full 7 07 knots come from the port quarter of the vessel 225 degrees from the bow ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 92 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 2 The Own Ship You can as
89. in three parts e Above a menu bar allows you to manage mobiles e Onthe left the list of all kinds of mobiles i e Ships and each fleet e On the right the mobiles and possibly the trawl net of the selected element in the left hand pane and information about them The pieces of information are gathered into several columns You can sort them out either in ascending or in descending order The menu bar allows you to hide display objects and open the dialog boxes about mobile and fleet dead reckoning appearance and configuration You can also select a mobile centre and display its related information in the Object information window on the right of the screen To do so you must double click the desired mobile 76 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Display Appearance Configuration Centre Track Start Colour i 7 Select with cursor Real time sort Fleets Name Age Position conning 50G COG sow True ROT Depth Call sign Pasition Ships Gi iXBlue 1 0s 51 02 9319N 001 39 516E 18 0kn 333 0 18 0kn 333 0 51 02 919 N 001 J 415 ixBlue DR 1h3 50 07 875 N 000 41 264 W 19 4kn 067 7 19 0kn 057 0 50 07 875 N 000 Arpa Jf 415000000000 30 0s 50959188 N 001 57 883E 0 0kn 000 0 50 59 188 N 001 J AISi1235004391 6min 51 06 825N 001 19 279E 160 0 40 0 51 06 825 N 001 X 4151244014000 3min 50 43 440 N 001 34 361E 0 0 kn 358 0 016 0 0 0 50
90. is going to be expired or if a permit is invalid Expiration date of the permit i e date until which the chart is available ID of the data server PM Primar UK UKHO The permits can be delivered by several different data server List of charts purchased with the imported permit Figure 109 Permit tab To import a permit Action Click Import Permits In the media containing the permit select the permit txt file Click Import Once imported the permits are stored in the Settings directory of the application in the SdnENC pmt file End of procedure To delete one or several permits Action Select one or several lines pressing Ctrl key and click Delete Permits You can also delete all permits at once by clicking Delete All Permits Charts Database i E x Charts History Permits sa certificate User permit Z209F E939 70226FE09F 0274643833 Expiration Date Comment I4 Import Permits AR2D1130 O 31 05 2011 AR301150 31 05 2011 AR302120 O 31 05 2011 EE AR401590 31 05 2011 Delete All Permits AR4D2400 D 31 05 2011 AR402550 O 31 05 2011 AR402560 O 31 05 2011 AR420D10 o 31 05 2011 AR420020 O 31 05 2011 AR420030 O 31 05 2011 AR420D4D O 31 05 2011 AR420050 O 31 05 2011 AR4EMO42 O 31 05 2011 BEIEN 31 05 2011 End of procedure ISD M 038G EN September 2014 135 C IX L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 2 9 L
91. max and min values of the sounding lines e Colored surface that is used to represent the sensors by a colored texture ranging from green for less deep depths to blue for the deepest depths Display this surface can appear opaque or transparent to see chart and user data On the contrary to isolines this representation of bathymetry can be used to represent areas all over the globe if you have the corresponding data files Dark blue represents here deep areas Isolines Eun mum uu m di mp GEO Light colors represent not very deep areas 174 16 0 248 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 gt 4 3 E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIOHT SHARPER SENSES XIIl 1 Display Configuration SeaXpert enables to customize the visual representation of bathymetry Therefore you can e Change the color code e Define the area s boundaries to display by entering the min and max depths e Add effects shadow light and transparency e Configure the value of two isolines System Display KS Sg 7 eer Bathy Charts Acoustic E Weather Radar Sediments Statistics Wassp Tide View Toolbar X X T ZOOM OWN SHIP HOME ERBL ERBL ka ROUTE NIGHT SYSTEM H ANCE A A DATA TM ENC Mercator 1 25 000 WGS84 Soundings Heights in n meters Display Base 30 view Bathymetry x SET ji Gr SH 10m Range at z 0m Zmax 30 7m E 11 0 4030NM 0 6283NM Zmin 102m XX XX xxx XXX XX XXX 7 BEAR XXX X D
92. mode all user objects are drawn with the orange color see l 4 2 page 19 Display at most The maximum number of points for the track The track stops if this maximum number is reached VILS Marke and Events VII 5 1 CREATING MARKS In this part you will see how to create a mark and an event The difference between both of them is that a mark can be inserted anywhere in the main view whereas an event can only be inserted in the current ship s position events are mainly used when an immediate decision should be taken 214 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step 3 Gecdis v8 User s Manual Mark General Alarms Position Date 11 07 2013 08 53 24 Mame Charted depth 0 0000 m Immersion 0 0000 m Appearance dis i Colour Svmbal ae r Comment OK Cancel Figure 169 Mark properties dialog To create a mark Action Click User Objects and then Create Mark in the main view where you want to create your mark A dialog box allowing you to configure the mark is displayed You can define the different parameters of the mark e Position e Date e Name e Charted depth e Immersion e Appearance defined by a symbol and color Note To improve the repetitive tasks the last four colors and symbols used are selectable directly In ECDIS mode all user objects are drawn with the orange color see 1 4 2 page 19 e Comment Note The c
93. mode the mobile is at a fixed position in the view and all other objects are moving when the mobile moves You can adjust the mobile position in the view with the keyboard arrows 11 4 3 MOTION CONTROL details 1 4 3 1 Relative and True Motion 60 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X3 UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Kasel r Warning You didn t choose to detect all the dangers 51907 25 ooo oot oe E meet ea A y i a be I n AUD BAR i i wei i Ae i 1 1 FL oi L L 1 ra d 1 F oi ef a V 1 e 1 i AMA BBSS ST MR Get E i AA yW i n Let E EI PDUM EE E EE GE Se i F P ell d S1 06 7SN at 2 EE ELS AAA AA AA A g ae 001 42 50E 001 43 00E d 50E 001 44 00E Figure 48 Relative motion e True motion In this mode mobile movements are visible in the view as the fixed objects remain in the same place 001 36 00E 001 36 S0E Figure 49 True motion REI True motion mode is more powerful than relative motion To change the motion control mode do one of the following e Click the Relative motion line in the Display menu The state of this line indicates the current mode e Use the shortcut for that see section 1 2 1 page 6 IL A 32 Main view orientation There are three different orientations e North up the view is oriented according to the geographic north It is the default mode ISD M 0386 EN Septem
94. north NS Size Indication that indicates the distance between the more northern and southern points of an area OSD Own Ship Data The sentence that gives Own Ship data heading route speed current drift Overscale The display of the chart information at a display scale larger than the compilation scale Over scaling may arise from deliberate over scaling by the mariner or from automatic over scaling by ECDIS in compiling a display when the data included is at various scales Information displayed at a display scale greater than the compilation scale This may be done deliberately by the user or it may occur automatically during display compilation if the data relate to different scales Own Ship Cursor Bearing Bearing relative to the geographical north between the Own Ship and the cursor Position bow The frontal position of the ship that can be defined in the Sizes tab of Own Ship characteristics Position stern The back position of the ship Presentation Library The library of symbols defined in the display specifications in S 52 appendix 2 Colour and Symbol Specifications for ECDIS It contains the following pages Information about the chart display Shore features ports Depth currents Seabed obstructions pipelines Routes Special areas Buoys beacons lights radar Paper charts buoys and beacons Mariner s symbols The presentation library is available in hard copy or in digital form
95. of system information ships and fleets ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 117 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e n advanced mode all configured parameters The colour of a piece of information expresses its status e Red if invalid or undefined e Black or white depending on the background if valid or of normal quality e Blue if of high quality The first column lists all information that relates to each object The other ones give information about them e Value indicates the value of the piece of information e Source gives the origin of the piece of information In case of dead reckoning or computation either Estimate or Software are displayed If the piece of information is acquired the source of acquisition is displayed e Stream allows you to know on what stream the piece of information is connected The name of the sensor is given into brackets This name may have been filled in when configuring the stream Comment field e Calc rate specifies the rate a piece of information is calculated Z Input Output Summary Basic mode Realtime Print Input Output Summary Software SeaXpert version 40 0 4 0 Processor Intel R Core TM 2 Duo CPU T7250 2 00GHz Operating System Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 DirectX version 9 4 09 00 0904 Physical memory 512 MB Number of serial ports 1 Computer name vb winxp IP Addresses 10 0 2 15 Taking account elapsed time b
96. one and so on amp Prints on the default printer the route properties in the form of a table To add a waypoint to a route with the Waypoint Properties dialog box Step Action 1 Select a route and access the Houte Properties dialog box clicking the Properties context sensitive button 2 Inthe table of the Route Properties dialog box click the waypoint before which you want to add a waypoint and then the gr button 3 Inthe Waypoint Properties dialog box enter a name a position a turn radius a max XTE and if you want a comment 4 Click the Rhumb line or Great circle radio button if you want the leg that ends with this waypoint to be computed with rhumb line or great circle 9 If you want select a display context in the Display Context scrolling list 6 Click OK 7 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 ive 198 xSL_L Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step To add a waypoint to a route with pop up menus Action Select a route and then right click the waypoint before which or after which you want to add another waypoint A pop up menu opens Do one of the following e Click Insert Wpt After if you want to insert a waypoint after the selected waypoint e Click Insert Wpt Before if you want to insert a waypoint before the selected waypoint Drag the mouse to insert the new waypoint in your desired location End of procedure Waypoint pn 4 Properties OAM
97. opens 2 In the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box click Depth and then the Filtering tab 3 You can apply two types of filtering e By threshold If the difference absolute value between two acquired values goes beyond the threshold indicated the last value will not be taken into account e By percentage If the difference between two acquired values goes beyond the percentage indicated the last value will not be taken into account 4 Check the Double value reject box when you do not want to take into account an acquired value if twice bigger than the last acquired value This may occur if the echo of a sounder is also acquired This is only available for the depth piece of information 9 End of procedure For threshold and percentage filtering if two consecutive values go beyond one of the defined filters they will be rejected but the third will automatically be accepted even if it also goes beyond one of the filters that have been defined IV 6 6 INHERITING INFORMATION Inheriting information is a process that consists in duplicating from a mobile to another one all pieces of information that are not already added to the latter This process implies a strong relationship between both mobiles For example as soon as a piece of information is removed from the mobile that inherits information the piece of information will be inherited from the parent mobile Also if a piece of information is not a
98. permit file that is a t xt file required by the software to install all purchased charts It contains as many lines as the number of purchased charts 128 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Si permit txt Bloc notes Ioj x Fichier Edition Format 3 Chart Name DATE 200 01 8715 08 Code required to encrypt the chart gt VERSION E IBE3VLBNKE OOF 04 OS GR LEGS DRFEREDC ne FE RE OD VL Bzpai 5 pgE2210002007 04057638ACEJG6S2D5671 ACE4662056 71646416055 9658B6E56 DESLHO00s 200704 05C4 O06 SCOFSSBZBLCC4A OOS YCOFSSBZBLOO4H SFCOCDOASSSFYS pEsT6004200 04058588B5SFl54B5AOGBBOSSSBSSFIlS5dBOABBSQABOUSBDOBBOUSTSOCBS pE5T1656502007 04059BCcA421A2F DBO0BAEBBCAI21A2F DBSOSAEEADCAEBADIDSBBIE DKIlNOREO200 0405B556FBS5OTS5E QO0BAABSOFBS5SOBISE OD0BAAFAGEAF275736BAl 2 pK2BORNHZOQ 0405BlBAS3D25505A023FBlBAGO3D2585AQ023FSEJMADZCOSOCOSESB 0 pk2kKATGM20Q0 04053B2DCEDC320DF ESSB2DCEBCS2 DF EB7B z amp 6l8F3 0 7Ddlllp Q DEZEATGSZ00 0405 A6EODRACBLIBC4I AS ABEODRACB1LSBC4 A04 S6DE SORSELYESD O pk2NORSEO200 04058245521 14AEQ05D0522524682 AEQSpOGZ220EFSZ2FOAdTODSCAED Q pkE25kKARKZ20Q0 0430552284014635Bppo45652254014o538BDBSdEBBDpAS255A82A54 2D 0 pkEz2SINDTZ20070405557FEBLlOUE 43Q0F7A557FEBlOE As UF AAZ2GBFCSSAdAJASEEUO 0 DE SBORNHZ00 0405833587554 50Fs9E6485567505450Fs59E6495 CBFOOBZIDOEYY 0 DR4GSMONZ 00704 OS DBF SFCOSADIBOUS 2DRFSPCOOADIBOUSZ0 6RCS3 OF 8907
99. point symbols cable references transmission properties cable lengths i e slack and GSLD are not available for pipeline Bathymetry management is already part of the Gecdis software This existing functionality is extended with the ability to import bathymetric data from DXF files Regarding UTM coordinates management this functionality is included in a core library of Gecdis UTM MANAGEMENT This function provides the ability to express and operate UTM coordinates in the software The software allows the following operations e Configure the UTM zone automatic or between 1 and 60 e Enter a UTM position e Convert a position in UTM coordinates The display and data input of coordinates are based on the configuration in the general configuration window This window is extended to propose the selection of UTM coordinates ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual XX 2 2 SML DATABASE MANAGEMENT This is the main function of MMS view create and modify underwater lines objects and pipelines to view or print reports XX 2 2 1 General Overview of Access to Functions The ergonomics of this module are consistents with the general ergonomics of Gecdis Access to functions of the MMS module is via submenus and display menus Display menu The main access is made from the Display menu System 85 Mobile Navigation User Objects Bathy Charts Acoustic Analyses Weather Radar Sediments Statisti
100. radar interference may occur in the vicinity of another radar It is seen on the screen as a number of bright spikes in the form of curved 230 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 w i C E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES spoke like dotted lines extending from the center to the edge of the picture This type of interference can be reduced by activating the Interference Rejector e Scan to scan This option enables to improve the video display and decrease the noise by comparing the display of previous scans up to 5 scans and to display the only data that is persistent from a scan to another until the current scan SC SC Number of scan to take into account for the display e Echos average This option enables to improve the video display and decrease the noise by averaging the preceding scans up to 3 scans and the current scan ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 25 eU 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IX REPLAY MODULE Replay module allows users to play back and thus view mobiles tracks Once these tracks are stopped and stored in Gecdis user database you can play back the routes of the different mobiles in order for example to proceed to analyses Launching the replay module opens another Gecdis application on the second screen Since this occurrence of the application is used by the replay mode some of the menus such as for example those that are use
101. route between the Ship and the entered coordinates It is not possible to save this type of route status Outputs Manual Steering Course Heading To Steer 000 00 Track Keeping Pilot Ea one Waypoint OOF 00 OOO00N OO0S0O0OTO0D0CE Ok Cancel Figure 166 Autopilot control dialog To open the autopilot control dialog box In the Navigation menu click Autopilot Control To use the steering course mode Action In the Autopilot Control dialog box select Steering Course option and then enter a value in the Heading To Steer field Click OK or Apply A dotted line is displayed with the same heading as the one you entered To follow the mentioned course you will have to follow this line End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 2L LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Step Step To use the route monitoring mode Action To start do one of the following actions e Inthe Autopilot Control dialog box select the Track keeping option If your ship is not in the lane of the route to follow a message displays warning you that you cannot start the route monitoring and the Manual mode is selected e Inthe Navigation menu click Start Route Monitoring To stop the route monitoring mode do one of the following e Inthe Autopilot Control dialog box select the Manual radio button e Click the Navigation menu and Stop Track Keeping End of procedure
102. screen For example you can optimize the placement of the various windows that you need define what own ship information and in what order you want to view or select the commands you use most often See section II 5 page 35 to configure the toolbar see section ll 11 page 51 to configure information windows See section Ill 7 page 69 for more information about Gecdis customization CHECKING You must check that your system is configured with the correct datum to avoid errors while positioning See section IA page 34 to select the current datum Sensors Check the configuration of your sensors Each sensor must be connected to a communication port of your machine You add these communication ports to Gecdis and configure them to acquire specific sentences See section IV 6 2 page 100 to configure a stream See section IV 6 5 page 112 to configure information Implementing Alarms Many alarms are managed in Gecdis Here are some links to set some alarms See section II 6 page 37 to configure alarms display See section III 5 page 63 to consult alarms See section II 8 page 45 to configure the danger detection See section IV 3 page 76 to manage specific alarms to Own Ship see section VII 5 page 212 to assign to an area an alarm when a ship enters or leaves Route Management Routes are a very important step to navigation You will certainly need to create routes before any departure with a new itinerary see section
103. so check the option Turbowin Mode in the Wizard Preconfiguration Choice page However we do not recommend using this mode Indeed it has limits related to Gecdis interaction modalities For those who are using TurboWin it is only intended to help them use Gecdis ergonomics See 0 page 48 for an overview of this mode The CD ROM content is then copied into your hard disk and you can eject at the end of the procedure End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 3 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To uninstall Gecdis from your hard disk Step Action 1 Open Windows Control Panel 2 Select Add Remove Programs 3 Select Gecdis in the list of programs and click Uninstall 4 An uninstallation wizard will guide you through the required steps 9 End of procedure 1 1 3 LAUNCHING AND CLOSING GECDIS My Documents SI NS My Computer gu My Network Places E Recycle Bin f Internet Explorer N Connect to f Set Program Access and Defaults Windows Update gt Le Accessories A Startup Documents d E Internet Explorer e w Outlook Express Li Oracle VM VirtualBox Guest Additions gt Search DE iBlue n Seaxpert eee cannes meat m g Programs Settings Help Location C Program Files ixBlue Seaxpert Run HO ASL a un P c m d J a E Porat 16 Sad m 15 45 Figure 2 Launching Gecdis Gecdis launching and
104. the main view to specify a position for the landmark The position of the landmark and the bearing and or radar range are specified Optionally change those two values Click Add to take into account the observation Do the same for the other bearings radar ranges Optionally insert the fixed point delete all bearings radar ranges or set an EP Click Close to close the dialog box End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 181 XBLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VI 5 VI 5 1 182 Gecdis v8 User s Manual To delete a bearing Right click the bearing radar range circle Click Delete in the pop up menu SAR Diagrams OVERVIEW The Search and Rescue SAR system helps navigators to search an object ship man over board lost at sea SAR is used with three different diagrams Each diagram allows to display a different search route e Bysquare spiral e By sectors e By parallels from 1 to 5 ships Those diagrams comply with those of the IAMSAR manual book 3 SAR diagram E x Search conditions visibility 3 000 nr General properties Draw SAR diagram Initial pasition 48940871 18M n4 5z2 0a 710w S i Initial course 026 5 Radius R width 10 00000 nm Search object ManOverBoard v 1 00 nm Spacing 5 Parallel Square spiral Length L 5 0000 nm C Sector vessel count C Parallel Vessel number
105. the other hand if the jumps are recorded on certain information must activate their filtering such as the geographical position in this case we must think also filter the horizontal spread 330 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual CH E System a Source Checking l Corrections Filtering X Trawl net e E Position m l Position port side lw Position lf Position starboard TN Filtering by threshold v 40 ae ER warp length qm m us ER Eccentricity E bn Se i SOG ps i COG be ER Submersion Filtering is only used with a real acquisition source AG Horizontal spread e Add Delete Figure 213 Trawl net filtering Note To highlight the filtering on the following examples a GAPS fleet has been added in addition to the trawl net which allows you to view the trail on the panels green Before filtering we note two jumps one on the starboard panel mobile one and the center position orange 3 1 D 1 U H i fi H D d A a 7 t f DH H b j o H d H 1 dei K H 7 ages eg H CS i d rds D wgl ee KE cur 4 id H et te rb L daer eg Le EE EE ae el A aad ea ee Perera s eme eeng be et CE EE TEES D MEI LIIS Tg aan d e eg per ues 4 ee H Se ers s t ec c A 2 e SC o L S Be e gege eege P t D r eenen a 2 Be a A d ges M 57 15 30N ween Pee Serie eTue Ue
106. the other waypoints Right click when you want to finish your route When you right click the leg you have just created will be deleted if you have not first clicked on the left button The Route Properties dialog box displays information about the waypoints of the route To validate your route click OK End of procedure ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X3L UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To create a route with a list of waypoints Step Action 1 Inthe Navigation menu click Create Route The Route Properties dialog box displays 2 Editthe first waypoint by entering values in the editable fields Name and Position and by clicking non editable fields to access the Waypoint n Properties dialog box Waypoint n 1 Propertie Waypoint Mame Position DO DO ODODON 000 00 O0000E I Turn radius Comment OK Cancel Waypoint dialog box for the first waypoint 3 Add the other waypoints clicking the lE button or with the keyboard doing the following e Press the Ctrl Enter key combination to add a waypoint e Press the keyboard TAB key to switch between the Name and the Position columns 4 Click OK to save the route 9 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 125 LX 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 3 2
107. transmitted Clearing Line Half line made from seamarks that allow to avoid dangers Course make good of the ship Compilation Scale The scale to which the data were initially compiled For example this may define the scale of the paper chart used for the digitization of the data This scale is determined by the hydrographic agency and coded in the navigation chart Conning position The reference position of the ship If the positioning system is not located on the bridge the value of this position is the result of the correction that is specified by the user State of dependence of an object related to another object Geographical co ordinates of a spot that is numerically represented on two axes Data altered or modified since production issuance or retrieval A geographical area that describes the coverage and extent of special objects Leeway track of the ship that is the result of true heading and leeway angle Maximum closing point i e point of closest distance between two mobiles Entity in which user objects are stored in a structured way Datum A set of parameters defining a coordinate system and a set of control points whose geometric relationships are known either through measurement or calculation ole ISD M 038G EN September 2014 A E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Deep Contour Isobath that marks the boundaries of a water plane in which depth is deeper A part o
108. weather parameters under the form of coloured areas or vectors XI 1 Data Download The import of weather data generates GHIB files grb Weather Display Id First a Previous be Next Date 17 01 2014 06 00 00 Pressure Wind Contour Color 5cheme Cursor Pressure Wind Grib file C Program Files tABlu Mediterranean wind grb To import a file Step Action 1 Click Weather and then Weather Display 2 Inthe Grib file of the Weather Display dialog box enter the path to the file to import 3 End of procedure X1 2 Pressure The Grib option enables to display pressure information This data is available via weather data files Once selected received data is analyzed and displayed in Gecdis The visual representation is as follows 242 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual You can also display the isolines and the legend To display pressure data Step Action 1 Click Weather and then Weather Display 2 Select Pressure 3 End of procedure To display pressure isolines Step Action 1 Click Weather and then Weather Display 2 Click Contour 3 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 243 X L LJ v Gecdis v8 User s Manual To display the legend Step Action 1 Click Weather and then Weather Display 2 Click Color Scheme 3 End of procedure ALA Wind The Grib option enables to display
109. window enter your text ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 219 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action Times Mew Roman Occidental 1 170 Y Bs H ES My text s beautiful Date 11 07 2013 15 27 58 Position 50 35 45710N O00 32 65349E P OK Cancel Apply 3 Format your text with the formatting bar You can e Change your font e Change the size of your font e Change the general appearance of the font assigning to it the bold italic underlined characteristics or changing its colour e Change the alignment of the font e Insert bullets Note In ECDIS mode all user objects are drawn with the orange color see 1 4 2 page 19 4 Enter a date in the Date field and If you want change the position in the Position field 9 Click OK When you have created a text you can edit it shift it hide it or delete it selecting it and clicking the corresponding right context sensitive buttons DO A A AA A OOOAWIPP e mm mm mm mm mm mm mc wm wm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm cb ms mm ms mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mb e mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm e
110. your new information will be inserted Click the button or click right on the list and select Add information command The Add information dialog box opens displaying the available pieces of information Parent TOWN SHIP E Position i charted depth i OTC of position reference Le Final ETA E so P Final destination e coc P vm 5 sow Le Heading to steer E cow P won 4 k OK Cancel Select a parent i e to which element information you will add must be related Note When you select OWN SHIP as the parent the piece of information you will add will always concern the Own Ship even if you change it afterwards The list of pieces of information is made with those on the parent and those absent from the window If you want to display all pieces of information check the Display all information box Select the piece of information you want to add Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just add by clicking Add Optionally change the label by double clicking on it or using the property button Repeat the same steps anytime you want to add a piece of information When finished click OK on the first dialog box End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 23 e X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES lll GECDIS DISPLAY The section 1 3 1 page 10 provides a detailed content of the Gecdis screen description This chapter presents different concepts to wor
111. 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 50741 788 M n U6 447 E zwias84 valid Administrator Information Mo 2406 2013 12 00 00 40008 IxMIoMobile Gwn Ship ixBlue 51 06163M O01 20 207 E zW ase 47 valid He Administrator warning Yo 21 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own ship Blue S0 59 799 N 001 42 043 E zwase47 Invalid H Administrator A warning Yaa 21 06 2013 12 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Gwn Ship ixBlue 50759 799 N 001 4 2 043 E zWi ases3 Invalid H Administrator warning Yo 21 06 2013 08 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Blue S0 59 799 N 001 42 043 E zwase47 Invalid H Administrator Warning Yaa 2006 2013 15 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship ixBlue xx xx xxx xxx xxxxx W G584 Undefined Administrator Warning Yo 20M06 2013 12 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship ixBlue xx xxXxxx xxx xxxxx W sa84 Undefined Administrator Information Mo 19 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Gwn Ship ixBlue 51 05 589 N 001 35 922 E zWi s847 Valid He Administrator E Information Mo 1906 2013 12 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship ixBlue 51 03 80 M 01 19 D87 E zwase47 valid He Administrator e Display T Blue 51 06 389 N 001923444 E lt Wiase4 gt valid Heading 275 9 High quality 5OW 18 0 kn Valid lt P Base Standard i all e Filter TI E Figure 57 Filtered Black Box 11 6 The View Menu Gecdis screen consists of many different window
112. 01 19 371 E 12 25 38 A Own Ship Inconsistent positioNwith ixBlue DR difference 4 594 NM W ACK K a2 Figure 59 The Chart Overview Chart 2 allows you to display close another main view with the same scale toggle command You can resize this second window and it can be used to display another type of information e g for oceanographic use When your cursor moves into this window its position is represented in the main view ISD M 038G EN September 2014 wp I E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e Critical Information allows you to open a submenu to critical information window management See 1 3 1 6 page 13 e Custom Information allows you to open a submenu to display close the information bar and pages windows toggle command See 1 3 1 6 page 13 e Channel View allows you to display close a leg up window toggle command to have a better appreciation on route monitoring or track keeping See section VII 3 9 page 206 e Pilot View allows you to display close the pilot view toggle command Similarly to channel view but with a 3D aspect it is an example of a view added by an external module IXMRoutes See section VII 3 7 page 203 Ill 7 The Display Context Step A display context is a screen configuration identifying a specific use of the software It is possible to save this specific configuration to display it later To give an example you may hav
113. 014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual VII 2 Managing User Objects VII 2 1 GENERAL OPERATION ON USER OBJECTS When you select a user object the Consultation window is displayed in the upper right part of the screen with information about the object you have selected Below this window buttons are displayed To hide a user object Step Action 1 Click the object you want to hide 2 Use the context sensitive button on the right of the screen and click Hide The object is now located with the other hidden objects 3 End of procedure To move a user object Select the object to move and Use the mouse to select the object and click Move in the drop down menu To delete a user object Do one of the following e Use the list of user objects and select the object you want to delete e Use the Delete button of the context sensitive buttons on the right of the screen To display the properties of a user object Select a user object and click the Properties button You will then have the possibility to change the information relative to the selected user object VII 2 2 List OF USER OBJECTS The list of user objects allows you to manage the objects of Gecdis object database It looks like Windows Explorer and allows you to display the hierarchical structure of folders and user objects Display Hide X lt Delete Move Objects Export New Folder r ORE Name Created Centre Comment Routes 2 ZoneA 14 04
114. 1 gt 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES EF E System 4 UDP Stream Input Parameters Spying Rey COMI GPS a NET UDF gei NETI Comment UDF POP Input datum IE a Y TCP S5Serveur Port 1001 IP 08 UTC Output Ei ARPA Range Fort IF x ff ARPA Marker me Input filter ed iG ant Band type d Part IP bo A ant Status hd Add Delete Close Figure 76 Configuring an UDP Stream for Reception E E System a UDP Stream Input Parameters Spying Rey COMI GPS E oe MET1 LIDP mi NETI Comment UDP Poo Pe M Input datum B e ge MMEA output Port 1001 IP Output D Em 3 File Emission Pot v 1002 IP iw TCP1 555erveur E Input filter ny Si UTZ Port IF z EP ARPA Range i 4 k Add Delete Close Figure 77 Configuring an UDP Stream for Transmission To add and configure a net stream Step Action 1 In System menu click Settings O and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens 2 Inthe nput Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box click Add button Stream and NET NET1 is added to the left panel list of streams on the left of the dialog box If this is the first UDP stream you have added the value of the first Port field is default set to 1001 3 If your machine has several network boards and you wish to receive sentences that come from one of them check the IP box below Comment field and then select t
115. 10000000 21 09 2005 21 09 2005 fsB104102 1 5 Overview ia 500000 29 07 2005 13 10 2004 GB200000 1 2 General 1 500 000 30 11 2005 14 02 2005 Dar ITi00360 1 5 Overview ij4200 000 26 07 2005 O4 10 2004 v Show only visible cells Select Cancel 3 End of procedure To create a punctual object Step Action 1 Inthe Charts menu point to Manual Updates and then select New Ponctual object The Point Creation window is displayed ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 143 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action xj Call BESANT Object Position Object name Dates From zoso sl To Jozjogjzo10 sl Annotation P Ea Cancel 2 Select the type of chart object you wish to create 3 Enter the position of the object It is also possible to enter a name and an annotation for the new object as well as a period of validity It is not compulsory to fill in those fields 4 Click OK The desired objet is displayed on the chart It is highlighted with the orange mark that specifies the objects that have been created manually 9 End of procedure V 2 11 2 1 Creating Areas 144 Step A 2 To create an area Action In the Charts menu point to Manual Updates and then select New Area Locate the points of the are on the chart by clicking After inserting the last point right click To create an area you should insert at least thr
116. 122 V 1 2 UOLO GAA c c ER 123 V 1 3 Fitenng Cras EE RU IL 124 V 1 4 Displaying the Planisphere in Background 125 V 2 ENC CHARTS IXBLUE FORMAT cccssnsseecccsnnaseeccennnaseescecnnaseeceennaseaseennaseeseennnssesseennass 126 V 2 1 OGG MO EE 126 V 2 1 1 Launcning erte 127 V 2 1 2 EE 127 V 2 2 Chart Database Presentation ssssessesssssssssseseesene nennen nnne nnne nennen nnn nnns 128 V 2 3 Managing the Chart Databaee nennen nennen nnn nnn nnn nnn nnns 129 V 2 3 1 Importing a Set of Encrypted ENC Ces 129 V 2 3 2 Importing a Catalog of non Encrypted ENC Ces 130 V 2 3 3 Importing One or Several ENC Ces 131 V 2 4 SEET EIER 132 V 2 5 Getting Information on the Cells sss nnne 133 V 2 6 Resetting the Database nennen nnne nnn ann nnns ann nnns 133 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 aA E LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 2 7 Centring the Chart Area onatCell nennen nennen 134 V 2 8 Importing Deleting User eme 134 V 2 9 Loading Certificates eeeiissssssssesssseeseeeseenn nennen nennen nnne nnns nnnna nnn nnn rss nana nnns 136 V210 Chart e leie fOe E 136 GAR UPOAN EE 138 V 2 11 1 Semi Automatic Updating ccccccccccsseeceesccceescsseeeceeecessesssueeeseeecessssssaeeseecesssssaannsseseeees 138 Ve X PL MARUAI Upaan RR 139 V 2 12 Chart Presentation EE 145 V 2 12 1 Simplified and Tradit
117. 2 3 MOTION CONTROL Motion control manages how the main view follows a mobile Own Ship or any mobile You should know that the motion control has two modes true and relative motion See IIl 4 3 1 page 60 for more information on these modes In true motion mode a control area depending on the surface of the view is used to confine the ship inside In addition to these modes you can adjust motion control placement mode e The centered mode uses the center of the view to manage the motion control In this case you can adjust the surface of the control area from 50 to 90 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 31 C XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e The anticipated mode uses the course and speed over ground to determine the ideal placement of the view to see as much as possible to the trajectory of vessel In this case the surface of the control area is fixed to 50 Warning You didn EEhooselEe detect fall the dangers DO1 37 50E 001 36 00E 001 36 S0E Figure 25 True motion control centered mode area to 70 In the Motion Control topic you can set the placement mode e Check Automatic off centering depending on course over ground to select the anticipated mode e Uncheck to select the centered mode You can adjust the area ratio from 50 to 90 IL Configuring the Units The Format tab allows you to choose the unit you will define for some parameters position distance speed size
118. 2014 12 27 19 43 41 346 N 007 18 881 E o CH Tracks 25 m3 Deleted Objects Figure 155 List of user objects To open the list of user objects Click the User Objects menu and then Open Objects List This menu enables to ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 189 VII 2 3 VII 2 4 190 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES QD e Display Centres the main view on the selected object and allows you to make visible a hidden user object When a user object is visible it is displayed in black e Hide Allows you to hide the selected user object in the main view When a user object is hidden it is displayed in grey If you double click a hidden user object it becomes visible and the main view is centred on it e Delete Deletes the selected user object When a user objects is deleted it is located on the Deleted Objects folder e Move Objects Allows you to change the folder of the selected user object e Export Allows exporting a user object to a database e Restore Restores the selected object to its original folder e Clean Delete permanently the selected object CONFIGURING THE FILTERS Gecdis allows you to define filters for user objects e Filter 1 to sort out objects by date campaign Position e Filter 2 to sort out objects according to their object visual features Symbol colour etc Therefore you can gather several types of parameters in one filter and you can cho
119. 275 9 Depth 22 9m Figure 14 Default information bar 1 Ownship X UTC 18 06 2013 09 39 26 Distance from Own Ship x xxxx Cursor XX XX XXX XXX XX Xxx Bearing from Own Ship XXI Figure 15 Default information bar 2 System To skip from a bar to another click on it To configure a bar right click on it and then click Customize see section Il 11 page 51 Information pages allow you to display previously selected pieces of information in ISD M 038G EN September 2014 Ix B xs DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual another form than information bars To display information pages you must select the corresponding command in the View menu Three tabs are present by default each of them displaying pieces of information by theme about the Own Ship the system and route monitoring You can add or delete tabs and or pieces of information to create themes For this right click on the window and click Customize see section Il 11 page 51 eee piMBlue System Pilot Position conning 50 56 591 N 001741212 E Ground vector 18 0 kn 055 3 Water vector 18 0 kn 055 3 True heading usse Depth 5 00 m Figure 16 Information pages 1 3 1 7 Secondary Windows Object information windows Secondary windows General view Channel view Pilot View etc correspond to a specific use of Gecdis Their common characteristics are as follows e They can be displayed
120. 3 D DK KATON OU 0405 9100004 04 8001301916606064 04 s601ls01LssCBBlcrocarga 4 D pkdkATGs200704055007 F584ASD CFGQASGCEF5SAIABD CFOODASCGOGC2SSTEFDSOOEBI 0 pkdsumwpr20070405rF dODpSSACOFAsO ESF dODSSACOFAsOESO0BSOSGSF dlFOFCAS2 D DESEOEBHZ2O0Q0 0405Cc D D2BED53 75784 GC D D2BED53 78754 SSF os eC GC 34 BEBO 0 2 FRsUl0lO02007 04058F2OSFBBOl6BlAFSSF2GSFBOSBIOBlAFSE2AAQ03QGCCDBd299 0 3 0 FRAUDlO0sO020070405414EgBSSCeS5DpFl8FOdldEgSBSSCOSDFlSFGFEG S2CDO B3BUl455 0 1 0 aB20s0002007040582EHTS3EAF FBD3682EBGISSEAF7FBDS6366E2Q0188D120988A 0 21 0 EH 4 k ot Figure 104 Permit txt Import Permits To manage the acquisition of permits See section V 2 8 Delete Permits Delete All Permits SA Presents the SA Scheme Authority Certificate that authenticates the origin of ENC charts Certificate Load Certificate To load a certificate See section V 2 9 V 2 3 V 2 3 1 MANAGING THE CHART DATABASE Importing a Set of Encrypted ENC Cells Encrypted cells are provided with a set of files in an exchange set containing S 01 01 en Fichier Edition Affichage Favoris utils 7 Pr c dente SA Rechercher Lh Dossiers Adresse L WOLXOL Gr ENC ROOT INFO el SERIAL EMC VO1XO01 G S lectionnez un l ment pour obtenir une description Figure 105 Encrypted ENC Cells set of files ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 127 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP I
121. 4 End of procedure VII 3 10 CHANNELLING Channelling allows you to assign a display context to the route leg So you can define specific properties scale dedicated windows to display etc for each leg Channelling is only active in route monitoring mode To assign a channeling to a leg Step Action 1 Define your desired display context for the leg 2 Access the waypoint edition dialog box selecting it right clicking and clicking Edit Waypoint 3 Select your desired display context in the Display Context scrolling list of the Waypoint Properties dialog box 4 End of procedure VII 3 11 IMPORTING EXPORTING ROUTES One of Gecdis features consists of importing and exporting with a hard or removable disk all user objects created by the user Another feature enables to export or import routes from streams COM NET and FILE So in case the user stored routes on his her GPS he she should be able to recover them in the software The main benefit of this feature import export is to support communication between several systems Gecdis Gecdis Gecdis gt Turbo etc ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 207 208 X 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Step To import a route via a stream Action You must have previously enabled a stream when configuring the mobiles If this has not been done yet click System Settings I O and Mobiles and then Input Output Mobile Configura
122. 50 W Position ship s transom This position is also related to the conning which can be modified in the Sizes tab of ship s characteristics The position of ship s conning This piece of information is added if position has been adjusted in the Corrections tab of the ship s Position piece of information see IV 6 5 page 112 To compute the value the Own Ship s true heading must be valid The speed over ground The speed over ground of a ship Example 10 00 kn The course over ground The real course of the ship Example 100 0 The speed over water The speed over the water Example 2 00 kn This piece of information takes into account true heading and leeway angle COW True heading leeway angle Example 185 000000 The heading that is related to geographical north The angle is the crossing of the axis of geographical north and ship s centre line When adding this piece of information COW is also added If no leeway angle is specified true heading has the same value as COW Example 345 000000 The drift that originates from the wind Example 1 697576 The speed of drift Example 2 00 kn LA SD M 0386 E N September 2014 97 C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES acquired Drift course dead reckoned software acquired Depth dead reckoned software acquired Charted depth software Height of tide dead reckoned software Submersion dead reckoned automatic Altitude de
123. 584 vali Administrator Information Mo 1 07 2013 15 15 00 40008 IxMIoMabile Cwn Ship Blue DR 250959 880 N 001925394 E lt WiGsed gt Vali Administrator Information Mo if rzf2013 15 14 00 40008 IXMIoMabile Own Ship Blue DR 50 59 863 M 01 25 394 E W s84 vali Administrator Information Mo i 07 2013 15 13 00 40008 IxMIoMabile Own Ship Blue DR 250 59 847 M 001925394 E lt WiGsed gt Vali Administrator EP Information 0107 2013 15 12 00 40008 IxMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 50 59 830 N D01 25 394 E amp WaGs847 Vali Administrator warning Yes Oi z7 201315 11 06 Oi OQ7 201315 11 11 40022 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Inconsistent position with Vue difference 4 9956 MI Administrator Information Mo Oif 2013 15 11 05 loon System Administrator is logged an Administrator A Information Yes Oi 7 201315 11 04 O1 07 2013 15 11 11 Mode IXMRoutes Track Kee Autopilot in manual made Information Mo 0107 2013 15 11 02 strt System 5eaxperk was started A Information Mo 28 06 2013 16 31 10 stop System Seaspert was stopped Administrator Information Mo 28 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 50 S9 294 N 01 25 384 E zW S84 vali Administrator Ku W arninn Yer RIDE 315 18 51 YTFn TMR mikes Dote Mna YTF evceeded YTF 100 4m Administrator iXBlue DR 50 59 830 N 001 25 394 E lt WG584 gt alidi Heading 000 0 valid S
124. 6 Figure 192 SML PL profile The GSLD is a SML horizontal general diagram where only cable elements are shown with the exception of geographical points GSLD size varies depending on the number of cable points knowing that it is always edited on the entire SML A GSLD does not exist for a pipeline Heading These properties are from fields already in MMS DOS The header of the diagram shows the SML main properties see Key properties with extra information e The edition number e The revision number of the edition e The correction date which corresponds to the most recent date among all the elements Contents Its format is independent of the scale The line cable points are shown linearly in geographical length sequence and adjusted according to defined sections of repeaters ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X KE LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual RT SML Properties Filename TATSDB Type System name TAT8 D03 Segment name General description Position list Profile G5LD Issue ff Display notes Revision po Correction date 15 03 2013 15 01 PENMARCH FENMARCH I BJ EI REP 3 BIS Rpi bis 1 87 224 1404 0 056 D4AA1 2 sub D4AA1 2 sub D4A4l1 2 sub 38 83 km BE BJ bord REP 9 bis BJ EF REP 98Bis Se transition AA4 Ad p ee 0 05 CD See D4Al1 2 sub D4AA1 sub i BJ IMITIALE BJ EI Rep 8 Rp 2 quarter sui 78 498 km D4A1 2 sub D4Al 1 2 sub D4A1 2 sub a Note 126 BJ EF REP 8 B 5 B
125. 9 NI Distance DU 358 NM Bearing 242 4497 Bearing B 243 005 Bearing B 4 061 896 Draw Rhumb Line Draw Great Circle Figure 142 Geographic calculations dialog To get the distance between two points Step Action 1 Click Navigation and then Geographic Calculations The Geographic Calulations dialog box displays 2 Select the option Compute bearings and ranges 3 Enter or use the Sr button and click the main view to define the position of A point 4 Proceed the same way to define the position of B point The calculation result i e the distances and bearings between the two points is automatically displayed in the dialog box Geographic Calculations mmm Bearing Range Calculations amp 51 15 41368N D02 03 40058E e Compute bearings and ranges B 50 47 25076N 000 37 80596E B Compute B Rhumb Line Bearing A gt B 243 005 Bearing B gt A 061 896 Draw Rhumb Line Draw Great Circle 9 End of procedure To get the position of a point according to an origin and value of distance and or bearing Step Action 1 Click Navigation and then Geographic Calculations The Geographic Calulations dialog box displays 178 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X KE LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step 2 ci ap Action Select the option Compute B Enter or use the button and click the main view to define the position of A point Modify any value of the Rhumb
126. 90NM Heading to steer 249 37 WOTTG 3h 11min hoose to d amp tect all the dangers KTE ec 3o02 2 m DEE ep 123246 ee r y an du Figure 167 Channel view Furthermore an alarm warns you when the distance from your ship to this wheel over is equal to 2 5 times the length of a square of the grid For example if the grid is configured to 100 meters the alarm will be displayed when approaching the wheel over by 250 meters This view includes the following items e TO name destination waypoint name e Heading to steer heading to steer to follow the selected route This value takes into account the drift e XTE current cross track error from Own Ship position to the route lane This value can be preceded by lt lt if the ship must steer to the left to reach the route or gt gt if the ship must steer to the right e WOD wheel over distance from the current Own Ship position to the wheel over line e WOTTG wheel over time to go corresponding to WOD and Own Ship SOG e WOT UTC date and time of arrival to wheel over line according UTC SOG and WOD ISD M 038G EN September 2014 X aL L E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To change the scale or the grid of the view Step Action 1 Inthe View menu click Channel View 2 Right click the channel view A pop up menu is displayed that allows you to change the scale or grid 3 Select Scale or Grid and click your desired value
127. A Meteorological composite mu hmn RRE MTA Airtemperature li MW Wawtmpemue wD Wmd rcknaniped S MWV _ Wind speed and angel PWP Past waypoint information XBIve private sentence MRows x ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 EES A pf x pf x pf x nl nl nl nl nl nl pf x pf x nl nl nl nl nl nl ABK ABM APA APB BBM WC WR DBT DBK DBS DPT DIM HDG HDM HDT HSC HTC GGA GLL S GSA GST MDA MHU MMB MTA X X X X Gecdis v8 User s Manual NMEA Description Input OSD Own ship data S RMB Recommended minimum navigation information RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data ko HOT Rate of turn CT RPM Revolutions cr RSA Rudder sensor angle CT RSD Radar system data RTE Routes SSD AIS ship static data re THS True heading and status kd TLL Target latitude and longitude rT TTM Tracked target message i VBW Dual ground water speed i VDM AIS VHF data link message see D 2 MEE VDO AIS VHF data link own vessel report see D 2 VDR Set and drift VHW Water speed and heading VLW VSD VTG VWR WT WCV WPL DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Output TT LT Dual ground water distance EE AIS voyage static data Course over ground and ground speed S Relative apparent wind speed and angle cr True wind speed and angle DENEN MRoues Waypoint closure velocity IXMRoutes Waypoint location IXMRoutes XTE Cross track error measured IXMRoutes ZDA Time and d
128. ATORS AND GUESTS USERS DO NOT HAVE ACCESS Title Bars Each window or dialog box contains a title bar Some of them display a title others display several pieces of information that cannot be modified which is the case for the title bar of the main view Figure 10 Main view bar title The pieces of information are as follows e The motion control type TM or RM e The chart type ENC ARCS e The projection e The scale e The datum e And possibly other information provided by the cartographic module Status Bar This is an area at the bottom of the software window dedicated to the display of system information and waiting messages 15 38 05 B 50 52 519 M 001 30 756 E 212 8 11 19 MM 37min 18s Figure 11 The status bar Itis mainly composed with information in order ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual e Local time with time zone letter e Cursor position or screen center e Bearing Ownship Cursor e Distance Ownship Cursor e TG Ownship Cursor 1 3 1 5 Toolbars x Dem Lo CL Vi 2 bad E Kaka ERE os ECDIS ZOOM OWN SHIP MAP HOME ERBL ERBL ROUTE d The toolbar serves as an easy to use interface for performing common functions It enables you to speed up the implementation of specific actions by a single click ona Loo d EE EO NIGHT SYSTEM button Figure 12 Upper toolbar There are 2 main to
129. An explorer window is displayed This explorer asks you where you want to load ARCS charts Give a location in the tree e g Gecdis root folder Once selected the location an ARCS folder is created to gather all your data Important If you wish to connect to an existing database through a network please check that the shared folder is an ARCS s upper level folder For example if ARCS folder is a Gecdis subfolder you will have to share Gecdis folder and select ARCS A warning message will tell you whether the folder is correct or not 3 Click OK The Chart Permits dialog box is displayed The fields of this dialog box are empty and a message that tells you the permits need to be installed is blinking 4 Click the Install permits button 9 Select the location of the hard drive into which you have copied the permits and then click OK The fields in the Chart Permits dialog box are not empty anymore On the right the licensed charts are listed Now you can click the Close button Chart Permits Licence type Navigator Service 312 2009 User permit C23CD4D01F 024644 3171272009 31 12 2009 Licensee Marie Claude Flechais 31122009 3112 2009 Vessel name SHORE 5111212009 i i i 322009 Hast system name i 51 12 2009 332 2009 Fixed site 32 2009 312 2009 30 Avenue de L Amir 3141212009 31122009 2L1L212000 Mizuno m 23 d143 3nnm Close 6 f
130. Apply End of procedure ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C9 X3LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 8 Danger Detection The danger detection or anti grounding option enables to detect any danger the ship may encounter when following its route When the ship encounters an object considered as dangerous an alarm is generated to inform the mariner Currently only user objects and those of ENC chart can be detected To do this you must first select one of these objects will be those dangerous For this see section V 2 13 on page 152 to select ENC objects Two forms of detection are possible e A guard sector defined by an angle and a distance limit Figure 30 Guard sector e A security polygon defined by safety distance and a distance limit Figure 31 Security polygon The distance limit in both cases may be defined by e Simply by a distance value e Bya time which is automatically converted by a distance depending on the speed of the Own Ship in real time To configure danger detection Step Action 1 Click System Settings General Configuration and then the Safety tab 2 Check radio button corresponding to Maximum distance or time to danger 3 Enter the value of the maximum distance or time ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 41 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action 4 Check Use Guard Sector if you want a guard sector otherwise a security polygon is used 9
131. Color Test Diagram This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 COWLOR TEST DIAGRAM and 5 52 Edition 3 4 Figure 210 Chart 1 screen 12 326 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 lA E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES D EQUIPMENT THAT CAN BE INTERFACED WITH GECDIS In general all equipment conforming to the NMEA standard is compatible with Gecdis This appendix indicates all NMEA sentences managed by the software the specific AIS compatibility as well as various cases of NMEA extension and specific messages from different devices A CN EE BR d 27 te 9 Aaa Z9 e E ell um gN tem AAT Ar A CN CO Af n ip d H s E E AIR em d Sm wk n E g eT T NB P I 1 bu S l C i N D P em BH t S 8 i M V r AIS adresses and binary broadcast acknowedgement x o eu NS acessed binary ard safey retea messe l gt APA Headingtreck zeiten mee x APB Headngreck convo uopict sentence 8 mee BBM Aistroadcastbinary message Jooo per oeren oo DE Tore OOOO E E ou e ER SS e NN Kc NN Se Depth below surface fF Depth Datum reference o o Heading deviation and variation Heading magnetic fF Heading tue 0000000000000 o Heading steering command Global positioning system GPS fix data SS GL Geographic position Latitude longitude BEEN Tons onssa o o esa GNSSDOP andacivesstiies GST GNSS pseudorange nose satses MD
132. D 3D views and SONAR views 3D fish detections with trawl display 268 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 2L LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XVII 1 2 BioMASS DISPLAY The sounder s used need to be set in menu Biomass under Settings command either Simrad Wassp or Seapix Biomass Settings Providers Obsolescence Depth Select Biomass providers WASSP Cancel To visualize the biomass In Biomass menu or toolbar check Show Biomass Simrad Weather v Show Biomass Distribution settings If recent fish detections are available they will be displayed in 2D 3D Sonar view a In 3D view options right click the checkboxes Modules layer and Biomass must be My checked System Dupuy Monde Navigation User tiects Bathy Aur Weather Radar SeapiX Sediments Statistics Tide View f Ge Ee SeapiX Booting c 1248 A ES ISS H UOS 3787 E 122424 e FisxhBaonk Drcannertin freen ErshBecok aure dr danrsr hitimo ihoni de pietre CIBC p AER e E Use Biomass Distribution command of the Biomass menu to display echo distribution high power to low power echos and adjust detections colors ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 269 IX E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Right click in the Biomass distribution window to access useful commands Min Max filter Limit to map ar
133. D DEE ie nien CET CES m Bis aen Am E 2 e f you choose M as the symbol for a mobile and that mobile has identification information the identification number will be indicated instead e he symbol will not be drawn if the mobile or fleet length is superior to 12 mm 72 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 x 2L LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action 1 Click the Label tab This tab operates in the same hierarchical way as the tab Symbol Track Symbol Label Dr tr rg ett P TELLITE L TECTA v Visible vw SCAMIN wv ECDIS representation 100000 OK Cancel Apply 2 Check or uncheck the Use default appearance box depending on whether you want to use or not the default appearance that you have defined for the mobiles e f you have checked the Use default appearance box The default appearance that you have defined in the Appearance sub menu will be defined e f you have not checked the Use default appearance box 3 Check the Visible box if you want the label of the mobile of your fleet to be visible e f you have not checked Visible you will not be able to see the label of your ship e f you have checked Visible 4 Checkthe Transparent box if you want labels to be transparent if you do not select Transparent the label will be highlighted 9 When finished configuring the fleet click OK 6 End of procedure a You can follow the same steps to create a specific
134. E X 1 Consulting Tidal Gauges and Tidal Streams Gecdis allows you to display tidal gauges and tidal streams When selecting a tidal gauge or a tidal stream of the chart some information is displayed in the Object information window When you select a tidal gauge you are given the following information e The predicted date e The tide in meters e The next high tide its date and time plus its height e The next low tide its date and time plus its height e The coefficient for a French harbour e The next sunset e The next sunrise e The next quarter plus its date Object Information x 1 1 4 28 St Helier Jersey Channel Islands READ 17 01 2014 13 39 43 1 97 m 17 01 2014 19 00 43 10 14 m 2 17 01 2014 16 41 10 18 01 2014 07 55 37 24 01 2014 05 21 01 Tidal Curve Reference Station When you select a tidal stream a pop up window is displayed giving you the speed and heading of the tidal stream Be careful Tide data is commercial data not included by default when purchasing Gecdis 234 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual X 2 Tidal curves Tidal Curve option allows you to display the evolution of the tidal gauges in a specific time for a specific place The Tidal Curve window will allow you to see the evolution of the tide gauges in many harbours all around the world Tidal Curve x Station St Helier Jersey Channel Islands READ flaterco com p e
135. E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP 3 SHARPER SENSES QO Zoom skips to the following scale is roughly equivalent to double the scale QO Zoom skips to the precedent scale is roughly equivalent to divide the scale by 2 QO Zoom 10 divides the display by ten e Use the toolbars e Use the shortcuts for that see section 1 2 1 page 6 5 The scale is accurate at the center of the screen it is adapted to the average latitude Xo and is less accurate to the vertical edges especially at very small scales 1 2 Color Mode Color graphics and text on the screen is dependent on the ambient light so as not to blind the operator or be unreadable Important USE OF THE BRIGHTNESS CONTROL MAY INHIBIT VISIBILITY OF INFORMATION AT NIGHT MOREOVER IT MODIFIES THE CURSOR AND THE COLORS OF THE SYSTEM EVEN WITH OTHER APPLICATIONS THAN GECDIS Gecdis uses three color modes to be ECDIS compliant These modes have been specifically designed to be used at some point in the day S1 0S 75M jc r ae ER ds era E d Ee BLLITTT Day EN erm ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 a9 Dusk e Night a By default the background Day mode is white and Dusk mode is black See section Il 2 2 page 30 to change this behavior To change the color mode you can e Use the Colour Mode menu from Display menu and select the mode Centre on Own Ship Orientation Relative motion Centre an Place Scale amp Best Scale Window Zoom Zoom
136. E INIM 7 2 d i kd LI 1 j j GE ut seabed area ei G been Foul area area of wrecks or obstructions P ED Locus P a ca Fishing Facility mor on qnorum P y dq P 7 S A LA 8 cable area LX Y A d er A ee CALO sand waves A ee P D L o ana n pipe area nil d be Ee L qs ed restric rea b Af A AM 4 pipe area water Figure 204 Chart 1 screen 6 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 229 e xaLug DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES C 6 Traffic Routes M TRAFFIC ROUTES MI 090 deg O90 deg 270deg DW 76 deg DW MO d g AC dg seabed area archipelagic sea lane e p EE do l eM ER gt two way route part Ferry route Gecdis v8 User s Manual This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 and 5 52 Edition 3 4 de tg ea d EE Clie Cae pm M deep water rouke part eer Figure 205 Chart 1 screen 7 C 7 Special Areas N SPECIAL AREAS iN ut DEL NET e Ser AL LI anchorage area restricte ER 1 4 Gell M o E ES qu cr L np utes her caution available E554 area P55 area b o T T H i ZE 2 ee military practice area administration area ec restricted other infatinatien availableestricked This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 and 5 52 Edition 3 4 pose TX PL o 8 E 5 d A ST NT rea anchoring prohibitedrestricted ar
137. E MOUSE Right click Selects enables etc Wheel Increase or reduce current zoom Left click Stops closes etc ss n Ball Moves the cursor in menus or in the chart Figure 6 Using the Trackball The mouse is a pointing device allowing you to operate almost any action on the software It consists of a ball that allows moving the cursor on screen and two or three buttons each of them having a specific use ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 9 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 3 Gecdis Overview 1 3 1 THE SCREEN Title bar Menu bar etes lolol SSES TitMain view title re Information pages oolb Toolbar Criticals Information Secondary title Main view Secondary W in qeu Status bar ee tA Mean s AT d e i wn 4 Alarm bar Information about chart cell Figure 7 The Workspace Gecdis consists of several windows and bars e The main view e he menu bar e itle bars e Toolbars e Information windows e Secondary windows Chart Overview Pilot consultation etc e And other specific windows Alarms dialogs information about charts cells 1 3 1 1 The Main View This is the area s largest map display application Allows displaying several layers of information the user can select e g chart user objects mobiles radar data The main view enables to display several types of information layers that the user can select
138. EE Eed 329 D32 ANMEAdnOnmsnalon Ee EE 330 D 3 3 AIS VDM Complementary Information Table sessi 330 D 3 4 IXMloFormatEx Module Information Tatie esee ree 330 D 4 System Own Ship and Trawl Nei 331 D 4 1 System Information m 332 D 42 OWN Ship System Information isses ssssseese essen nennen nnne nnns a annes nain nnn nnns 332 pu rc GE ee ee e tele D 333 D 4 4 Trawl Net IAIONM AUC EE 335 BAS OME T AWN ING ee 335 E SEENEN 338 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 XV Ix dl UIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES GETTING STARTED 9008 For simplicity in this manual the term Gecdis is used as a generic name to identify the name of the software which has several product name SeaXpert Gecdis C SeaPix Gecdis is a navigational aid system with a geographic information system working on standard computers fitted with Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows Seven Navigational aid is given by displaying electronic charts on which information from the ship equipment and sensors connected to Gecdis are shown such as GPS gyrocompass or depth sounder navigation tools Gecdis fits IMO regulations for cartographical data storage SP52 and their displaying SP57 Gecdis is fitted with in line and independent tools allowing system customization according to three levels the ship s equipment the user and his practices hierar
139. EP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action 4 Stop sounder In SeapiX menu or toolbar click Start Sounder activated previously Sounder signal is now de activated 9 End of procedure Table A Information displayed in swath view Ge a T Tilt angle L1 Min signal level R Range L2 Max signal level depth Z Zoom factor P Power Modulation type How to use swath view Left Click on swath Switch between L1 and L2 levels Use mouse roll on swath to change L1 L2 values Use mouse roll on right to change Zoom level Right Click on swath Control commands for the fire Tilt Power Range Modulation Colors XVIII 3 4 USE ECHOGRAM VIEW XVIII 3 4 1 Echogram Construction Angle Echogram is built from an angular part of STV fire This is why in settings you can choose to use the 40 central degrees of the STV swath or 80 degrees or the whole 120 degrees See SeapiX Settings Echogram tab 280 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Example Echogram seitings tab STV angle used for echogram generation 120 degrees 80 degre 40 degrees Here the yellow 80 angle will be used i 43 20 057 N 005 16 058 E to build the echogram 2013 03 01 Eege IMPORTANT This sector means that if fishes are out of this angular area either on left or right they will not appear in echogram XVIII 3
140. Enter the Angular width of sector to watch for the guard sector or the Safety Distance for the security polygon 6 Eventually check Display zone to watch to see the representation of the safety area on the screen 7 End of procedure 42 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual To activate danger detection Step Action 1 Check the Danger Detection option in Navigation menu WWE User Objects Bathy Charts Man Over Board F8 w Danger Dekeckion Fix Quin Ship Position Clearing Line Mo More Clearing Line No Less Piloting Fix Geographic Calculations Create SAR diagram Modify SAR diagram Display SAR diagram Bearing Line Bearing R ange Line Own Ship Bearing Range Line variable Range Marker Quin Ship variable Range Marker Delete All Bearing Lines 4nd VRIs Create Instant Route Create Route Create Route with Cursor Autopilot Control 2 End of procedure IK Synchronization It is possible to synchronize data between several stations Two modes of synchronization are available e Distributed each station checks whether changes have been done on the other stations and if needed automatically duplicate changes in its own data TT ae e Data i e Data Data LO GecdisShare LS GecdisShare S GecdisShare Station 1 Station Station 3 Figure 32 Synchronization distributed mode e Centralized when a c
141. GEM Microtecnica gryo S iXSea PIXSE HSATIT Leeway angle VBW OSD Drift speed amp course e VDR S OSD Depth e DPT iXSea PIXSE HSPOS S DBS SEASCAN PSAP DBK DBT 86 EN September 2014 333 C iA E LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES NMEA NMEA IXMloFormatEx S GGA iXSea PIXSE POSITI Soft e Informations Height of tide Submersion GNS iXSea PIXSE GPSIN iXSea PIXSE GP2IN iXSea PIXSE USBIN Altitude GGA iXSea PIXSE POSITI GNS iXSea PIXSE GPSIN VDO iXSea PIXSE GP2IN iXSea PIXSE USBIN Swaying speed amp course D ROT m PHOTONETICS PHTRO JRC PJRCD iXSea PIXSE ATITUD iXSea PIXSE HSATIT iXSea PHLIN iXSea PIXSE HEAVE iXSea PIXSE HSATIT Roughness SEASCAN PSAP Hardness SEASCAN PSAP JRC PURCS Saus are Je o o Battery votae Je Jo Horizontal accuracy GST iXSea PIXSE HSPOS GSA iXSea PIXSE STDPOS GGA GNS Vertical accuracy GST iXSea PIXSE HSPOS GSA iXSea PIXSE STDPOS Rolling Pitching Heaving Log distance on water Log daily Run distance Run distance daily Paese e alee e foo T O 4 lt lt lt lt rr LT ICM NA n ofrn CNI C UI 43644 CINM 1Y39 2 EN C antamhaer 11 4 sel LA IV UDOU L N sl KE ALEIIIUE IT ZU ka d Ki A D D B 7 IL LIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES D 4 4 Trawl Net Information Positio
142. GHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action Track Symbol Label Past track Vectors Miscellaneous v Misible SCAMIM ECDIS representation 1000000 Duration min 6 vw Head line v On ground v Dnft wv Tum Ind vw On water 5Swaying v Path predictor OK Cancel Apply 13 The Duration min field allows you to define the period in minutes during which the vectors will be represented e f you have not checked Visible you will not be able to see the vectors of your mobile e f you have checked Visible 14 Select ECDIS representation if you want the vectors of your mobiles to follow the ECDIS standard representation e f you have selected ECDIS representation you will only be able to define the headline the SOG and SOW vectors as indicated in the ECDIS standard e f you have not selected ECDIS representation You can also display the drift and swaying vectors Note A vector can t be displayed if the piece s of information defining it have not been added to a mobile These pieces of information are as follows e Headline True Heading e On Ground SOG COG e On Water SOW COW e Drift Drift speed Drift course e Swaying Lateral speed Lateral course 15 When finished configuring the default mobile appearance click OK 16 End of procedure IV 5 2 STANDARD REPRESENTATION Here is the standard representation of symbols without vectors and past track ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 87 C X L LJ E Gecd
143. HARPER SENSES To access the dialog box allowing the cells to be edited Step Action 1 Click the Charts menu and then point to Manual Updates 2 Select New Ponctual Object or New Area depending on the type of object you wish to create 3 End of procedure To annotate a chart object An object can have several annotations All these annotations are listed in the Object information window Step Action 1 Select the object in the chart 2 Inthe Object information window click Annotate object button Enter information and click OK An object can have several annotations Clicking Annotate object adds an annotation 3 End of procedure Cell GB200000 Position 4gesa sna3 N O05 23 985 W Buoy shape pillar Colour red white Colour pattern vertical stripes Fog signal Category of fog signal whistle Light Light characteristic long flashing Colour white Signal group 1 Signal period 10 Radar transponder beacon Category of radar transponder beacon racon radar transponder beacon Signal group En Radar wave length 0 03 w Annotation leen First annonation Comment My first annotation Author Administ ator Created 09 07 2013 15 38 30 Annotation Second annonation Comment My second annotation Author Administrator Created O9 07 2013 15 38 46 Move object annotate object Mark as deleted Remove Annotations Figure 112 Chart object with annotations 140 ISD M 038G EN Sept
144. ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 m LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Filter Charts mm Chart Type 557 GE Navigationnal Type Approach Y v Geographic criteria Geographic Area From NE 00 00 00000N 000 00 00000E f To SW 00 00 00000N 000 00 00000E f Route Scenario 1 m OK Cancel Figure 98 Filtering Charts To configure the filter of the charts Step Action 1 Inthe Charts Catalogue window click Filter button 2 Inthe Filter Charts dialog box check Use a filter 3 To configure the Chart and Navigational Types select the appropriate values in the corresponding scrolling lists 4 f you wish to select a Geographical Area or a Route check Geographic criteria 9 Doone of the following e To choose a geographic area either click Geographic Area and then enter the coordinates in From NE and To SW or select an area clicking and dragging the mouse on the planisphere e To choose a route click Route and then select the desired route in the scrolling list 6 Optionally uncheck the Use a filter box to remove the configuration of filters 7 End of procedure V 1 4 DISPLAYING THE PLANISPHERE IN BACKGROUND You can choose to display the planisphere in background or not By displaying the planisphere you get a default global coverage on which can be superimposed specific chart data ENC etc ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 125 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP
145. IST x xxxx NM z i OR HIDE SAR 12 05 39 A 35 11135 174 15 041 E 10 22 24 Own Ship Inconsistent position with iXBlue WACK Aus 93 1 The window dedicated to display customization is as follows Bathy Display Surface Automatic Colours Colour Scheme Visible range Effects Ambient shadow Oblique light Transparency Isoline Step ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 249 IX 3L Li Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XIIl 2 Bathymetry Data to Display Step Choosing the bathymetry data to display is done via the Bathy Data dialog box You select the modules or the databases that are to be taken into account to generate the shape of the seabed surface 5 modules are available to get bathymetry data Chart sounding seabed shape is defined with information provided by the ship s sounding line Marks seabed shape is defined with information provided by the marks entered by the user Database bathy seabed shape is defined with information provided by SeaXpert bathymetry database Tracks seabed shape is defined with information provided by SeaXpert tracks database WASSP seabed shape is defined with information provided by multibeam sounding line Here is an example of Bathy Data dialog box Bathy Data mcm Check modules and or databases your want to include to generate surface Inte
146. It can be marks areas routes and tracks with or without parameters Once the data is downloaded it is displayed exactly like in the original Gecdis position of the objects parameters related to each object their colour To import a Turbo Tactic user object folder Action In the System menu click Import User objects and then Gecdis database Click to browse the database or the folder with the user object s In the Import area check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import the number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window End of procedure VII 2 4 4 MaxSea Import Step You can import user data provided by MaxSea It can be marks areas routes and tracks with or without parameters Once the data is downloaded it is displayed exactly like in the original MaxSea position of the objects parameters related to each object their colour To import a MaxSea user object folder Action In the System menu click Import User objects and then MaxSea File Click to browse the database or the folder with the user object s In the Import area check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import the number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window End of procedure VII 2 4 5 QuodFish Import 172 You can import user data provided by QuodFish It can be marks areas routes and tracks with or without paramet
147. J FR5 20 208 s A E DaAl 2sub O D4Al 2sub S 100 465 km Section nz BJ Bord REP 9 0 031 i Section n 3 D4A12 sub 0 752 D4Al1 2 sub transition AL4 A4 transition A4f A d transition AA4 Ad Section n 3 2n EE ee 113 963 km i i D4Al1 2 sub D4A1 2 sub D4AA1 2 sub 2k transition A4 AL4 BJ IR8 T RP 3 ter Ge 0 988 D P See D4A1 sub D4Ali 2 sub BAATZ sub 120 594 km Cancel Figure 193 GSLD of a SML Information is the same as in the MMS DOS version It also has a cable lengths table with references 3 507 172 3 227 E 2 012 E 1 296 EF Rep N 12 EZ a 2 a 1 1 So ud d 2 UE EN Pal i i 4 m prre Aldsub Asub SI AlMsub Al4sub S A 4 sub K i 341 519 km d D z S EEN Ala sub Ala sub Ala sub US FEP 365 87 km Cable lentghs summary 365 87 km Figure 194 GSLD cable lengths summary Display notes The Display notes button controls the notes of all elements of the diagram They are printable ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 EIS C i X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XX 2 2 7 SML creation SML Create f Pipeline Figure 195 SML create window From the SMLs list see List of SMLs the create button opens a window to select type of SML Cable or Pipeline After validation the software displays the properties window and you can then enter general settings and edit the SML route leg The principle is the same a
148. Joint 250000 Dividing box 250000 Optical repeater 1500000 Transition 500000 Jointing box 250000 Integration 250000 Branching unit 1500000 Branching unit multiplex 1500000 5 Eeoalrzer 2 fnfnn 9 Cable Cable Table wi THREE RRE EI EI R E NORMS ZAP EL Figure 180 Display rules definition window Upper and lower texts as well as mileage points can be displayed or hidden Regardless of symbols the colour used to draw SML depends of its state i e e Blue SML planned Green in MMS DOS e Dark gray SML in service e Red SML Abandoned XX 2 2 5 Querying Like nearly all objects in Gecdis and as in MMS DOS SMLs are available in overlay The consultation is carried out either by a tooltip displayed closest to the cursor or by a remote window in a fixed area on the screen docked or floating Here is the information set if they exist e Name of the SML e Name of the questioned item e Symbol e Comment e Modification date of the element e Geographical position e Geographical cumulative length e Cumulated cable length not for pipeline e Slack compared to the previous point not for pipeline e Depth of the element e litem level e Item note Here are the possible actions about an item being asked ISD M 038G EN September 2014 293 X E LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e View the cable cut not for pipeline e Display the image associated with the item e C
149. LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Centreon Filter Cha Producer Name Usage Geographic Coverage Issue Date Update Date Import Date ENC ES ES504421 Harbour NE 36 48 396 N 006 19 536 W SW 36 43 434 N 006 28 782 W 03 10 2003 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U210150 General NE 07 00 000 S 157 30 000 E SW 10 00 000 S 150 00 000 E 25 11 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU AU220140 General NE 10 00 000 S 150 00 000 E SW 20 00 000 S 140 00 000 E 30 09 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U220150 General NE 10 00 000 S 157 30 000 E SW 20 00 000 S 150 00 000 E 10 06 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U230140 General NE 20 00 000 S 150 00 000 E SW 22 40 000 5 140 47 000 E 10 06 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U230150 General NE 20 00 000 S 157 30 000 E SW 22 40 000 S 150 00 000 E 10 06 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU ALI314145 Coastal NE 13 35 000 5 145 09 200 E SW 14 00 000 S 145 00 000 E 07 01 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU AL315146 Coastal NE 14 16 000 5 146 09 000 E SW 15 00 000 S 146 00 000 E 07 01 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U316147 Coastal NE 17953 423 S 147 32 566 E SW 18 00 000 S 147 00 000 E 07 01 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U319147 Coastal NE 18 00 000 S 148 00 000 E SW 19 00 000 5 147 00 000 E 11 11 2005 27 09 2011 ENC AU 4U319148 Coastal NE 18 35 930 5 148 22 620 E SW 19 00 000 5 148 00 000 E 07 01 2005 27 09 2011 e Figure 97 The charts catalogue m As for BSB charts they are listed in a module independent of th
150. M 001 25 394 E zwi a5se47 Valid Administrator Information Mo O1f07 12013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 51 00 628 M 001 25 S94 E zwia584 Valid Administrator Information Mo 28 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IxMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 50 59 294 M 01925394 E zWwi ase7 Valid Administrator Information Mo 27 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 51 8 309 M 01 47 107 E zwia584 Valid Administrator Information Mo 27 06 2013 12 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Gwn Ship Blue OR 51 OS 007 M 00 34 232 E ewi ased7 Valid Administrator Information Mo 27 06 2013 08 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship Blue DR 51 0S S87 M 01 36 341 E ewia584 Valid Administrator Information 26 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Gwn Ship ixBlue 51 086 399 N 001 3 444 E zWi ass 47 Valid He Administrator Information Mo 26 06 2013 12 00 00 40008 IxMIoMobile Gwn Ship ixBlue 5 0 58 237 M 01 25 823 E Gd Valid He Administrator Information Mo 25 06 2013 16 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Gwn Ship ixBlue 51 05 843 M 001932019 E zWi s847 Valid He Administrator Information Mo 25 06 2013 12 00 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Own Ship ixBlue 51 00 707 M 001918225 E zWi as847 Valid He Administrator Information Mo 25 06 2013 08 00 00 40008 IxMIoMobile Mavire ixBlue 5 0 56 760 N 001 38 200 E zWi ase 47 valide C Administrator Information Mo 24 06 2013 16 00
151. M SO Click the Navigation menu and then Own Ship Bearing Range Line VI 2 Clearing Lines A clearing line is a half line constructed from seamarks which shall not be crossed Clearing lines are managed by the areas module Such as lines they generate alarms as soon as they are crossed But contrary to user lines the alarm is generated only when it is crossed by the own ship There are two types of clearing lines e he NMT clearing line means that in order to clear the danger the bearing of the mark should be not more than the specified value e The NLT clearing line means the bearing of the mark should be not less than the specified value Figure 141 No Less and No More Clearing Lines ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 175 Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XBLUE To add a clearing line no more no less Action Step i You should locate a seamark Click Navigation and then Clearing Line No More or Clearing Line No Less Click the seamark that can be used as a reference and drag down the mouse to draw a line far enough from the dangerous point that is at the right of the ship The clearing line is displayed in orange In its middle NMT x is displayed where NMT means no more or no less than x defines the bearing to the north The created clearing lines are stored in the List of User Objects in the Areas folder List of User Objects Folder Ship Areas 7 Di
152. ML from a Microsoft Excel file CSV file format e Export SML to a Microsoft Excel file CSV file format e Export SML to a RTF file e Export SML to a DXF file SML editing Edition of the general description e Edition of the list of positions e GSLD edition e Edit profile XX 1 1 2 Bathymetric Data Management The software import bathymetric data from DXF files depth points collection ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 287 gt 3 E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XX 1 2 XX 2 XX 2 1 288 FUNCTIONS NOT INCLUDED AS COMPARED TO MMS DOS VERSION The functionalities not mentioned in section XX 1 1 are not provided in Gecdis These are most notably the following ones e Area management ban concession and waste e Specific transmission problem event management and crooked e The complete management data and editions about specific repair event namely D The analysis of the defect a Consumption of repair QO Operational report Q Cost of repair Q The repair status Journal of Repair or RDL Repair Data Logbook e Cable ship day costs management CERC Cableship Estimated Running Costs e Inventory management e Paper trace output management e Installation management plow information cable and touch down installing and slack control windows e DSLD edition Implementation A pipeline is identical to a submarine link cable apart from the fact that cable
153. NM Software Bearing Own Ship Cursor E Software TTG Own Ship Cursor SE Software ETA Own Ship Cursor xP KI KKK xoxo xx Software CPA Own Ship Cursor ch Software ixBlue Value Source Stream Calc rate Position 51 00 262N 001 19 446E lt Automatic gt lt Automatic gt SOG 18 0kn Automatic gt lt Automatic gt COG 116 8 Automatic Automatic sow 18 0kn lt Automatic gt lt Automatic gt True heading OR Automatic Automatic ixBlue DR Value Source Stream Calc rate Position 50 04 131N 000 06 403E Estimate 1 0s SOG 0 0kn Software COG 000 0 Software sow 0 0kn Estimate True heading 080 0 Estimate Leeway angle 10 0 Estimate Drift speed D Okn Estimate Drift course 095 0 Estimate Swaying speed 0 0kn Software Swaying course 350 0 Software Fleets Value Source Stream Calc rate AIS 64 NMEA YDM AIS VHF message TCP1 SSServeur Arpa 12 NMEA TTM TCP1 SSServeur Figure 93 Input Output Summary in Basic mode To open the summary window In System menu click Settings UO and Mobiles then Summary IV 6 7 1 Synthesis in Basic and Advanced Modes Information report is made in a table that is displayed in the nput Output Summary window This window reacts in the same way as a secondary window You can dock it in a specific location of the screen move it or resize it Likewise the nput Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box the display of the summary is made of e n basic mode the main parameters
154. NSES a e E property information e route information e 4 main information system e cursor information system e auxiliary cursor information system The dialog box of the configuration consists of two parts e Windows area corresponding to the information bar or pages to configure e Information area corresponding to the list of pieces of information from the bar or pages Each area has its own toolbar to e Add a bar page or information after the selected item if no item is selected the item is added to the beginning e Delete the selected item e Edit the properties of the selected item the title for a bar or page the label for information Editing properties of geographic position information is used to select the display format geographic format with specific datum or UTM format for example e Move the selected item Important TITLES AND DEFAULT LABELS CANNOT BE TRANSLATED INTO THE APPROPRIATE LANGUAGE THE DEFAULT TERMS HAVE BEEN TRANSLATED INTO THE LANGUAGE OF THE FIRST EXECUTION OF THE SOFTWARE THIS IS BECAUSE THE OPERATOR CAN CHANGE THE TERMS AS HE WANTS WHICH MEANS THAT THE SOFTWARE DOES NOT TRANSLATE ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 KE LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step 10 11 To add a piece of information Action Select in the left window the name of the bar or pages to which you want to add a piece of information Select the item in the right part where
155. NSIGHT SHARPER SENSES The cells of commercial distributors can be encrypted or not if they are directly provided by your hydrographic office Step Action 1 Click Import Commercial Exchange Set 2 Inthe dialog box select the CD ROM that contains the desired charts and select e The folder containing a file SERIAL ENC and a folder ENC_ROOT or e The folder containing a file MEDIA TXT and several folders containing a subfolder ENC ROOT In our example below the folder that must be selected is one on those entitled BaseCD since it contains the file SERTAL ENC as well as the ENC_ROOT folder If you had selected the ENC_ROOT the import process would not start cb A t Computer BD ROM Drive F VOLX01 v 6s Search BD ROM Drive FJ vo1xo n A ENC_ROOT 4 INFO Cal IHO CRT _ IHO PUB L SERIAL ENC Ba Computer amp os c BD ROM Drive F V01X01 J ENG ROOT J INFO 5 it A za items Ga 3 Click OK 4 End of procedure IF YOU IMPORT NON OFFICIAL DATA A MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED IN THE HIGHER RIGHT SIDE OF THE SCREEN ALSO IF YOU LOAD THE CORRUPTED DATA CELLS ARE REJECTED V 2 3 2 Importing a Catalog of non Encrypted ENC Cells To import a catalogue Step Action 1 Click Import Catalogue 2 Locate the ENC ROOT folder select the CATALOG 031 file and then click OK 130 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 Step Action Ej Emplacements r cents Bureau EC
156. Navigator groups to use it as well ADDING A USER Configuration X Safety Synchronization User Interface Identification Format Display Time Datum Toolbar Users Alarms User amp Administrator Eme pum Ah Captain Name amp Navigator Peai Guest M New User Confirm password Group Administrators Configure Rights Mew User Delete User OK Cancel Apply Step Figure 28 Adding a user To add a user to the list of users Action Click System Settings General Configuration and then the Users tab Click the New User button The Name field is filled out with the New User label Enter the name of the new user in this field In Group field select to which group you want the new user to belong ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action 9 Enter a password in the Password field and confirm this password in the Confirm password field 6 Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply The user has been added 7 You can now open a new session with this new user You can also delete a user by selecting it and clicking the Delete User button 8 End of procedure Important IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO DELETE THE ADMINISTRATOR USER 1 7 2 CONFIGURING USERS RIGHTS User Rights Almost every command of the software is assigned to access rights This configuration only concerns Captain Navigator and Guest groups the Administrator
157. O DISABLE IT IF YOU WANT TO SPEED UP THE PROCESSES To display real time pieces of information Action In System menu click Settings I O and Mobiles then Summary In the nput Output Summary window click Real time End of procedure IV 6 7 3 Printing the Summary Window Step When printing a summary window you reproduce on a paper the tables that are currently displayed in the UO Summary window So if you are in basic mode only the configuration that relates to basic modes will be printed out This operation can be performed either in Landscape or in Portrait mode depending on the configuration of your printer Printing the synthesis opens a window allowing previewing the summary A toolbar allows to act on this preview To print the summary window Action Select the summary display mode with the Basic Mode button Click Print In the Print before Preview window click Print End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 119 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 7 Dead Reckoning The Dead Reckoning dialog box allows you to change manually all dead reckoned pieces of information for any ship Position S0 0413079N 000 06 40260E P UTC 09 07 2013 10 50 31 Apply with blue position SOW 000kn True heading 080 002 Drift vector Speed 0 00 kn Set O95 00 Other Information ER Leeway angle Mi Value 10 00 OK Cancel Figure 95 Dead
158. O W 1 0 kn Valid EE 4 Base Standard Ty Il All Filter T E Figure 55 The Black Box Above this window the table gathers all error messages and characteristics as follows 64 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 Ix 2L LIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e Type the type of the message Information Warning or Error e Alarm specifies whether the message is an alarm e Date the date of the event This is the default sort column newest to oldest e Receipt Date the date when the event has been acknowledged e ld the identifier of the event i e the code identifying it and differentiating it from the other events for a specific module source e Source the module of the event e Title the title of the event e Text the description of the event e User the user that was logged in when the event occurred ES You can use any column to sort the list in one way or another Below the window a pane shows the message and a second pane explains this message when required UU Each event has its own life The default lifetime is 7 days Some have very short as one hour error input output for example or very long as 3 months position report to multiple 4 o clock Bottom right of the window six commands are available le n Allows you to move up and down in the list of events e Allows you to move in the events that specify that Gecdis has been launched u Allows you
159. OADING CERTIFICATES The certificates crt files are required to authenticate the origin of each encrypted ENC cell The IHO certificate is automatically loaded when installing Gecdis The Load certificate option can be used to e Replace the IHO certificate when the one installed with Gecdis is expired in 2013 e Load a certificate from another provider of encrypted ENC PRIMAR for example If you load a certificate delivered by an organism other than IHO the loaded certificate is used temporarily i e only for a session If you quit and launch again Gecdis the application uses the official IHO certificate again To load a certificate Step Action 1 Inthe Charts Database dialog box select the SA Certificate tab 2 Click Load Certificate 3 Select the certificate available in the Gecdis SdnEnc directory and click Load Se xj Load Certificate ST Lnknown L Monaco O nternational Hydrographic Organization IHG OU International Hydrographic Bureau IHB CN IHO 5 63 Scheme Administrator ST2unknawn L Monaco O nternational Hydrographic Organization IHG OU International Hydrographic Bureau THE CN IHO 5 63 Scheme Administrator Expiry date 29 08 2015 4 End of procedure V 2 10 CHART LOADING MODES The ENC module allows you to use two different chart loading modes automatic loading and manual loading Automatic loading allows to e Load automatically all chart cells covering the area displaye
160. Reckoning a Mobile To dead reckon a mobile Step Action 1 Access the Dead Reckoning dialog box clicking Mobile and then Own Ship Dead Reckoning 2 Inthe list of mobiles in the upper scrolling list select the mobile you want to dead reckon 3 To assign a new position to a mobile click and then the main view where you want to locate your mobile or enter a new position in the position editable field 4 Inthe UTC field enter the date and time when the mobile has been dead reckoned you may have dead reckoned the position before entering it 9 Enter the SOW and true heading To enter those values the pieces of information must have been added to the mobile and their source must be Estimate 6 Enter the drift Speed and set To enter those values the pieces of information must have been added to the mobile and the source of this information must be Estimate 7 Optionally dead reckon the other pieces of information selecting it in Other Information and entering the value for this piece of information in Value 8 Click Apply to see your modifications or click OK to close the dialog box 9 End of procedure 120 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 IX 3L Li DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual IV 8 Fix Position IV 8 1 FIXING POSITION The black box generates a message that gives the current position of your Own Ship every minute However you can display the position of any ship at
161. S Shortcut keys offer you another way to accomplish common tasks In many cases shortcut keys help you to work faster Using a shortcut key usually consists in pressing and holding one key while pressing a second key Important Important THE CONCEPT OF ACTIVE WINDOW IS IMPORTANT FOR MANAGING KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS PARTICULARLY WITH DEAD RECKONING CONTROLS ON A MOBILE ARE INTERCEPTED ONLY BY THE MAIN VIEW SEE II 10 2 1 PAGE 47 TO CONFIGURE THE ACTIVE WINDOW 1 2 1 1 Gecdis Standard Shortcuts The following is a list of the shortcut keys currently available in Gecdis In the following keyboard picture shortcuts numbers have been assigned to keys Each number corresponds to a shortcut key combination 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 38 23 29 1 2 3 4 7 Backspace Home Pade Up Down Caps A S F G H J K L Enter Lock Figure 3 Keyboard Table 1 Shortcuts No press e eB OO e 6 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 Ix zL LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Nb Pes to Ctrl F3 F4 8 amon 7 I8 eee 000 Ip eenma 3 I8 gemi 7 Ip Seenen Ctrl F9 F11 Ack n alarm 09 P AWoWekesndam OOO F12 D m M re th f the main view 08 Pf Meimizeorreseteszeohhemin ven Switch between mouse centre or chart consultation modes EO Reduce the mobile s SOW 9 ELE Irene m ELE mmm O ne emen 0000000 This mobile is one that is currently selected or the ownship if n
162. S To configure parameters of the Netradar you are using Step Action 1 In Radar menu select Source and click NetRadar to select the data provider 2 Inthe Radar menu click Source and then Configure NetRadar The Configuration dialog box appears Configuratio il Server NetRadar JRC 1 2 JRC 2 2 RTM 1 2 RTM 2 2 4 gt Server settings NetRadar 1 X Server NetRadar NetRadar JRC NetRadar Selesmar RTM NetRadar Consilium SRT Server IP address Data Port Control Port LAN IP Address Streams with Master Slave s Input From Master Output To Slave s 3 Inthe Server tab select the NetRadar that you want to configure in the Server settings scrolling list 4 n Server area e Enter the settings corresponding to the server that you are using NetRadar type IP address Data Port Control Port then click on the Ping button to validate the connectivity A message displays in the Configuration dialog box e f necessary define the input stream and output streams in the 9 In Streams with Master Slave s area if necessary define the input stream and output streams in the dedicated fields 6 n Server played area select the netradar in Server field source of the radar images you want to visualize 226 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action 7 Select the tab corresponding to the NetRadar type that you will
163. SML XX 2 2 11SML import The SML import is accessible via a menu System Import MMS Objects see System menu Import Two SMLs import choices are possible the old MMS DOS format and the Microsoft Excel format The information regarding cable bodies i e repeaters bus joints are imported for both file formats Old MMS DOS format MMS DOS Import Source MMS DOS folder D Environnement_Turbo2000 _DD_pour_DosBox TURBO f Import all SMLs e Import selected SML s ABANDONIO ABANDON6 ABI LAGOS AL SADR ABANDONI1 ABANDON ABK YASI AL RAYYAN ABANDON2 ABU DUB AMERIC1 2 ABANDON3 ABANDONS ADMA AMERIC1 3 ABHALDAS ADMAL ANTINEA ABANDONS ABHALDAS2 ADWEA 01 ARZA ZIR F Figure 198 SML MMS DOS import window After selecting the root folder of MMS DOS all SMLs or just selected SML in the list can be imported The imported SMLs are directly loading and displaying on the screen ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 307 x LIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP Ut SENSES SML import This is used to select a text csv Character Separated Value file corresponding to a SML with Microsoft Excel file to import The format of this file most notably number and designation of columns is the same as for the export of SML in CSV file XX 2 3 BATHYMETRIC DATA MANAGEMENT This is the use of a DXF AutoCAD file as a data provider for the bathymetric module The importation consists in reading depth points in forms of X Y
164. September 2014 283 X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XVIII 3 6 RECORDING OPTIONS XVIII 3 6 1 Overlap Management in Real Time Database To avoid mixing data when recording on a previously acquired area you can either choose to clear the front area before storage either to suspend the storage to avoid mixing data until overlap ends See SeapiX menu Settings Recording tab XVIII 3 6 2 Height of Tide Correction Height of tide can used to correct data during acquisition e In nput Ouput amp Mobile Configuration dialog box add Height of tide auxiliary information on SeapiX mobile e Then this information can be either manually entered estimation either dynamically entered by the Tide module D Either through Proudman tables option required D Either by setting a reference station Example Here tide is estimated to 3 meters Input Output amp Mobile Configuration u oe E Trawl net Source Checking Correction H My ship Eg SeapiX H ightlof tide EN Position PIC Estimate Acquisition TimeOut 0 05 In this exemple data stored in SeapiX database will have a 3 meter correction Important THIS CORRECTION IS PERFORMED ON DEPTH DATA BEFORE STORAGE AND IS NOT REVERSIBLE 284 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 2L LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XIX STATISTICS MODULE If you have Turbo Catch system it is possibl
165. TAT CS MODULE nwnSn0 Set 285 XX CABLE AND PIPELINE MANAGEMENT MODULE csccsccecnecneeneceeeeeneenseneeeeeeeeeneeneees 287 AAI PRESENT TON EE 287 AKA Provided FUNCIONS RETE mm E EN 287 XX 1 1 1 SML Management Database ccccccccssccccccsssneseeceesaeeeeesssaseceeessssaeeeeesssaaeeeesssaaneseeseas 287 XX 1 1 2 Bathymetric Data Management 287 XX 1 2 Functions not Included as compared to MMS DOS version 288 XX 2 IMPLEMENTATION E 288 XX 2 1 UTMManagement nennen nennen nennen nnn nnn eser n nnne nnn rsen nnn nnns 288 XX 2 2 SML Database Management 289 XX 2 2 1 General Overview of Access to Funchons esee 289 X X222 Library Management MM NAE 290 XX 2 2 3 Cable Link and Pipeline Selection cccccccccsssseeeeeeecceeecssueeseecceseesasseuseeecesssssuaaesseeeeess 291 XX 2 2 4 Displaying ltems Rules sssesiissssesisssseseis seen eese nna nnn nna nnn sna ann sna asina aas 292 P 0 UOVA E 293 XX 2 2 6 SML Properties Window 0 1cccccsssccccnscseeccsecseecnacueccnsasecssaceesenacsesensaseessaaesensauesessans 294 PR UNI 00 EE 306 PRA DIVE e N E 306 AKA Ge EE 306 PO Zt OOOO EE 307 PRZEZ OIL EE 307 XX 2 3 Bathymetric data management 308 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 r A i KE LJ C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual A S NEN uno cm 308 IXBLUE CONTACT SUPPORT 24 7 CUSTOMER SUPPORT HELPLINE
166. TERCEPTED ONLY BY THE MAIN VIEW Ta BAI E HOME B Lp EE sm H v Position passerelle 51 08 673 N 001 16 956 E ALLE S LN TEN d Vecteur fond 5 2 kn 325 0 1 0 00H LAM Ae d Ww 4 22 Vecteur surface 10 0 kn 250 0 i i ll jv i Cap vrai 240 0 Profondeur Mobiles ust a Appearance Configuration creer Ste CES Sut Coker Ca eh arso Fal te sont i Gm f Mee A Teapaieseen ms oe a ni ien Ip GH L t SOW NSN UUNUME m in mp jonke D er als e wilt Bhae OR Tho SITNERT3N OOIMIBV EE 5E em mr m d CSS EI Ae ae Zeckt ARMDA 81504729 DO 25256 E Amm 6 554 NM gt th 15min 0923 38 rx SHIP Incorsistent bro K diesen ATE JE ACE 2 Figure 38 Active window example with the main view 2 The active window is identified with the color of the title bar that is different from others ISD M 038G EN September 2014 47 C XL LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 11 10 2 2 TurboWin Mode The TurboWin mode enables to activate an interaction mode close to the mode used by TurboWin software This mode is very special because it attempts to replicate the old ergonomics TurboWin and Turbo2000 with a horizontal menu bar at the bottom of the screen where the mouse cursor is locked 2 150 000 WGS84 E we mm mm zm sche e A sg pew ow wo mm mm em EEN SE h nn wf wm wm mm mm mm mm mm Ax
167. TRY dr ell BC 248 LANSER Ke eidelt Ne 249 XIII 2 BATHYMETRY DATA TO DISPLAY sssecccccsssceeecccscsseeeecencseeeeeceuusseuseneuusseeeeuenasseuseeoaessensenonass 250 MIS DATABASE E 250 XIV SD VIEW tee 254 XIV 1 REPRESENTATION OF 3D VIEW ccssssseccccssseeseccecsseeeecenusseeeeceussseeeeeouusseeeeneugsseeseneusssenssnoaass 254 XIV 2 WOOL E 255 AA EN 257 XV 1 INTRODUCTION EE 257 XV 2 CONFIGURING AND USING WASSP WITH SEAXPERT 11 cecinere eene enean annua nana 257 XV 2 1 Creating a stream dedicated to Wassp data 257 XV 3 CONFIGURING WASSP MODULE ccssccessccceseecseeceseeeeseeneeeeenseeenseeseeneesenaseeeaeeeuaseeeaseneesenaeees 258 XV 4 CONFIGURING BATHYMETRY AND SEDIMENT MODULES ornnes 259 XV 4 1 Bathymetry Module when available 259 XV 4 2 Sediment Module when available 260 XV 5 USING WASSP MOBILE CN 260 DV UII A DS 1 DE 264 XVI 1 CONFIGURING THE INPUT STREAM sscccccssseecccsseeeccsseeeecsseeeceseeeeusnseeeuenseeeeessseeeuanseseuasesens 264 XVL2 USING THE SIMBAD MODULE ereieesiccesietecvnscscnencecwancuseswssexusceienusnewapeennsnaeanseusnecuxetuanwenandecevensneus 265 XVIIBIOMASS MODULE EEN 268 AVEA cisci eile EE 268 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 xiii L L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XIV AVI T2 Biomass DISplay EG 269 XVIIL SEAPIX Eege 271 XVII T TINETIRODDUG TOI BE 271 AVI CONFIGURATION m
168. The symbols shall be replicated in size and shape using any convenient format The colour tables shall be reproduces within the tolerances given in S 52 appendix 2 5 2 3 The remaining items may be implemented in any convenient form which produces the same results as the presentation library 316 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 i AZ i T E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Quality of Data An area within which a uniform assessment of the quality of the data exists Rate of Rotation The velocity to rotate for a mobile Recommended Speed The speed that is recommended to reach the next wheel over according to the ETA Information is computed according to ship s position and ETA Reference position The last real position value that is updated when the position changes except if changed by a position control Reference Speed The speed that is taken as a reference to define the way a mobile appears in the main view If it is inferior to the mobile speed the mobile will be in early mode and will be located below the main view Otherwise it will be centred and controlled on the main view RENC The regional ENC Coordinating Centre as defined by IHO ENC distributor Most ENC information will not be supplied directly from a Hydrographic Office to an ECDIS Regional ENC Coordinating Centres RENCs will operate as central distribution nodes compliant with the IHO WEND model rec
169. To use the autopilot on a waypoint Action In the Autopilot Control dialog box click the Pilot to one Waypoint radio button Do one of the following actions e Enter the position of the point to be reached e Click rb and then click the desired location into the chart Click OK End of procedure To transmitt sentences to the autopilot Action In the Autopilot Control dialog box click the Outputs tab Select the stream that will transmit the sentences check the sentences you want to transmit and click OK End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 205 VII 3 9 206 sz UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES THE CHANNEL VIEW The Channel View is a plane representation of the main view It gives e An overview of the route followed by the ship e A better understanding on how the Ship is moving That is why this window is oriented in leg up mode according to the route direction lts behaviour is the same as the main view For example when you select a mobile in the main view it is also selected in the Channel View Functions that can be applied to the route monitoring are available in the channel view You can modify the scale from 1 1 200 to 1 45 000 and the grid each square may represent 25 50 100 250 or 500 meters of this view n am S St gH Me e D S 113 UD sf 50937 50M 5 t 5 ADA T dae D A S e ren m TO name WO3 WOD 3 1
170. V Bat K xS SOW ETA gt apo ARA e E AmA ea AN P Prof CFA X XXXX NM Figure 13 Critical information window This information bar can be displayed either on the chart or in the information bar in the right hand side of the screen When displayed on the chart you can move it to any position on the chart area with the mouse Important IN ECDIS MODE THIS WINDOW IS AUTOMATICALLY FORCED INTO THE RIGHT HAND SIDE OF THE SCREEN Allows you to display previously selected pieces of information that are computed or that come from sensors To display the information bar you must select the corresponding command in the View menu You can superpose several bars creating bars by themes for example one bar may stand for Own Ship s information and another one for information about a route that is monitored When a piece of information is not available incorrect or nonexistent the corresponding field is not filled in Pieces of information are displayed with different colors depending on their accurateness e High quality pieces of information are displayed in blue eg a position acquired in differential mode e Normal quality pieces of information are displayed in black white e Invalid pieces of information are displayed in red e g a piece of information whose acquisition maximum timeout is over X 51 06 444 N Ground vector 18 0 kn 275 9 True heading 275 9 001 22 741 E Water vector 18 0 kn
171. X KE LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Sizes Heights Navigation 30 Model AIS Bn L lenath ed o rr Outline Filename B beam 24 00 m ECDIS outline L Conning position Prvoting position i ta EE Lp 115 8 m CB Bp O 0000 m Bp 0 0000 m More Clase Figure 64 Own Ship s sizes L Length Represents the total length of your ship B Beam Represents the total beam of your ship Conning Position This position is the reference position of the Own Ship and not necessarily the reference position of the positioning system The difference between both must be specified in the Corrections tab of the Position piece of information see IV 6 5 page 112 Lp Defines the distance between the rear of the ship and the conning Bp Defines the distance between the axis of the ship and the conning Pivoting Position The pivoting position defines the position in which the ship will pivot Lp The distance between the rear of the ship and the pivoting position Bp The distance between the axis of the ship and the pivoting position used in dead reckoning mode IV 2 2 HEIGHTS The Heights tab allows you to configure the height of the ship and its draught Sizes Heights Navigation 30 Model AIS T Total height 20 00 m ii B Bridge Keel height 12 00 m D d D Extreme draught More Clase Figure 65 Own Ship s heights T Total height The total height of your ship B Bridge Keel T
172. a check Enable and then specify a DMP and a TDMP in the corresponding fields 4 Check Periodic report 30 s to generate an alarm each 30 seconds in case of a collision risk 5 Click OK 6 End of procedure IV 4 1 2 Inconsistent Positions Several mobiles can be assigned to your ship a main one the Own Ship and other secondary ones Inconsistent positions aim at telling the user when the Own Ship s conning position is too different from secondary ships To do so you must enter an ELP Ecart Limite de Position Maximum difference between positions if the distance between positions of conning is Superior or equal to ELP the following alarm is generated Inconsistent position with x difference y where x is the mobile that is too far from the Own Ship and y is the difference between positions ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 77 C IX L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 4 1 3 80 Step Inconsistent Position Enable Maximum Distance between ships ELP 200 00 m Figure 69 Inconsistent position alarm parameters Important ELP IS COMPUTED BETWEEN CONNING POSITIONS AND NOT SENSORS IN CASE OF OFFSETS WITH THE GPS ANTENNA SEE SECTION IV 6 5 PAGE 112 To define inconsistent positions Action In the System menu click Settings UO and mobiles and then Alarms The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed Click the Own Ship Specific Alarms tab In Inconsiste
173. a rudimentary trisection can be drawn This is the same as an EBL 7 one P D Figure 139 Bearing Lines To make your position with bearing lines Step Action 1 Click Navigation and then Bearing Line 2 Click one seamark and drag the mouse until the angle displayed corresponds to the bearing of the seamark 3 Follow the same steps for a minimum of two seamarks Your position is in the point of intersection of all the bearing lines 4 End of procedure Bearing range lines allow you to display the heading and distance between two spots seamarks or locations in the main view In most cases you will use them to estimate the heading and distance between your ship and a particular spot in the main view ee Hl MenM ee Dm e ee ee mm mm me I D E olo Figure 140 VRM EBL 174 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual To use bearing range lines Step Action 1 Click Navigation and then Bearing Range Bearing Lines 2 Click the first spot of the main view of which you want to know the distance and heading in this example this is the Own Ship 3 Drag the mouse and click the second spot A circle is shaped and the bearing and distance are specified in a yellow box 4 End of procedure To delete all bearings and EBL Click the Navigation menu and then Delete All Bearing Lines You can consult the distance and bearing between the cursor and the Own Ship To do
174. ad reckoned automatic Swaying speed dead reckoned software Swaying course dead reckoned software Rate of turn acquired Rolling dead reckoned automatic Pitching dead reckoned automatic Depth below keel Draught dead reckoned automatic Air draught software 98 Gecdis v8 User s Manual This piece of information as well as Drift speed must be valid to modify the COG and leeway track s vector Example 020 0 The distance between the seabed and the water surface Depth is dependent to Charted depth and Height of tide Depth Charted depth Height of tide Example 10 00 m The depth that corresponds to the chart datum level Example 7 0000000 m Auxiliary information The difference between depth and charted depth originated by tide Example 3 000 m The depth of a submarine This piece of information is associated to the Depth below keel piece of information Example 55 0000 m The vertical elevation of a point above the water level chart datum level Example 10000 0 m The SOG projected on the perpendicular line of the mobile In other words this is the speed of a mobile on a virtual line perpendicular to it This piece of information is useful when berthing for example Example 01 334132 kn The COG projected on the perpendicular line of the mobile Swaying course is computed from gyro Example 15 000000 The rate of turn is expressed in degrees per second Example 5 000000 e The r
175. adjust the main view according to a point selected in the echogram e Provide a simultaneous and multi frequency display of echograms provided by several channels e Record and store echogram segments having a specific interest Hardness data by Simrad is not available with our module Hardness is managed by our SEDI module Configuring the Input Stream To configure input data stream Action Click System Settings and then I O and Mobiles and Input Ouput Mobile Configuration Create a NET stream with the same port as the one defined in Simrad in our example 2020 Input Output amp Mobile Configuration x7 B System a UDP Sream Input Parameters Spying H 7 COMI J si E NETI simu 7 r Comment 81500 H S NET2 B uat GR NETS B1500 Port 2020 Pr hpu datum Output DS TCP2 Pot Pr EN TCP3 autopilote a input filter Si ER TCP4 WASSP dm oca T er z E1 amp g FILET i wr er a pi F Assign the new stream to your ship In the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action box add the depth parameter provided by the sentence Simrad BI500 Input Output amp Mobile Configuration x Source Checking Corrections Fitering wu Depth SIMRAD BI500 Q amp D Sean nger EE 4 Inthe Stream field select the stream you have previously create
176. ake an action available for the Captain types of users check the box that crosses the action and the Captains column e To make an action available for the Captain and Navigator type of users check the box that crosses the action and the Navigator column Both types of users are selected e To make an action available for all types of users check the box that crosses the action and the Guests column All users are selected You can delete an access right granted to a user by clicking on the corresponding checkmark End of procedure OPENING A NEW SESSION While using Gecdis it is possible to open a new session with a new user This way a new user can log in without needing to close and re open Gecdis When a user logs in his own configuration is reloaded with his specific rights see section II 7 2 To open a new session Action Click System and Log Off x where x is the type of user that is currently connected or right click on the chart and select the Log Off command ccm Display Mobile Nay Chart Information Import V Log OFF Print Bathy Surface Settings Bathy Isolines mm Bathy Settings Log OFF Administrator Exit Create Mark or A message asks you to confirm that you wish to change session Click Yes In the User field select the name of the user you want to log in Enter the password in the Password field Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking
177. allows you to select the toolbar to change Insert Button adds a button based on the location of the selected Delete deletes the current button c moves to the left or right current button Button Menu Command selects the associated command with the button Button Image selects the image associated with the button from the library or browsing the hard drive Button Tooltip allows entering the tooltip associated with the button Button With Separator adds a separator before the button ISD M 038G EN September 2014 2L LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 11 6 Alarms Configuring alarm display consists in choosing in the list of alarm groups the ones you want to display in the alarm window Regardless of the alarm window all alarms are archived and consultable in the black box This configuration is made with checkboxes By default some alarms are unchecked Alarm groups are gathered depending on the modules they belong to System Routes ENC Charts etc So this is easier to select them Configuration X Safety Synchronization User Interface Identification Format Display Time Datum Toolbar Users Alarms rL Dad 7 GA Information An acquired stream datum is different from the datum of the SENC charts WGS84 A ARCS Charts PN Chart datum is undefined or does not match with system datum Areas Ka Alarm on mobile inside or outside an area End of ala
178. already involved in the database have their fields activated alarm and commentary updated The list of mobiles to be detected must be defined by a section named WarningList Then each handset is registered by the couple MMSI Comment using the key for the MMSI and value for comment WarningList MMSI Number Warning Comment 232316000 FPV NORNA 232435000 FPV SULISKER 232514000 FPV VIGILANT Figure 72 TvswMMSI ini example ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 83 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 4 2 3 AIS Message Filtering Receiving a message not related to security AIS protocol messages 6 addressed and 8 broadcasted is treated as other messages relating to safety namely through an alarm and an event in the black box It is not possible to disable the alarms against an optional filter on the alarm text messages has been introduced to limit their number Upon receiving a text message an event will always be added to the black box by cons if filtering is active the alarm will not be generated if at least one of following conditions is satisfied e The recipient of the addressed message does not match the MMSI of the ship e The content of the last message received is identical to the previous message received e The received message does not contain space usually coded message To enable filtering of AIS messages Check the Enable AIS Messages Filter box IV 5 Representati
179. an element e Edit SML see Modification of the course and elements List filtering The list of positions is built from all SML elements by default By pressing the filter list button a dialog box lets the user define the components of this list Filtering e All elements e All elements with the same type e An element of one type by selecting its symbol 298 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 X3L UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Editing an element Elements Select Filtering e All elements Type f Cable points Ponctual events f Linear events Envirronments Point 1 Point 2 e Geo length Capture C Cable length Figure 185 List filtering It is also possible to define both ends of the list by entering either a cumulative cable length or a cumulative geographical length This may also be determined after capturing a point with the cursor or from a cable point selection in a summary list Notes displaying See notes button controls the notes of all the elements constituting the list They may be printed Centre on one element When an item is selected in the list pressing the button Centre on refocuses the geographical view on the element Double clicking on an element also refocuses Editing an element is available e From the list of positions after selecting the item by pressing the Edit button e After inserting a new element in the change of the ro
180. an information connection change you must click on Apply button to ping with the new values If several NetRadar boxes have been configured select here the source of the radar images you want to display e Main parameters of the NetRadar tab Server NetRadar JRC 1 2 JRC 2 2 RTM 1 2 RTM 2 2 4 gt Video SIC STC slope FIC CFAR Attenuation Gain Threshold Range Polarity Trigger delay Heading Offset 0 1024 2 ec o o E 2 Eat eat eat Sat eat eat eat eat eat o No gyro NR Total triggers Gyro from Gecdis Lost triggers Gyro from NetRadar Back triggers Datagrams not pross Gyro from NetRadar Triggers number 0 Sample number per trigger 0 Friendly name Auto set Gain Rain Sea Tune Auto Tune on Range changing Cancel Figure 174 NetRadar settings NetRadar tab In the greyed box the data are those sent by the selected radar STC Sea Slope STC It modifies the slope of theSTC curve The bigger the value of this field the ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 223 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES slope more attenuation is performed on a long distance a Sea curve level Time CFAR Constant False The CFAR processor removes sea and rain clutter from the radar screen Alarm Rate for a clear view of targets The goal of CFAR is to remove the range related dependence and loca
181. ar image Threshold Ga i D Brightness Video Colour Non Tracking Zone Colour 8 colours 256 colours Trail Length No Trail Threshold Figure 176 Configuration of the colors of radar data With two of the color modes you can configure the color numbers displayed in the radar image Gradual ECDIS and ARPA You can choose to display 8 or 256 colors If you select 8 colours 8 different shades willl be displayed in the radar video If you select 256 colours 256 different shades willl be displayed in the radar video With the ARPA color mode the Colour buttons are active With them you can change the colors of the radar video In the the Trail area of the Radar Colors dialog box you can configure the trail of the targets of the radar video The crolling list of the Length field allows you to define the ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual length of the trail Th Threshold moving cursor allows you to favour the trail display with respect to the video display The more the percentage is increased and the more you will see the trail to the detriment of the video To configure the display of radar data colors Step Action 1 Click the Radar menu and then Colours The Radar Colors dialog box opens Radar Col a Threshold Gain Brightness Video Non Tracking Zone e 8 colours 256 colours 2 Configure the Threshold Gain and Brightness fields
182. ark e Check the Outline comments box to highlight the mark comments if displayed in the main view e Check the Hide symbol if a comment is set box if you want to hide the symbol for which you have indicated a comment 3 Inthe Depths area e Check the Display depths box if you want to display depths you may have entered while creating a mark e Check the Outline depths box to highlight the mark depth if displayed in the main view e Check the Hide symbol if a depth is set box if you want to hide the mark symbol for which you have indicated a depth 4 Check the Use large mark symbols box if you want to display symbols with double size in the cartographic views 9 End of procedure 1 IN ECDIS MODE ALL USER OBJECTS ARE DRAWN WITH THE ORANGE COLOR SEE SECTION l 4 2 e PAGE 19 VII G Areas 216 An area is a polygon the user can add to symbolise and highlight on the screen a part of the chart that is remarkable or dangerous Each area can be associated to several characteristics e tcan be closed or opened e tcan have a specific visual representation line and or symbol e Furthermore it is possible to configure the area so that an alarm is generated when one or several mobiles ARPA targets for example defined by the user enters or quits this area 07 51 00 Eu Zone Alarm TAOUEY entered in Circle Figure 171 Area alarm These alarms are e Mobile is in the area if the mobile enters the area
183. art of the main view those frames are blue for ENC cells yellow for DNC and magenta for ARCS ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual li H H ie heels m LL TE fn T BRI i FH iH I HT Low nam LIES SE LL Ee mie Hd n aseo ES EP SS E eft taf E em P E em 1 em em TT IL bebe eae MEE Reange 2 tte dk OK Figure 96 Chart coverage To display the chart coverage In the Display menu select Charts menu Chart Information and check Chart Coverage V 1 2 LIST OF CHARTS A table lists all available charts in all chart databases ENC ARCS DNC Each chart is given information as follows e The kind of chart ARCS ENC DNC e The producer code e The chart name e The chart code e The usage Harbour Coastal Approach Berthing and General e The geographic coverage e The issue date e The update date e The import date The list may be organized from any of those pieces of information except the chart code and the geographic coverage This operation is made by clicking the appropriate column header You can notice which column is sorted out with the arrow that is indicated in this header IF YOU HAVE FILTERED CHARTS ONLY THOSE THAT ARE KEPT AFTER APPLYING THE FILTER WILL BE LISTED IN THE LIST OF CHARTS ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 1229 X 3 L
184. as grid is Vertical exaggeration enables to increase or decrease the vertical scale compared to the horizontal scale 3D displays the 2D general view 3D is centered on the boat 3D is centered on the trawler ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 299 X 3 LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Monochrome representation of the bathy surface Default color of the bathy surface Color of the surface with the default scheme 3D is positioned towards the north 3D is positioned according to the ship s heading Visualization of the 3D from above Display of water surface level 0 Display or not of objects layers Display of the chart layer Display of the isolines Display of the sediments 256 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 X3L UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XV WASSP XV 1 Introduction The WASSP module is able to record seabed hardness as well as bathymetry and provides a more accurate resolution of the bathymetry than the one gotten with sensors of monobeam sounders grids with sub metric resolution SeaXpert WASSP module is totally dedicated to Wassp data and cannot record any other data as for example manual or chart points The WASSP module offers the following functionalities e Acquisition and storage of bathymetry and hardness data provided by SMF Wassp e Provides bathymetry data for bathymetry and 3D modules e Provides hardness data
185. ases WY dU DESC ee list of mobiles erp t A List of mobiles eeeeseeeeeeeenn emen Gecdis v8 User s Manual M Man over board H 20 CIE IEN e e EEN 204 Mark template ccccccssscccccssececeeeceeeeeeesececseeeeeessueeeeeees 215 Menu Dell seriinin a bra qut VERE su das 11 Minimumi ter E 78 ue 1 20 vue 109 DEER 110 CENE eech 78 CS AUN E 110 dead reckon BEO E 110 bdung nennen nnns 77 Fre 85 E Ee Li E 86 specific appearance ccccsessscccceesececeeeeeccesaeaeeecesseeeeeeees 90 SWIG P 85 gol ee ere 92 S e D A M E 86 Mobile desd Re en le EE 120 mobile and sensor synthesis eossnneesseenssseeessseeresssrrressn 117 Mobile appearance cccccccessececcceesececceeeeeceeseeeeeeesseaeeeeees 84 Ee 76 mobiles ibo E 109 Mobiles Al 88 ARP A anaE 88 Mobiles E d EE 78 N Navigation CAS IS scaisccuneesrscnntasiivarnesnsdnnseeusennmwadsteawesnsatawaceuntes 25 E 94 O objet cartographique GEIER eege 142 objet ponctuel cartographique eese 142 opening a E 40 outline filename ucseer ri tro kr a PEE E Yn SY CER Xo FeE VERE PY FEE ETE Y eaE VER 74 EE 316 EE 10 Own Ship UE dur 78 EI Ee 19 74 IG SIC Me 74 ju M E 74 Own Ship alarms lag Ee E e WE 78 inconsistent depths ceeccccessee
186. ate AZ Time of day p ZZU Time UTC Other than IXMloMobile X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X En Gei m I Wet L E za em E op mp Av IA Ga II em 9 85 8 dm a E o E SE a n B mm Y fash im BM E bah m amp ell ye 9s T FF Eu WJ WMHEEGAEL WV F amp E Wu IVE el gd B WR er gel Www Here is the list of binary AIS messages encapsulated in the sentence NMEA VDM VDO used in Gecdis ee Description message number Base station report Ship static and voyage related data Addressed binary message 328 SD M 038G EN September 2014 Li Zz LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES ITU R M1371 ee Description message number EE Binary broadcast message fo Standard SAR aircraft position report UTC and date response Addressed safety related message Safety related broadcast message 18 Standard Class B equipment position report 19 Extended Class B equipment position report Aids to navigation AtoN report Static data report Fleet Mobile Buoy Target This chapter presents the different equipments for managing mobile fleets 3 1 Summary Table F t Manufact Sent t Modul GE Ti t ormat Manufacturer entence type odule imeout een om gege EE EE wee meer mag Il ran ams MMoFomaEk x sm mg Lossen f eg x sm lug Pee f eg x Dwek Ion mam
187. ate and safest choice especially when changing or multi screens Displays connected and recognized by the system are listed in the upper area specifying their dimensions e Fixed size in this case the dimensions of the screen are entered manually This is useful if the connected display is not recognized by the system or if its size cannot be known automatically e g with a video projector SN Note on ECDIS compliance when the size of your screen is correctly configured Gecdis displays the cartographic texts ENC with a height of 3 5 mm which corresponds to a nominal viewing distance of one meter 1 2 2 COLOR MODES In ECDIS Calibrated display topic you can automatically calibrate screen connected to a serial port In this case you must select the type of display connected in the combo box 30 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual The Black background in day mode option enables to display the cartographic in day mode with black background Normally the background is white default configuration The White background in dusk mode option enables to display the cartographic in dusk mode with white background Normally the background is black default configuration Overview of Color modes Colour mode Result Day with white background default Day with black background Dusk with black background default Dusk with white background Night with always black background 1
188. ater BEN E Latitude ocale of distance from Ecuador to north or south graduated from O to 90 ee Leeway angle Difference between heading and the leeway track Section of a route that links two points A route can be made of several sections Leg Proof of the lawful use of the software Log Device allowing to measure ship s speed from run distance during a certain time Longitude Angular distance measured in degrees from a point of the Earth to the original TT imt Main view A part of Gecdis screen that displays ENC data Gecdis screen is composed DT MIOR Mark Object that is inserted by the user and allows to indicate the location of a point o met Maximum XTE Maximum allowed difference to a route This difference is materialized by a line on each side of the route When the Own Ship exceeds the maximum XTE and the route is enabled an alarm is generated MMSI The Marine Mobile Service identification Navigation status Situation of the ship that is defined with outdoor conditions ISD M 038G EN September 2014 ENK LA E LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES NET UDP network stream see UDP NMEA National Maritime Electronics Association Official association that has defined a standard organizing interfaces on electrical signals and data transmission protocols with the serial port of RS232 type devices North up Type of orientation that allows to orient the chart view to the geographical
189. athy v Seapix wi Tracks Interpolation limit 10 00 m Maximum precision 0 00000 m OK Cancel Apply XVIII 2 3 2 Sediment Module when available Step Action 1 In Gecdis toolbar select the Sediments menu and click Settings e Select SeapiX as provider of sediment data ISD M 038G EN September 2014 2 9 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action e In order to have a realistic display of the data in 2D and 3D select an extension zone based on the depth opening with an angular opening of a few degrees between 3 and 5 e You can also choose 10 m as the Data point extension 2 To increase the speed of data display to the detriment of visual representation uncheck Use high quality display for multibeam Sediments Settings Personnal Data Official Sediments Data to display Presentation mode ee All available records Hardness C Current record only C Data point extension 10 00 m Y Beam angular coverage l 5 degrees Area extension factor l 1 1 realsize Transparency level kan r V Use high quality display for multibeam sounders data slower Related settings for sediments data acquisition Single Beam Settings OK Cancel Apply 3 End of procedure CU To get more information about the Sediment module see chapter XII XVIII 3 Using SeapiX XVIII 3 1 OVERVIEW OF SEAPIX FIRE MODES F
190. ayed e In gray SML hidden ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 291 az LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual The selection of lines is standard multiple lines can be selected at once with Shift or Ctrl key or may also be made selectively with the proximity control or all the lines with the All command Here are the details of the orders compatibility according to selection Select proximity Display Display Select all Hide Hide Create Select proximity Select proximity select all select all Create Create Edit Hemove Hemove Export Export Centre on Select proximity This command via a drop down list selects lines near the centre of the main geographical view Ranges are taken from MMS DOS namely 1 2 5 10 25 50 100 and 500 NM XX 2 2 4 Displaying Items Rules The software distinguishes two views of SML elements e Automatic default mode the display is achieved by the parameters of scale associated with each symbol e Manual the user selects the display manually The view can be chosen globally by items type or finely element by element VA P ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual SML Elements Display Rules Automatic Display Deni Iv All l Cable points iw Upper text iv Lower text Si xl Ponctual events x vE Eso W Kilometric points x Environments Name Scale Scale 1 Alter course 1500 Station 1000000 Repeater 1500000 Beach
191. been added the weeks before Installing an update CD is the same deal as installing a chart CD The update CD code is WK When you install a new edition of an update CD that you have already copied you do not need to uninstall it before installing the new edition Each update CD is kept in the UPDATE folder of the ARCS structure So if import is correct the previous edition is deleted and replaced by the new one Otherwise it is unchanged So you will never lose data ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Y 4 n 23 Anchoring d Dredging and Trawling it E Prohibited S a se x Install CD ARCS charts to import Install N Installed dektei Update CD zs EU OF Update CD United Kingdom 15 02 2007 Uninstall E RC1 Chart CD United Kingdom 26 10 2006 Chart CD C Rc11 Chart CD United Kingdom 30 10 2003 RC4 Chart CD United Kingdom 23 03 2006 Figure 133 Installing a Chart Disk Update In the main view updates are notified with an orange hatched square meaning that one or several update s have been made You can decide whether you display updates or not Squares will be hidden as shown in the following comparative drawings a gt 42 x l LA 255 Approach Channel see Note 23 255 Approach Channel see Note kip 23 Figure 134 Updates hidden Figure 135 Updates displayed Step To display updates in the main view Cl
192. ber 2014 61 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Warning You didn t choose to detect all the dangers ELTE LIED e nen en cl 3 ki 1 Db K 1 ae SE qesced Se 1 Se FJ bi a D ny Be I in I Ze e I 1 i 1 Ze 1 SO SB 3 M ee ee ee EE 1 1 Ze es 1 Gr Se Sis ns Ki S Ze EN s Ze SCH ke Se DM 1 1 m Tee i SO SB 2DM ZR Tell Sapori i i iia a n Ze 001 25 00E 001 25 S0E lte 2 Figure 50 North up orientation e Head up the view is oriented according to the mobile true heading Warning You didn amp thoose to detect all the dangers ef af Pd Figure 51 Head up orientation e Leg up the view is oriented according to the current leg route lt is strongly recommended to use this mode only with route monitoring enabled Warning You didn t choose to detect all the dangers a E I B SE og s D AMEN KM db AH l Ke l Figure 52 Leg up orientation EI North up orientation is more powerful 62 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual To change the orientation you can e Use the Orientation menu from Display menu and select the mode w Centre on Own Ship Fz Orientation Morth up FS w Relative motion Ctrl F2 amp Head up F amp Centre on Place Leg up Figure 53 The or
193. bile and in this way a mobile is now filled in with many 82 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 w8w s D p DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Import TvswMMSI Gecdis v8 User s Manual details name size etc Conversely when static information is received Gecdis updates the database entry corresponding to the mobile being acquired Although brief the list of mobiles shown in the configuration of the AIS detection is updated in real time and is indeed the contents of the database Checked the numbers still appear in the list The comment field is used to build the alarm text To enable AIS detection alarm Action In the System menu click Settings UO and mobiles and then Alarms The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed Click the Target AIS Alarms tab Check the Enable box in the AIS Detection area the list becomes active Check the mobiles in the list you want to detect End of procedure The Import TvswMMSI ini button aims to import all mobile in database from those reported in the ini file and activate their alarms Historically this file is used to manage AlS detection by TurboWin before implementation of the database Besides being able to operate the old file in Gecdis its import into Gecdis has three advantages e To define the comment field e To add mobiles never acquired e Tomassively activate detection on a set of mobiles During import mobile not involved are not so far off and mobile
194. bile Configuration dialog box opens On the left panel click System object in the tree then click Add button and select Stream A list of all available streams is displayed In this list click the communication port you want to add The name of the communication port is displayed in the left hand list On the right part of the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box the Windows default configuration for this communication port is displayed We advise you to change the values if they are different from the ones in the above dialog box Baud rate 4800 Data Bits 8 Parity No Parity Stop Bits 1 On the Comment field optionally enter a comment about the communication port For example if your communication port is a GPS you can enter GPS in this field What you have entered will be inserted into brackets in the left hand list just opposite to the name ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 aA L LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action of the communication port 5 If you click aj data incoming from or outgoing to the communication port which has been added are displayed Right click this window The same menu as above the window is displayed Input Output Pause Reset Texk Farmat Hexadecimal Format e Input Displays the incoming sentences e Output Displays the outgoing sentences e Pause Stops displaying the sentences until you click again on it e Reset Re
195. c sea chart and conning information e Electronics sea charts e Conning information e Alarms e Man over board e Data logging ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 2l e xaLug Secas v User s Manual 1 6 5 1 Display of Electronic Sea Chart e Own ship position e Planned track e Grounding alarm e Chart information 1 6 5 2 Display of Conning Information e Ships heading e Speed single or dual axis e Rate of turn order and direction e Depth e Wind speed and direction e Waypoint bearing e Waypoint ETA e Speed order e Steering mode 1 6 5 3 Alarms e Route monitoring e Position calculation e Position monitoring e Waypoint approach e Sensor failure e System failure e Incorrect operator action e Unsafe water areas 1 6 5 4 Man over Board e Built in function for man over board 1 6 5 5 Data Logging e History book e Voyage recording 28 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES GENERAL CONFIGURATION Il 1 Identification The Identification tab display ship name and station name defined during installation If several Gecdis are installed on the same ship and if synchronization is used the name of the station must be different for each installation The Identification tab allows you to change ship name and station name To access the Identification tab Step Action 1 Inthe System menu click Settin
196. cdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES S e UPS North Ze Gees S MAE Me Projection When UPS North or UPS South is selected the following items are visible on the chart see Figure 127 and Figure 128 e UPS grids with a spacing of 500 000 meters e latitude circles at 88 84 for the North e Latitude circles at 88 84 et 80 for the South e Longitude lines at 0 45 W 90 W 135 W 180 135 E 90 E 45 E Figure 127 Example at the North pole 158 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Figure 128 Example at the South pole To choose the UPS coordinates as working coodinates The mobile positions in the list of mobiles for the routes etc will be expressed in UPS coordinates Step Action 1 In System menu select Settings then General configuration The Configuration dialog box displays 2 Click on Format tab then in the Position drop down list select UPS Universal Polar Stereographic m Configuration Identification Format Display Time Datum Toolbar Users Alarms Safety User Interface LA Units Frecisions Position UPS Universal Polar Stereographic e Geographic Degree 7 Ee el Distance Geo Degree Minute DM i lt Automatic gt Geo Degree Minute Second DMS ho H Speed TM Standard m 1 x UTM Signed northing m AE D
197. ce of it to the captain e Minimum Time to Closest Point Minimum TCPA which is a user defined duration to specify the Minimum TCPA to reach the Allowed CPA e CPA and TCPA between the Own Ship and the other mobiles computed from the real time navigation parameters For a collision risk to occur the following things must be gathered e CPA between the dangerous mobile and the Own Ship is inferior to the Allowed CPA e TCPA is a positive value if TCPA is negative there is no more collision risk e TCPA is inferior to the Minimum TCPA For example if Allowed CPA is 5 nm and Minimum TCPA is 15 minutes the mobile of a fleet will be considered as dangerous if TCPA between it and the Own Ship ranges from 0 to 15 minutes before reaching a 5 nm radius around the Own Ship On screen a circle is drawn around the Own Ship to symbolise to the Allowed CPA with a red colour in Non ECDIS mode and an orange color in ECDIS mode When a mobile is dangerous it is surrounded by a red and blinking triangle that points at the top The following alarm is displayed first and then each 30 seconds in the alarm bar Collision risk with x CPA y TCPA z where x is the dangerous mobile y is the CPA and z is the TCPA between the Own Ship and the dangerous mobile You can decide not to generate this alarm neither in the alarm bar nor in the black box To do so uncheck Periodic report 30 s in the Own Ship Specific Alarms dialog box When the danger i
198. cecceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeueeeceeseees 80 inconsistent position 79 Own Ship characteristics ist acier epe eege die 74 P EE UCI PRI RTT 86 piece of information atl acp tore dia D E pct iode renda tta rien bn 112 pilot to one wavpoint esses 204 Ae 69 September 2014 341 f A A L_ LJ C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES PROCS WIN RETE 179 GEES 98 Planning a rOUtE sccarsansconssdviecounsansacewsdnpsersieccsansvenmeusseriastouns 25 position Se 97 CO LING eet 97 viel 97 DEE 97 E 97 positioning adjustment 115 presentation library cssc con eoa lo Fahrer Ene PE pet KEEN 316 Presentation LIDEAEV susisa riter eo eo rae rta Yea eh owe Ew cabra raa 148 profile Eden 211 quality of E 317 R li 224 rate of turn WEE 98 EE eebe 180 Relative WING sinncidinssincienasgisedousasdcniasdtandansaadaibabseasahuaeasabenavasaine 73 PN ee 317 GREEN 98 Route le Ez ge E 26 S TRIRI IRI T 25 S Ee e E 317 SAR parallel TOU sirenen CU RUD Neer meron 185 SEH qo VIT NI 184 square spiral FOUte cisco vore pax nita 183 SAR Cla Ga Ss E 182 EE 54 SCAMIN ERR 85 Screen BEE 10 GE 30 sea SING E 223 SECUTI Ysa eegen 149 SENE 318 Sensitivity Time Control 224 sentences checkimg nennen enne nnns 109 Sentences Re E el E T mm 107 slJja7 W M I 223 Session elei 40 shallow ee nee li MT E T 318 SHOLEGUE KEYS Louise tir td enirn veni sas ivenia D ead UD sS ire ER PD UE GRE 6 Sizes of the Own Ship
199. centralized mode select only the common shared folder on network and click the check box Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply End of procedure The check boxes can be unchecked to invalidate the synchronization with the corresponding stations or with the server Please ensure that each station has a different name in Identification tab 11 10 User Interface The User Interface tab allows the user to configure the software interface Figure 35 User interface configuration ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 45 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To configure the user interface Step Action 1 Click the System menu Settings General Configuration and then the User Interface tab 2 Check the parameters you want to use see section II 10 2 3 Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply 4 End of procedure 1 10 1 TOOLTIPS IN CHART VIEWS You can define rules to display a tooltip when you pass over an object with the mouse in the chart views Folder Zn Date 2013 06 25 07 51 25 VP ECC OM SA Comment Closed shape Colour Line Pattern Figure 36 Tooltip in chart view Main parameters e Enable tooltips in chart views enable or disable the automatic display of the tooltip e Do not display tooltips for areas enable or disable the display of the tooltip when the m
200. charts some options of the software such as projection and scales in the Display menu are not available and then disabled YOU CANNOT DISPLAY SEVERAL CHARTS SIMULTANEOUSLY AND ZOOM IN OR OUT A CHART ZOOM ALLOWS YOU TO CHANGE THE CURRENT CHART V 3 3 CONSULTING INFORMATION ABOUT CHARTS V 3 3 1 Chart General Information When consulting a chart you can consult information about it Charts menu Chart Informations option which is split into two parts e General information Chart Number Country of Origin Edition Date etc e Information about display Projection scale Ellipsoid Name etc Chart Information Chart Number 2656 Chart Title English Channel Central Part TF Country of Origin United Kingdom Disk Number Panel Number Panel Title English Channel Central Part Edition Nurnber SS Edition Date eee erie File Issue Date eee ay ie Raster Chart Issue Date Se ee Latest Note To Mariners 200205210 Latest Correction Issue Date 00 00 00 Figure 136 General Information on ARCS Charts 1 Chart Number The number of the chart This piece of information is also displayed in the Chart List pane of the Chart Database dialog box 170 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 Chart Title Country of Origin Disk Number Panel Number Panel Title Edition Number Edition Date File Issue Date Raster Chart Issue Date Latest Notice to Mariners Latest Correction Issue Date Projection Scale
201. chy and access rights Furthermore Gecdis provides independent back up arrangements to ensure safe navigation in case of a failure So if your machine suddenly malfunctions the parameters the equipment does not need to be reinitialized manually and operator settings do not change 1 1 1 REQUESTED CONFIGURATION 1 1 1 1 Computer 1GB 10GB advisable ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 1 e xau LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 1 1 2 Screen Gecdis has been designed to be used with one or several screens a minimum of two is recommended Here are the necessary criteria of the screen to be consistent with the ECDIS standard e The operational display area of the chart presentation for route monitoring shall be at least 270 mm x 270 mm e For ECDIS back up arrangements the effective size of the chart presentation shall be not less than 250 mm x 250 mm or 250 mm diameter e Operational display equipment including multifunction displays for example conning displays shall provide a minimum screen resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels or equivalent for a different aspect ratio except where permitted or not required by the IMO or when used for a single specific purpose for example speed log echo sounder e Display equipment intended to support the presentation of electronic chart information shall provide a maximum pixel pitch of 0 29 mm m of nominal viewing distance 1 min of arc for example
202. click Move object button The window that opens allows you to enter the new position of the object or an offset in terms of heading and distance between the current location of the object and its new location Once the operation done click OK End of procedure ISD M 038G EN September 2014 141 142 IXSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Gecdis v8 User s Manual When an object of the official chart is moved the original chart object stays at the same location and is crossed out with an orange dash A new object is created at the selected location The new object is highlighted When an object created manually is moved the object position changes Original and new positions are mentioned in the Object information windo Figure 114 Manually moved chart object To delete a chart object that has been created manually Action Select the object i W Cell B200000 Position 46 29 097 N 005 45 003 W Buoy shape super buoy Colour red white Colour pattern vertical stripes Radar transponder beacon Radar wave length 0 03 0 10 S Category of radar transponder beacon racon radar transponder beacon Signal group Mi Light Light characteristic flashing Colour white Signal group 15 Signal period 4 value of nominal range 20 Information Height 10 metres above water surface Manual deletion Comment Feature manually moved to position 48 2u gae86N OO5 45 nne 7 Au
203. click on a selected user object 16 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C L LIJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 3 1 10 Dialog Boxes A dialog box is a specific area of the screen that is displayed after a user s action when the user gives an order to the software that requires further information or to make choices between several options before running There are two kinds of dialog boxes e Modal dialog boxes e g System Setting General configuration this kind of dialog box requires that the user gives the adequate information before he can continue to work e Modeless dialog boxes eg Mobile Own Ship Dead Reckoning this kind of dialog box is left open as long as the user does not close it it can then be used several times for different purposes because the user can work while this dialog box is open 1 3 2 THE CURSOR In main view the cursor appears in different forms and reflects a current action ECS ECDIS mode mode T Default mode center with left click and consultation with right click Chart consultation mode by pressing the Ctrl key n Object move in progress na Geographic scrolling in any direction by pressing the left mouse button n Geographic scrolling to the east when the cursor is near the edge of the view ER Geographic scrolling to the north when the cursor is near the edge of the view LR Geographic scrolling to the north east when the cursor is nea
204. cs Wassp Tide View Toolbar Centre on Own Ship F2 _ Orientation KE t_ Kos PN E P A Pm OH di Relative motion Ctrl F2 Ke Dos OOM d OWN SHIP HOME ERBL ERBL VRM NN ROUTE NIGHT SYSTEM Scale D Radar Range gt Best Scale Ctrl F3 Window Zoom Zoom x10 Zoom Zoom asd Zoom 10 Ecdis Mode EX FILTER Hide All Non ECDIS Obj 7 oe Hide Fleets And Radar ea Charts D Colour Mode D a v Display Fix Position Fix Position Filter B v True Vectors User Objects Groups gt Eau 005 37 20W 8 SMLs List 238 238 em Figure 177 Display menu In this menu a submenu SMLs can control the display of the list of SML and defines the rules for displaying items of a submarine cable System menu This menu is used to import external data Import ISD M 038G EN September 2014 289 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Display Mobile Navigation User Objects Bathy Charts View DEBUG Bathy Data User Objects JA MMS Objects Import Print MMS DOS Library Settings MMS DOS SMLs Ms Excel CSV SML Log Off Administrateur Exit EE EE Figure 178 System menu Import In this menu a submenu MMS Objects can import various elements used in MMS mainly MMS DOS objects XX 2 2 2 Library Management To function properly the cable and pipeline manage
205. ct has been inserted e Modified the object has been modified The modification can change either the geometry of the object or its attributes e Deleted the object has been deleted Select one of the object and the main view is centred on it If you have selected an object tagged Inserted the mported Feature dialog box displays giving details on the object At this step you can Accept Update or Rejected updates are applied but they are annotated as rejected If you Reject Update have rejected an update you can reconsider your action until the Chart database dialog box has not been closed and no other import operation has been launched To do so select the update and click Accept update Annotate object The annotation is displayed in the mported Feature window as well as the user who added the annotation and the date and time The annotation can be removed by clicking Remove Annotation ES ISD M 038G EN September 2014 X aL L E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES In the History tab click the Charts button to display all the cells imported and available in the application Charts Database Charts History Permits 54 Certificate Last Import Charte Operations IMPORT WO143000 Ed 1 0 on 08 26 10 at 15 05 11 MAMLIPDATE by Administrator on 08 26 2010 at 12 19 46 aj INSERTED UD CTMARE DATSTAZ20100830 amp 3 47 aon 78M n07 24 55308E Figure 107 I
206. ct the type of mobile you want to create Optionally modify the name of the mobile Mobile Name field and or enter a comment Comment field Expand information about the mobile clicking the cross in front of its name EE My GPS2 NEZ ER Position ER UTC of position reference ES ER charted depth Hg ixBlue m End of procedure Important A RED AND YELLOW SYMBOL 0 MAY BE DISPLAYED IN FRONT OF A PIECE OF INFORMATION THIS SYMBOL IS DISPLAYED WHEN THE PIECE OF INFORMATION IS INVALID A fleet is a group of mobiles that represent other mobile objects than your ship For example you will use a fleet for ARPA tracks There are two types of fleets e Dynamic fleet is a fleet that is configured with a source of acquisition to dynamically acquire mobile that compose it When a fleet is dynamic there is an indicator in brackets on the main page ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 Ii AZ SN P WW C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Gecdis v8 User s Manual e Static fleet is a fleet that is configured with no source of acquisition of mobile In this case the operator can manually add mobiles that compose it These mobiles are acquired or dead reckoned To create a fleet Action In System menu click Settings UO and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens Click Add and then Fleet In the case of a dynamic fleet set the source of acquisitio
207. ction 1 Click the Navigation menu and then Create SAR Diagram 2 If not already done check the Draw SAR Diagram box and then fill in the General properties and Search conditions fields 3 n Diagram type area click Square spiral 4 Enter your desired value in Spacing S and click OK The diagram is displayed in the main view 9 End of procedure VI 5 3 SECTOR ROUTE Sector s route is recommended when a single ship searches in a limited circular area This type of route is drawn in a R radius circle which normally ranges from 2 to 5 nm Contrary to square spiral or parallel route this type of route does not require specific settings you just have to click OK to close the dialog box and create the SAR diagram SAR diagram x General properties v Draw SAR diagram Initial position 48740271 18M n4 5z 028 710 w S i Initial course 025 5 Radius P twidkh 10 00000 nm Search conditions Visibility 5 000 nr Search object ManOverBoard MM 1 00 nm Spacing 5 Diagram type Parallel C Square spiral Length L 5 0000 nm vessel count C Parallel Vessel number Figure 149 Sector Configuration The fist line is generally run head wind its length is 2R Each turn is equal to 120 to starboard 184 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 X aL L E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES First line PPPU
208. d 9 End of procedure IMPORTANT THE SHIP MUST GET VALID AND ACCURATE GPS POSITIONS TO COMBINE A POSITION TO EACH PING XVI 2 Using the Simrad Module Step Action 1 Inthe Simrad menu click Recording 2 Select Display Echogram and check the echograms to display Charts SeapiX Sediments View v Recording Archived samples Channel 2 E Se Channel4 3 End of procedure The recording is launched for all available transducers This recording process is carried out in continuous with a circular mouvement oldest data being deleted as new data is recorded Storage capacity 10 hours with 1ping second ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 265 C X aLLE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 45 47 701 N DO3 16 662 W Depth 2012 08 22 16 09 50 251m 45 47 557 N ar 16649 Ww eulzpmepz2 16 09 33 29 5 m Center On Selected Position Create Mark For Selected Position Show Echos Positions Archive this sample Each window of the module is equipped with 2 modes e Ascrolling mode to view each new ping as and it is recorded e A pause mode to go back to a previous event To start it click Pause and use the scrolling bar For both modes a left click enables to select a point that is simultaneously displayed in the 2D view The Pause mode has two complementary functions a tooltip left click and a pop up menu right click The pop up menu
209. d the tidal streams and or tide gauges of the main view are refreshed with 15 minute steps 230 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 2L LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To configure the date Step Action 1 Centre the main view where you want to observe tide gauges or tidal streams 2 Click Tide and then Display Tide Gauge to display the tide gauges and or Display Tidal Stream to display the tidal streams 3 Click Tide and then Date Control 4 Inthe Date Control dialog box you can change the date of the forecast doing one of the following e With the left and right arrow keys move into the date field and change manually the date pressing the up and down arrow keys e Click the arrow of the date field optionally change the forecasting month with the side arrow of the calendar displaying and click the date of the selected month e Enter directly a date with the keyboard 9 Change the UTC doing one of the following e Inthe icon bar below the UTC field click the two far right and far left icons to change the time depending on your desired schedule You can click the middle icon to enter the system time e Enter with the keyboard a UTC in the UTC field e Change the UTC clicking the hour minutes or seconds and clicking the side arrows of this field 6 Option check the Automatic Refresh box if you want the tidal streams to be refreshed automatically in the main view You wi
210. d of procedure XV 4 Configuring Bathymetry and Sediment modules XV 4 1 BATHYMETRY MODULE WHEN AVAILABLE In Gecdis toolbar select the Bathy menu and click Bathy data e Check WASSP as the bathy data source e n order to have a realistic display of data in 2D and 3D we suggest you to choose a limit of interpolation of 10m i e 0 0054 NM E L r The button near each bathy provider is used to open the dialog box related to the module ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 299 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XV 4 2 SEDIMENT MODULE WHEN AVAILABLE In SeaXpert toolbar select the Sediments menu and click Settings e Select WASSP as provider of sediment data e In order to have a realistic display of the data in 2D and 3D select an extension zone based on the depth opening with an angular opening of a few degrees between 3 and 59 e You can also choose 10m i e 0 0054 NM as the Data point extension e To increase the speed of data display to the depriment of visual representation uncheck Use high quality display for multibeam sounders data e Personal Data Official Sediments Data to display Presentation mode WASSP All available records Hardness Current record only Data point extension 0 0054 NM Y Beam angular coverage 4 30 degrees Area extension factor 4 1 1 realsize Transparency level v Use high quality display for mul
211. d on screen e Load only charts that correspond to a specific navigational purpose You can either select one out of the six navigation purposes Overview General Coastal Approach Harbour and Berthing Only charts whose navigational purpose corresponds to the option you have selected will be loaded Manual loading allows you to select only a specific chart 136 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 Gecdis v8 User s Manual C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To use the chart automatic loading mode Step Action 1 Click the Charts menu and then point to Chart Loading Mode 2 Doone of the following e To load all charts automatically click Automatic Coverage e To load charts with the same chart usage as ECDIS usage point to Fixed Usage and select one of the options Centre on Own Ship F2 Orientation gt v Relative motion Ctrl F2 Centre on Place Scale gt Best Scale Ctrl F3 Window Zoom Zoom x10 Zoom FS Zoom F4 Zoom 10 T v Automatic Chart Informations PESE Es b Overview ee Chart Objects b Fixed Cell General Ecdis Mode Coastal Planisphere In Background Hide All User Obj x P ka Approach vw True Vectors Harbour Berthing User Objects Groups VW 3 End of procedure To use the manual loading of a chart Step Action 1 In Charts menu select Chart Loading Mode and then Fixed Cell 2 Inthe Fixed Cell dialog box select the cell to be displayed xj Name Edition usage
212. d take them into account in priority The list of sentences is shown in Appendix D Stream Allows to choose the stream that will be assigned to the selected piece of information only if the source is not lt None gt Estimate Software or Simulate If you select lt Automatic gt the most appropriate stream is selected and taken into account in priority by Gecdis Calculation rate Mainly concerns the position of mobiles When you enter 0 0 s in this field the position is not updated in dead reckoning mode This field must be used if you want to maintain your data faster than you receive it Imagine that you receive data every 10 seconds If you enter 2 in the Calculation rate field your information will be regenerated every 2 seconds Important If you have specified a calculation rate lower than the refreshing of your data the following blinking message will be liable to appear Calculation warning Specific header Allows you to choose a specific header for the acquired sentences of the selected piece of information so that only sentences beginning with this header are taken into account For example imagine you acquire SOGGA and GPGGA sentences If you enter GPGGA in this field you will only receive sentences beginning with this header Acquisition TimeOut Allows you to define a delay since last acquisition after which the piece of information will be considered as invalid If the timeout is 0 it will not be taken into account IV
213. d to create user objects Library menu or manage the mobiles Mobiles menu are greyed On the other hand the commands to adjust the display scale and those to centre the main view remain available The Replay menu includes 3 additional commands To recover a normal use of Gecdis application it is highly recommended to quit the replay mode by closing the second occurrence Configuring Launching the Replay Modu Q Nec i e Folders CA DDhue El Marks 61 e E 05 Wie ou ste The replay module uses the tracks previously created via the User Objects menu So before using the replay module check that the user database containing the tracks you want to use is well loaded However note that if you have not changed the database since the tracks record there is no need to check the database When launching the replay mode you must also enter the period to take into account by the replay mode You can t enter a start date superior to the end date 292 IA ISD M 038G EN C X 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual To launch the replay mode Step Action 1 Inthe View menu click Replay 2 Configure the replay mode speed and start it by clicking gt 3 You can at any time pause the replay by clicking ny or interrupt it by clicking 4 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 233 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES X TIDE MODUL
214. dad tenia ser Qoa E Da VE s d MD Rd Qa Sis RR da UE 63 configuring Information 112 Alarms configuring system Information 94 configuration seeeeesssseeeeeeeeenenn nennen nnns 37 Conning POSITION c ecececececcscecececececeecseseseececeeeecseseaces 114 312 Allowed he GE 78 S LN EE 310 altitude M 98 Control port 223 apparent wind ENEE 99 STE KEE 312 Apparent WIEG EE 73 Course make good 72 ARPA mobiles een 88 DE T A EAEE EEEE RCO Ree MIEL CUI EE 312 att nuation video ENEE 224 qo 72 97 2 sacs 78 B creating d TIeelt eserita oO vean evan oie e 111 creatine nee UE 110 iesila sa a see 174 Current er dE 72 Bearing range NING m 174 ef 17 Es e dil DOK E 64 cusor lt 99 FONG G EE 95 C D calculation Ce E 113 Datum centring COME SUN ATO geeiert 34 ui 78 wielen EBEN 315 Centring VERI A EE mutas edi SPD NERA eden 319 eielo a eaea e ro e 58 Dead SC TE 120 MUER 58 deep COREOUE EEN 313 on a place sss eee nennen enne 57 PG OE UL U RENI EET 313 on any MOODIE EU o TT 59 DENC on Own Ship 59 default configuration MINIM 127 Klee 58 ET EE 98 CFAR o oo cc cececececcvcececcecucececsccecececscsceseuseeecsrseeetessueueeeecs 224 depth below keel eeeen n 98 Bull 69 EEN 313 Chart E 68 Display COntext E 69 chart afea EE 315
215. deed you can either choose to display the objects the way they are usually displayed on a paper chart Traditional symbols or in a simpler way Simplified symbols To choose between the traditional and simplified displays Click the Charts menu point to Presentation and select your desired type of presentation For example the following symbol gt in traditional display mode will look like the following in simplified display mode ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 145 XSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Figure 115 Chart with simplified symbols V 2 12 2 Detail Level of Chart Objects Centre on Own Ship FZ Orientation Relative motion Ctrl F Centre on Place A Best Scale Ctrl F3 Window Zoom Zoom 10 Zoom F3 Zoom F4 Charts Colour Mode Ecdis Mode Hide All User Obj w True Vectors Palarie arr User Objects Groups Scale P zoom 10 Chart Display Mode Chart Informations Gecdis v8 User s Manual Figure 116 Chart with traditional symbols Base w Standard Full Custom Delete Custom Display Figure 117 Chart Objects menu The ENC module allows you to display or not many data in the chart There are three types of chart data display Display Base Standard Display and Full Display Their difference lies in the chart objects they allow you to display If you are not satisfied with a specific
216. distances Upon validation of the window the software is refocusing on the geographical position view of the new point and returns to the editing window ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X3 UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Note and picture Note and picture DA Data Al ain P ictu res Sodena P h otos 1998 Eti sala Ftisa JP G Figure 188 Note and picture input window A window is used to enter e Anote e A path to a picture Modification of the Ge and Modification course elements edition are managed by a window called from the position elements list page of the SML or after a query see S XX 2 2 5 The editing window may insert a SML edit and delete items ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 301 302 i XSL LI E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES SML Edit New point Ce Cable Placement f Event point f Environment point f Event segment f Environment segment Insert by Mouse capture for Point edit Point delete Section delete Cancel Figure 189 SML edit window Inserting a point The insertion of a point depends on its type It is possible to finish a segment by selecting the relevant segment in a list The placement button designates a point where the cable segment needs to be inserted The nsert button opens the position described in Positioning an element and then opens the element edition described in Edi
217. drag the view outside the location in which it should be docked the view is displayed without icons in floating mode Note If you move the location of a view and then you close it the next time you will display it again it will be located on the new location 3 End of procedure 1 3 4 ACCESSING COMMANDS Gecdis is a Windows based software and like any Windows based software it allows you to access commands in different ways e Inthe menu bar e With Shortcuts e With the toolbars e With contextual menus e With context sensitive buttons that appear on the right of the screen when you select an object 18 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 Gecdis v8 User s Manual L lt SLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e Inthe dialog boxes and windows 1 4 Important Features to Know 1 4 1 THE OWN SHIP Own ship in Gecdis associated with one or more mobile The Own Ship with initial uppercase is the main vessel and is the basis for many treatments information relative to alarms route monitoring man over board oeveral secondary vessels can be added their goal is to represent other sources of information to compare to that of the main vessel Own Ship For example the Own Ship can be acquired from a GPS and a secondary vessel can be estimated In this example if at a given time the GPS fails the user can reverse the ship and have therefore estimated Own Ship To differentiate vessels in views the Ow
218. e transmitted Input Output Pause Reset Text Hexa SEPPIM Ae eee ee Hd Cubed 2343 o SAE SEIZDA 125438 05 07 2013 2 0 77 SEIDPT 62 SEIDSA 12758439 80928 12523 N 00205 07341 le e e SHURE 125437 EE Ee ese B 157 5901 3 Oe Es TS SEIHDT 57 0 T 1C SEIROT V 13 SEIVTG uut mp EH EE EE e es uds see dig eee s OK 5102 ole ojo o Figure 86 Check transmitted sentences on a stream To check transmitted sentences Step Action 1 In System menu click Settings O and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens 2 Inthe left hand list of the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box click the stream whose sentences you want to check E 3 Click in the first tab of the stream the left one A window opens 4 Click Output button to check the transmitted sentences The list of all sentences is displayed 9 End of procedure IV 6 3 CREATING MOBILES AND FLEETS A mobile is the representation of a mobile object With Gecdis you can insert as many mobiles as desired It is possible to create different types of mobiles e Mobiles representing your ship Imagine you acquire your position with a GPS but you also use dead reckoning to estimate it You will then create two mobiles one mobile will represent the GPS and the other one dead reckoning This way if your GPS experiences operating problems you will be able to check it compari
219. e with Gecdis to view your fish catches via descriptive statistics pie charts All information on catches is available by selecting the symbol on screen The user can proceed to a filtering in order to view the results for one or a few species ech BE g d TIDES WEATHER SYSTEM i i UA Me Projection U50000 WGSRA _ Object Information x i Ki TN M 1 2 M i FAR 175 Date 23 02 2012 06 47 13 Position 41 4T 573N 004 16 870W Statistical Rectangle 24E5 Total Weight 635 0 kg WV Species Alfonsinos nei 1 2 kg Anglerfishes nei 311 6 kg Black scabbardfish 50 4 kg Com mon dab 1 7 kg ardinal fish 146 5 kg Greater forkbeard 13 3 kg European hake 0 8 kg Ling 6 3 kg Atlantic redfishes nei 6 8 kg Com mon mora 59 4 kg Sandy ray 2 1kg Scorpionfishes nei 27 0 kg A To add TurboCatch databases in Gecdis Step Action 1 Inthe Statistics menu click Logbook Settings Logbook Settings Database Path Default C Users TST001 Documents Sodena T urboCatch Database Ki Apply Cancel 2 f you are using your own customized configuration of Windows uncheck Default and enter the folder path containing your TurboCatch database 3 Click Apply 4 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 205 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To assign a color to a catch Step Action 1 Inthe Statistics menu click Col
220. e decided to display the information windows but no chart overview in case you want to have maximum available space on screen Anytime you wish to skip to this configuration you will have to load the corresponding display context Channelling is a specific use of display contexts A leg can be assigned to a specific display context For more details see VII 3 10 page 207 The management menu display context is composed of two parts e he first part consists of only one command that allows you to manage contexts e A second part that is automatically constructed according to the contexts added Each line of this part corresponds to a command to recall a context The new commands of the menu second part can be added when customizing the toolbar see II 5 1 page 35 Close ctrl F4 w Chart in Full Screen Fiz Display Contexts Define Toolbar 1 Seaxpert Blue default Figure 60 Display contexts menu To create a display context Action Define what window and views are present You can set the zoom factor that will be also recorded in the display context Click View point to Display contexts and click Define The Display Contexts dialog box opens ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 69 exar LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action Seaxpert IxBlue default New Context Close 3 On the Display Contexts dialog box click New Context and enter a name for the new Step
221. e is 30 minutes And define a perimeter starting from the ship and defined by its angular width value Figure 124 No danger detected Figure 125 Dangers detected Depth areas 152 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual 3 actions are required before using this option Step Action 1 Selecting the objects setting off alarms 2 Configuring the danger detection parameters 3 Activating the option 4 End of procedure To select the objects setting off an alarm Step Action 1 Inthe System menu click Settings Charts menu and then Objects Detection 2 Inthe Safety Options dialogue box select the Chart Objects Raising Alarms tab e Select the type of the objects to detect Natural and Man Made Features Specific Areas Restricted and Prohibited Areas in order to have access to the detailed list of the objects The type Dangerous Features lists all objects that are necessarily detected they are all default selected but you can unselect some or all by clicking on Unselect All button Safety Options Safety Contour and Background Colors Chart Objects Raising Alarms v Aidsto navigation v Dangerous Shore Features Dangerous Features Dangerous obstructions v Dangerous Wrecks v Floating or Fixed Structures Natural and Man Made Features Insufficient Depth v Insufficient Height v Land Areas Specific Areas v New or Unknown Objects v Offshore structures v Rapids and Wa
222. e motion control 1 4 1 ON OWN SHIP To centre on Own Ship do one of the following e Click the Centre on Own Ship line in the Display menu Centre on Own Ship F2 Orientation Relative motion Ctrl F2 Centre on Place Scale k Best Scale Ctrl F3 Window Zoom Zoom 10 Zoom F3 Zoom F4 Zoom 10 Charte k Colour Mode Ecdis Mode Hide All User Obj w True Vectors User Objects Groups k Figure 44 Display menu e Use the toolbars Figure 45 Default horizontal toolbar e Use the shortcuts for that see section 2 1 page 6 1 4 2 ON ANY MOBILE To centre on a mobile do one of the following e In mobile list see section IV 3 page 76 select the mobile and click Centre button ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 y IXSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual sage Track Start iS CFA TEPA 043 07 1 98 min 089 0 Few oo Stel o fer 3 02 39mi 229 7 2 60 lh2 179 0 5 34 7min Colour Position 51 02 898 NM 50 58 180 N 51 03 699 N SO S 7837 M S0 S5 S25 M 51 02 590 N 001 36 662 E 001 51 562 E 001 6 066 E 001 51 163 E 001 11 092 E O01 e 720E e k In mobile list see section IV 3 page 76 double click on the mobile This action is special not only because it will centre the screen but also add mobile services in the Object Watch window This case is particularly interesting to f
223. e other chart catalogue module In this module each chart is presented with the following identification parameters name scale datum name edition date picture To display the list of charts In the System menu select Settings menu Charts and check Charts Catalogue To centre the main view on a chart Step Action 1 In the list of charts click the cell you wish to centre on 2 Click Centre on 3 End of procedure V 1 3 FILTERING CHARTS Sorting out the list of available charts allows you to organize charts with a particular criterion But filtering the list allows you to display in the planisphere and the cell table some cells that correspond to one or several specific parameter s They are as follows e The type of charts ARCS ENC you can select all kinds of charts or one in particular e The type of usage Harbour Coastal Approach Berthing General you can select all kinds of usage or one in particular e he geographic area you can enter the points located in North East and South West or drag with the cursor the desired area with t f one of the selected points is inside a cell this cell will not be part of the selection e The route If you choose a route in the Route scrolling list the filtered list will consist of the cells or charts crossed out by this route a The Navigational Type and Usage criteria can be set at the same time contrary to Geographical Area and Route 124
224. ea Resettable made Min Max filter to reject out of range values Limit to map area Geographical restriction to see in distribution only the fishes contained in the 2D geographic area displayed in GECDIS Resettable mode to reset the distribution when clicking on Reset In Biomass Settings dialog box in Depth tab you can also select the depth range min max where biomass have to be displayed Biomass Settings Providers Obsolescence Depth Min depth 0 if not used Max depth 0 if not used Cancel Example Here 25 meters where choosen second image leading to mask the detections from O to 25 m below the ship Min depth 0 m Max depth 0 m Min depth 0 m Max depth 25 m Important IN SONAR VIEW YOU ALWAYS HAVE THE LATEST FISH DETECTIONS THE OLDEST ONE WILL NOT BE DISPLAYED IN OTHER VIEWS 2D 3D YOU HAVE THE OLDEST FISH POINTS DISPLAYED BUT YOU CAN MASK THEM OR CHANGE THEIR APPEARANCE IN THE SETTINGS BOX 270 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual XVIII SEAPIX MODULE XVIII 1 Introduction The SeapiX module offers the following functionalities Bathymetry and Hardness in 2D and 3D views Provides a User interface for iXBlue SeapiX sounder control Provides bathymetry data for bathymetry and 3D modules Provides hardness data for Sediment module Allows Record and Import Export of seabed databases bathymetry hardness Displays water colum
225. ea Fishing prohibited EE Ce le sche dA ol d trv prohibited F Ka 4 ez Pi l E EE EH caution area cargo transhipment area Figure 206 Chart 1 screen 8 324 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual C 8 Aids and Services P R S T U This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 AIDS AND SERVICES PRS T U and 5 52 Edition 3 4 P fights and recommended tracks A rA sA gx Sa 030 deg 090 deg 270 deg xu 270 deg geg Kess ev Nw R Fog signals A w A Ap D oui o Fi 3 G 12s Eis 5 radio radar 265 deg H bn ME 9 L Q o xt Reowes 12m 11M T services Pit Name FIR 35 c O vacht harbour marina Figure 207 Chart 1 screen 9 C 9 Buoys and Beacons Q This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 BUOYS AND BEACONS Q and 5 52 Edition 3 4 Buoys GL GO GO OO A A OO OM 4 EN LI A 41 o Loon n DD II SD UL P L 1658 amp 9 t d Y why ve Navigational system of marks no or other system Figure 208 Chart 1 screen 10 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 929 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES C 10 Topmarks Q This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 TOPMARKS Q and 5 52 Edition 3 4 Buoys Tapmarks Do D ho D Do An Bx An eM te tee Beacon Eopmarks ben 4 fe d i e gt lt om dine i Mee q o Ge D Figure 209 Chart 1 screen 11 C 11
226. eaXpert stream control module magnifying glass icon checks that binary data has been received XVIII 2 2 CONFIGURING SEAPIX MODULE XVIII 2 2 1 Step 1 Stream Configuration Step Action 1 Inthe SeapiX menu click Adanced Settings 2 Select the stream you have previously created in our example TCP1 SEAPIX The SeapiX mobile is automatically created once you have validated this step Refer to installator instructions for other settings IO Stream una E ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 273 C X 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual t DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action 3 End of procedure ANIL 222 Step 2 Installation Configuration Because installation parameters will be different according ship use other settings provided by your installator offsets etc XVIII 2 2 3 Step 3 Database Configuration Step Action 1 Inthe SeapiX menu click Settings and select the Databases tab 2 Check the Real time recording database option This enables to view the database while it is being recorded Refer to installator instructions for other settings Note It is also possible to display a base that has already been stored by checking it among the list displayed below the Real time recording database option E z 7 Settings e Databases Record Biomass Echogram Select seabed data to use v Recording Database Impart OK Cancel 3 End o
227. ed by iXBlue The user is able to connect with a security key provided by iXBlue for use on a single computer e you may couple multiple iXBlue licenses on a single computer e you may make up to two 2 copies of the software for archival or backup purposes provided that you reproduce proprietary notices e You shall not share by any means other than by agreement with iXBlue the software licenses between multiple computers e You shall not copy the software except as set forth in the section above Any copy of the software that you make must contain the same copyright and other proprietary notices that appear on or in the software e You shall not modify adapt or translate the software You shall not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to modify or discover the source code of the software e You shall not install neither operate the software on virtual machines e You shall not rent lease sublicense assign or transfer your rights in the software without prior written authorization from iXBlue The software including any images animations and text incorporated into the software is owned by iXBlue and protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions iXBlue offers software maintenance during the warranty period This maintenance includes the delivery of minor documentary and software licenses The major or intermediary updates are not included and shall be dealt with in a separate agreem
228. ee points which will open the Area Creation dialog box ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action y Se General List of points General List of points Cell BESANT WN 31 18 537 N 004 18 517 E De Object DI 51 18 537 N 004 18 517 E 51 18 186 N 004 18 390 E In Object name 51 18 176 M 004 18 844 E Dates From 02 09 2010 To 02 09 2010 amp l 3 Select the type of chart object you wish to create 4 You can enter a name and an annotation as well as a period of validity for the new object It is not compulsory to fill in those fields 9 If you wish to change the position of the points that have been inserted with the mouse click List of Points The locations of the mouse clicks are specified You can remove a point selecting it and then clicking the Delete button You can insert other points of the area by entering a position in the field in the upper part of the dialog box and then clicking Insert 6 Click Refresh view to display the area in real time with the deleted and inserted points 7 Click OK The new area is displayed Its borders are highlighted by small orange circles that specify the area has been created manually 8 End of procedure V 2 12 CHART PRESENTATION V 2 12 1 Simplified and Traditional Display You can also change the aspect of symbols to make the consultation of cells easier In
229. eiving data from HOs and supplying distributors agents and ECDIS users A RENC must be able to authenticate ENC data sets provided by HOs using the digital signature files decrypt the cell permit supplied with the data and then decrypt the data set so that data validation can be performed sign the data and then append its own signature It must also be able to create decrypt user permits and produce cell permits Rhumb line A line which crosses successive Meridians at a constant angle This route is represented by a straight line in the chart with the Mercator projection RM Relative Motion abbreviation RMC The sentence that defines the recommended GNSS minimum data time latitude longitude ground speed heading to steer and date This sentence is transmitted at most every two seconds Rolling The rotation of a ship about its fore and aft axis ROT The sentence that defines the rate of turn Route 1 The itinerary followed by a ship and relates two remote points possibly separated with intermediary waypoints Route 2 The heading of the leg of a route Route Monitoring The process that allows to follow a route oafety Contour The contour related to the own ship selected by the mariner to be used by ECDIS to distinguish the display between the safe and the unsafe water and for generating anti grounding alarms The depth contour associated with the vessel enabling a distinction to be made between the two col
230. ember 2014 IX SL UE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Step To delete all annotations Action Select the object in the chart Gecdis v8 User s Manual In the Object information window click Remove Annotations button A message displays notifying that all annotations are deleted The orange mark used to annotate an object on the chart is removed but the annotations are still displayed in the Object information see Figure 113 window End of procedure r3 Cell Signal group Radar wave length w Deleted Annotations Annotation Comment Author Created Deleted Annotation Comment Author Created Deleted Move object GB200000 Position 46 59 S03 H 005 23 985 W Buoy shape pillar Colour red white Colour pattern vertical stripes Fng signal Category of fog signal whistle Light Light characteristic long flashing Colour white Signal group 1 Signal period 10 Radar transponder beacon Category of radar transponder beacon racon radar transponder beacon B 0 03 X My first annotation Administrator 09 07 2013 15 38 30 09 07 2013 15 45 06 My second annotation Administ ator 09 07 2013 15 38 46 09 07 2013 15 45 06 Annotate object Mark as deleted Figure 113 Chart object with deleted annotations To move a punctual object Action Select the object in the chart In the Object information window
231. en select the folder into which you can find the charts you want to install If you want to install a CD insert it in the CD ROM drive and then select the unit that represents the CD ROM drive D in the above example Click OK Click Install CD Validate the message that warns you the install process will take several minutes The CD is installed in the Data folder from which you have chosen to load ARCS charts ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 167 C X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step d Step Action Once installed a message tells you the import process is over Click OK and then Close in the chart installation dialog box End of procedure To uninstall a CD Action In the Installed Disk s pane of the Chart Disks dialog box select a CD It is impossible to delete a CD whose charts have been loaded Click Uninstall CD The charts of the uninstalled CD are then removed from the ARCS folder in your hard drive ARCS module cannot work without any chart That s why it is not possible to delete a CD if there is only one CD in the chart database End of procedure V 3 2 3 Updating Charts 168 ARCS charts follow updating of notices to mariners Each week a new CD is produced with all new updates made on the charts since ARCS chart CDs have been edited for the last time The updates are cumulative i e the updates made by ARCS the last week are added in the same CD to the updates that have already
232. ent If the software supplied under license is an updated version the licensee will only be allowed to use the software in order to replace versions of the same software previously and duly acquired under license Extended Maintenance Agreements E M A may be purchased to extend the product maintenance after the warranty period An E M A shall be applied to every software license that will be maintained and upgraded ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 li X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Technical support Price Termination Out of court settlement choice of jurisdiction Technical support is available free of charge during the warranty period e On iXBlue website http www ixblue com contact ixblue support representative e By dedicated e mail box seaxpert support ixblue com e By hotline 33 1 30 08 97 11 available Monday to Friday 09 00 17 00 The price comprises the main product together with accessories grant of license and accrued expenses as referred to in the order contract or in the manufacturer or supplier price list The user license is considered to be granted when iXBlue acknowledges reception of the whole price paid by the Buyer Payment is made by means of a secure electronic payment system or by any other means authorized by iXBlue iXBlue will notify reception of payment by electronic mail In case of non payment and or non respect of the presen
233. ent times e From a single landmark at different times As the observations are performed at different times they are transferred in accordance with ship s kinematics The transfer starts from the reference position of the Own Ship from GPS or dead reckoned Once the bearings radar ranges performed it is possible to ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 Ke el X3L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES compute the position where the ship is more likely to be located this is the fixed point This point can then be used to reset dead reckoned positions Set EP VLA 23 USING PILOTING FIX Piloting fixes are often determined with several bearings the position of the Own Ship is deduced from bearings that have been made at different times The fixes move the same way as the Own Ship Figure 143 A fix after two bearings Figure 144 A fix after three bearings After two bearings a line is displayed in the main view You can either e Validate the point and put it in the main view Fix Point button e Validate the point to adjust the position of the ship on this point The ECDIS symbol with DR label will be displayed on the main view Set EP button e Not validate the point and keep it for a moment on the screen before deleting it All the operations are performed with the Piloting Fix dialog box This dialog box consists in two parts e the first one allows to make fixes that correspond to a bea
234. entre on refocus the screen on a Geographically cumulative distance a Cable cumulative distance not for pipeline Q A beginning or an end of segment linear case event or environment e Display hide all identical elements to those being asked e Hide SML unload memory e Remove SML see XX 2 2 8 e Shift SML see XX 2 2 9 e Export SML see XX 2 2 10 e Edit SML window properties Obj Ect In formati on Object Informati on SML TATSD3 SML TATSD3 A Properties WW Properties Segment Linear event Landing country n 1 Fr Geo length 218 356 km Landing country n Bu Slack 0 9 Cable ship vercors Cable length 216 493 km Laying date 12 11 1988 w Point 139 341 geng Starting date 30 11 1988 Comment D but inspection scarab Withdrawal date Date 13 03 1995 21 39 26 Initial length between stations 361 648 km Position 47745782 N 005 25 372 W Initial length between extremity Depth 126 m Repeater count G Burial Equalizer count PGL 1 05717 km Specific gear count CGL 84 8786 km Recovery operation Slack 0 7 Armoured length 324 km PCL 1 04947 km Buried length 189 km CCL 85 6164 km gt Cable Optical fira in Properties Shift Hide Delete Export Edit p Shift Delete i ERES daek E EER Hide Delete Date 07 06 1991 15 51 58 UERSUM Cable profile Position 4743386 N 008702859 W Depth 990 m Burial PGL 1 90246 km CGL 303 235 km Slack 4 336 PCL 1 98461 km CCL 302 109 km
235. enu click Settings and General configuration In the Configuration dialog box select the Datum tab In this tab you can see a short list of the main datum systems ED50 ETRS89 NAD27 NAD83 and WGS84 If you want to display all existing datums uncheck the Short List box You can sort the datums in alphabetical order by acronym name country and ID clicking the column headings Click your desired datum and click OK Configuration X Safety Synchronization User Interface Identification Format Display Time Datum Toolbar Users Alarms e v Short List Ac Name Country ID ED50 European 1950 MEAN FOR Austria Belgium Denm EURM ETRS83 European Terrestrial Reference Syst Global Definition EUT NAD2 North American 1927 MEAN FOR CONUS NASC NAD amp 3 North American 1983 CONUS NARC World Geodedic System 1884 Global Definition OK Cancel The acronym of the datum you have just selected is indicated in the main view title bar End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V All parameters datum are from the special publication of the IHO S 60 id name values 1 5 The Toolbar By default the toolbar contains several icons associated with major commands man over board zoom zoom centre on Own Ship but with Gecdis you are not limited only to these actions you can add any button representing the actions you use more frequently
236. er cma Figure 130 Managing the PIN Code l IF YOU DELETE OR MOVE THE ARCS FOLDER WHEN GECDIS IS CLOSED YOU WILL HAVE TO REPEAT THE FIRST LAUNCHING PROCEDURE OF THE ARCS MODULE ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 165 I X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 3 2 CHARTS V 3 2 1 The Chart Database All licensed charts are gathered within a chart database Information about those charts can be checked in the Chart Database dialog box Each chart of the database is associated with four pieces of information in four columns that it is possible to sort e he chart number e he name of the chart e he chart CD ROM from which the chart has been loaded e he edition date Each chart contains one or more panel s A panel is a chart or a chart part So when you select a chart on the left of the dialog box its associated panels are displayed on the upper right part If you select one of the panels associated information about this panel are displayed in the lower right part Information depends on the selected panel There might be two alternatives e Ifthe panel represents a whole chart the value of the Panel Number field is 0 e If the panel represents a part or an element of a chart the value of the Panel Number field is any number except O In that case several panels might be listed ranging from 1 to the number of parts of the chart e g 3 if the chart is divided into three part
237. ers Once the data is downloaded it is displayed exactly like in the original QuodFish However you may notice that some objects can be displayed with a different symbol or a different colour ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual To import a QuodFish user object folder Step Action 1 Inthe System menu click Import User objects and then QuodFish File 2 Click to browse the database or the folder with the user object s 3 Inthe Import area check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import the number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window 4 End of procedure VII 2 5 EXPORTING A USER OBJECT You can export your user objects to the database of one of the following systems e Gecdis e TurboWin SINCE DATA IS ENCRYPTED IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO USE IT ON OTHER SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS List of User Objects Marks 37 Display Hide 2X Delete Move Objects Export CH Marks 37 Position Comment Folder D Areas 4 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43 37 632 N 007 20 135 E AD Texts 1 poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43738316 N 007 22 059 E LE Tracks 383 poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 22 43737792 N 007721067 E amp j C9 Deleted Objects poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43738306 N 007721245 E poissons 19 04 2012 13 48 23 43737867 N 007721793 E E acm EE l Figure 157 User object select Export User Objects ax
238. etween two No runnings Periodic mobile backup Yes Limit information updates to every second Yes Automatically update Windows time No UTC Information can not go back in time No Serial Port Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Default Datum COM1 GPS 4800 No parity 8 1 W aso4 UDP Stream Port IP Output Input filter Default Datum NET1 UDP 1001 1001 W asSo4 TCP Stream Port Server Address State Default Datum TCP1 SSServeur 1001 192 168 16 53 Client W aso4 Figure 94 Input Output summary in Advanced mode Basic and advanced mode windows are similar They consist of three parts e he system general characteristics configuration of streams system information e All mobiles and their specific pieces of information Own Ship pieces of information are displayed first and they are highlighted in yellow e Fleets IV 6 7 2 Displaying Real Time Information 118 Real time information allows you to reproduce in the summary window the changes you have made into the Input Output amp Mobiles Configuration dialog box as soon as they are performed and the changes of values provoked by acquisition and computation The command is enabled when the corresponding button is pressed ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 KE LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Dr Step AS MANY CONTROLS ARE MADE TO UPDATE INFORMATION AND REPRODUCE WHAT HAS CHANGED THE REAL TIME BUTTON REDUCES THE PERFORMANCE OF YOUR MACHINE WE ADVISE YOU T
239. f a cell syntax is GB4X01NE where e GBisthe producer code e 4 is the navigational purpose overview general coastal approach harbour or berthing In the present example 4 defines the coastal navigational purpose e XOIJNE is the area described by the cell Edition the cell s edition and update ENC s creation 1 is assigned as a value for this field Each time a cell is edited the edition number increases by 1 Usage navigational purpose for which ENC data has been compiled by the IHO Scale scale in which the chart objects have been compiled When the information is displayed at a larger scale than that contained in the ENC the indication Overscale displays Issue Date date of publication and availability of a cell Application date date to which the update becomes available Center on Cell To centre the chart area on the cell you have selected in the list See section V 2 7 Import Commercial To import encrypted ENC cells See section V 2 3 1 Exchange Set Import Catalogue To import non encrypted ENC cells Importing a Catalog of non Encrypted ENC Cells Import Cells To select 1 file 1 cell or one directory of several cells See section V 2 3 3 Reset Database Delete all the cells The database is thus moved to recycle bin See section V 2 6 History Reports the actions done on the cells 2 points of view e Cell by cell Charts tab e Operation by operation Operations tab Enables to download a
240. f objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window End of procedure Step To import several TurboWin Turbo2000 user objects folders Action In the System menu click Import User objects and then Multiple Turbo2000 Directories Click to browse the database or the folder with the user object s In the Import area check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import the number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window End of procedure VII 2 4 2 Gecdis Import Step You can import user data provided by another Gecdis application It can be marks areas routes and tracks with or without parameters Once the data is downloaded it is displayed exactly like in the original Gecdis position of the objects parameters related to each object their colour To import a Gecdis user object folder Action Inthe System menu click Import User objects and then Gecdis database Click to browse the database or the folder with the user object s In the Import area check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import the number of objects to be imported displays in the low part of the window End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 191 DX LL Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 2 4 3 Turbo Tactic Import Step You can import user data provided by another Gecdis application
241. f procedure XVIII 2 2 4 Step 4 Check SeapiX Mobile Availability Step Action 1 Inthe menu System select Settings UO and Mobile and then click Input Output amp Mobile Configuration A SeapiX mobile must be displayed mobile was automatically created after Step 1 Information about the mobile must not be modified it is either external or software The red exclamation mark indicates that data has not been received yet 274 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action 2 n Mobile menu click Open Mobiles List 3 To make the SeapiX mobile the main mobile so that the screen is centred on the SeapiX mobile select the SeapiX mobile and click Own Ship E Mobiles List 3 O O e Note To avoid multiple mobiles in cartographic view you can hide the already defined mobiles and keep only the SeapiX one For that just select the mobile s to hide and press Hide button i e My Ship hidden below 4 End of procedure ANIL 2 3 CONFIGURING BATHYMETRY AND SEDIMENT MODULES XVIII 2 3 1 Bathymetry Module In Gecdis toolbar select the Bathy menu and click Bathy data e Check SeapiX as the bathy data source e n order to have a realistic display of data in 2D and 3D we suggest you to choose a limit of interpolation of 10m Bathy Data Check modules and or databases your want to include to generate surface 5oundings from main view charts Marks Database B
242. f the seabed in which depth is deep compared with the surrounding points With Gecdis deep contour is represented in grey and waters whose depth is superior to it are in white Equals to deep waters An isobath connecting points of equal water depth which is sometimes significantly displaced outside of soundings symbols and other chart detail for clarity as well as generalization Depth contours therefore often represent an approximate location of the line of equal depth as related to the surveyed line delineated on the source Deep Soundings Soundings whose values are superior to the safety depth Deeper water contour The area of the sea bottom that is deeper than the surrounding parts The deeper water contour area is shown in grey and deeper water in white The latter are particularly deep waters Depth Vertical distance between the surface of the sea and the seabed counted with positive figures to the bottom Depth is the sum between charted depth and height of tide Depth contour A line linking points that are at the same depth in the water column Depth soundings Soundings deeper than the safety depth Display Base The level of SENC information that cannot be removed from the display consisting of information that is required at all times in all geographic areas and all circumstances It is not intended to be sufficient for safe navigation Display Context opecific properties of software s configurati
243. f this field if you want to send an alarm when a mobile which is not the Own Ship crosses the area e Click Any Mobile if you want to send an alarm whenever a mobile crosses the zone 8 Check Enters and or Is Leaving if you want to send an alarm when the mobile enters and or leaves the area ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 217 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step VII 7 Step i 2 9 218 Action Click the Points List tab You can insert or delete a point in this tab When finished click OK End of procedure Circles and Sectors The circle functionality enables to insert circular type areas Alarms can be assigned to a circle they are generated whenever a mobile enters or leaves the circle The sector crowns functionality enables to insert operation areas This functionality enables to create four types of objects e Acrown e Asector e Acircle e Asector of circle The creation of a sector is performed in 4 steps e Step 1 Selecting the centre of the sector e Step 2 Defining the exterior radius of the sector e Step 3 Defining the first and last angles of the sector e Step 4 Defining the radius range Centre of the Sector First Angle External Radius Internal Radius Last Angle Figure 172 Example of a Sector To create a sector Action Click the User Objects menu and Create Sector then click the location in the main view in which you wi
244. ffic services port operations plot services radiobeacons Tide Tables Tidal Stream Atlases The Mariner s Handbook general information 5011 symbols and abbreviations etc ENSURE CHARTS AND PUBLICATIONS ARE KEPT CORRECTED WreckslObstructions Fouls Mavaids Currents Routeing Traffic Separation Regulations Military Areas Traffic Separation 2 do not display Military Areas 2 Vessel Traffic Services 172 Figure 138 Consulting ARCS Marnier s Notes ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual To consult chart mariner s notes Step Action 1 Click the Display menu select Chart Informations and then click Mariner s Notes The ARCS Notes window is displayed 2 If you click Notes the list of mariner s notes is displayed When you select a mariner s note a checkmark is displayed in front of its mention Vertical Datums A Maritime Buoyage System Region A v TALA Region Sources Tidal Levels Miscellaneous Regulations Marina Facilities Fishing Installations Mavaids Source Diagram Seabed Installations Miscellaneous 10 10 10 3 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 173 X L LJ v Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VI NAVIGATION VI 1 Bearing Lines and Bearing Range Lines You can make the bearing of an object a seamark or more generally a position That way
245. ges whatsoever including without limitation damages for loss of business profits business interruption loss of business information or any other pecuniary loss arising out of the use of or inability to use this iXBlue product even if iXBlue has been advised of the possibility of such damages This application program is only to be used in order to help optimize fishing and shall not exempt the skipper of his responsibilities in terms of navigation security and respect for law enforcement iXBlue will not replace lost dongles free of charge neither offer discounted pricing terms for replacement dongles iXBlue strongly recommends that you insure your iXBlue products against loss theft or damage where applicable iXBlue will propose the replacement of damaged dongles only for a limited fee provided that the damaged dongle units are returned to iXBlue All shipping and insurance costs are paid for by the buyer M 038G EN September 2014 V Se xXSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Text Usage Bold Bold text is used for items you must select or click in the software It is also used for the field names used into the dialog box Courier Text in this font denotes text or characters that you should enter from the keyboard the proper names of disk Drives paths directories programs functions filenames and extensions Italic Italic text is the result of an action in the p
246. go corresponding to WOD and Own Ship SOG e WOT UTC date and time of arrival to wheel over line according UTC SOG and WOD e Final ETA The estimated time UTC of arrival to the last waypoint of the route TO name WO02 WOD 1153 m TO NEXT course 262 3 WOTTG 37min 33s NEXT name WO WOT 08 53 45 Heading to steer 201 7 Final ETA 09 29 39 XTE lt lt 526 4 m 11 07 2013 Figure 165 Pilot View ISD M 038G EN September 2014 203 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 3 8 Step 1 2 gt 204 AUTOPILOT CONTROL The autopilot control allows you to select the type of autopilot to use and the sentences to transmit There are four autopilot modes e Manual this mode which is selected by default allows you to start the autopilot manually or end one of the other modes This implies that Gecdis sends no command to the pilot e Steering course allows you to follow a continuous heading When this mode is enabled a route is displayed with the entered heading and the Pilot view is displayed with COW and Heading to steer information e Track Keeping launches the route monitoring mode If the Ship is outside the lane of the planned route the Pilot view is displayed with the information concerning the first waypoint of the route If the Ship is inside the lane information about the next waypoint of the route is displayed e Pilot to one Waypoint allows creating a one legged temporary
247. gs and General configuration 2 Inthe Configuration dialog box select the Identification tab 3 End of procedure IK Display The Display tab allows you to configure the main display properties color modes motion control and screen size To access the Display tab 1 Inthe System menu click Settings and General configuration 2 Inthe Configuration dialog box select the Display tab ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 29 C X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual P INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Configuration X Safety Synchronization User Interface Identification Format Display Time Datum Toolbar Users Alarms Motion Control Screen size course over ground Size 531mm x 299mm Centered true motion area ratio 755 e DPI 88x 88 1520 x 1060 ECDIS Calibrated display None m Automatic multi monitors Display ID 0 254 C Fixed size Width mm 4 4 COM Port Height mm 296 Non ECDIS Colour Modes White background in dusk mode OK Cancel 3 End of procedure 11 2 1 SCREEN SIZE Important IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU CONFIGURE THE EXACT DIMENSIONS OF YOUR SCREEN IF YOU DO NOT CONFIGURE THEM THE MAIN VIEW AND ALL OF ITS ELEMENTS MAY BE DISPROPORTIONATE Two possibilities to adjust the screen size e Automatic in this case the screens dimensions are determined automatically based on the placement of windows on the screens This is the most accur
248. hange is made on a station this station update a copy of the data on a network shared folder localized on a server The other stations check changes done on the shared folder and if needed automatically duplicate changes in its own data ISD M 038G EN September 2014 43 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Data L GecdisData w Copy to the server Synchronization Local Update Figure 33 Synchronization centralized mode e Data folder sharing When distributed mode is selected each station must share its local data folder The sharing is automatically done when this mode is selected The default name of the sharing is GecdisShare If this sharing name is already used for another folder the name is modified 9 times until an available name has been found GecdisShare1 to GecdisShare9 When centralized mode is selected there is no need to share the data folder on each station The network shared folder must be manually shared with read and write rights x Figure 34 Synchronizing data 44 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 Step qiyeyiyt i Gecdis v8 User s Manual To configure synchronization Action Click the System menu Settings General Configuration and then the Synchronization tab Select the mode of synchronization In distributed mode select the shared folders on the other stations and click the check box In
249. he desired IP address 4 To receive sentences enter in the first Port field the Port field number of the Transmission group of the machine that sends you sentences 9 To transmit sentences check Port in Transmission and then enter the number of the Port field of the machine that receives sentences Whenever you specify a number for the output port the NMEA output branch is added to NET1 and allows you to configure the sentences to be transmitted see section IV 6 2 5 page 107 6 Optionally check the IP box If you enter the IP address of the machine that receives sentences data is directly sent to a single machine If not transmission is in broadcast 102 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 4 C x 2L LIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action mode 7 Inthe case that several machines transmit data on the same port but you do not want to receive sentences that come from each of them filter the sentences doing one of the following step or both in the Input filter group zone e To receive the sentences that are transmitted on a single port check the Port box and then enter the appropriate port number e To receive the sentences that come from a single IP address check the IP box and then enter the machine s IP address to learn more about finding the IP address of a machine see Finding the IP Address of a Machine 8 Optionally fill in the Comment field The comment ts d
250. he display unit is long you can reduce the waiting period entering a value in this box Check the radar image to see if it is necessary to give a correction If the straight lines are not straight you must enter a correction Make some tries before finding the best correction Option Auto set Gain Rain Sea Tune Auto Tune on range changing if the box is selected the settings of Gain Rain Sea are automatic e Parameters of the Radar antenna position tab 224 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Figure 175 NetRadar settings Radar antenna position tab Own Ship This radio button indicates that the radar antenna is aboard the own ship and thus moving with it Lp Longitudinal distance between the conning position and the antenna Value must be negative if the antenna is located backwards the conning position Transverse distance between the conning position and the antenna Value must be negative if the antenna is located on the left of the conning position Heading Offset Correction of the antenna heading Value is in degree from 179 to 180 This radio button indicates that the radar antenna is at a fixed location that di must be specified in the position field ou using button You must also enter the heading of the radar ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 225 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSE
251. he height between bridge and keel of your ship height D Extreme draught The maximum value you can assign to your ship s draught If draught is superior to the one specified an alarm is generated ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 79 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 2 3 NAVIGATION PARAMETERS The Navigation tab changes some of the routes parameters Sizes Heights Mavigation 3D Model AIS Turn radius 100 00 m Economic speed Maximum speed 40 00 kn M asimium SIE 1000 0 m Safety Distance 1500 0 m More Close Figure 66 Own Ship s navigation parameters Turn radius The radius of the Own Ship when it turns while in route monitoring Economic speed The default speed of the Own Ship for each leg of a route Maximum Speed The maximum speed that cannot be exceeded in route planning matters Maximum XTE The maximum error that defaults on the legs of a route gei Explanatory and cinematic pieces of information about the Own ship are available and Mes can be observed in a resizable HIT ML typed window For this click More button Normally information comes from the ship s RPC Registre de pr paration au combat register of preparation to fighting It is Summed up in the ixmNIXMIoMobileNOwnship html file IV 3 The Mobiles List The mobiles list displays the list of all mobiles and fleets and allows you to manage them The corresponding dialog box consists
252. hlighted esses esee 202 VII 3 6 Switching in Route Monitoring elsseeeeeseeeseeeeeeennnnenn nennen 202 WIGS The Plot 203 VII 3 8 Autopilot Control 204 VIL39 Thechan el i emm 206 Ne eI IS MIC EE 207 VII 3 11 Importing Exporting Routes esses 207 VRA TRACK e 209 VAT otaning Stoppno aA Track iersinii e a edule a a eae 209 VII 4 2 Track Templates E 209 VILAS Track eeler 210 VII 4 4 Displaying the Track Profile esses 211 VII 4 5 Changing the Track Properties A 212 VII S MARKS AND EVENTS eun caudae cuc daa tionum E rp denm B cU eu RUc uec inan Ru irc nnen n cx CUu E Gunn enu 212 VII 5 1 Creating Marke nennen nennen mnn nnne nnne nnns r nnns na nnn nnn 212 VII 5 2 Configuring Mark Display Options nnn 215 142 010 7 Come ee M 216 VILZ CIRCLES AND SECTORS surisrirndsdnuei nni tuu S aos uir xEc C sue Susi n inim UL Eos acu V ndeU Use EdiE 218 VOTE lt c 219 VIII THE RADAR MODULE 4 1 eren urn KE KEE KE KE KEREN KREE KKK EN 221 VIII 1 CONFIGURING THE RADAR SOURCE EN 221 VIIL2 TURNING THE RADAR el el 221 VIII 3 CONFIGURING INFORMATION OF THE RADAR SOURCE scsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceeeesseeeeeeees 222 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 2LL LI Gecdis v8 Use
253. hore a Medium blue the zone between 0 and shallow contour D Light blue the zone between shallow contour and safety contour Q Pale blue the zone between safety contour and deep contour Safety contour Contour above which the ship cannot navigate safely This value is fixed by the navigator according to the characteristics of the ship The line appears in black and its width is superior to the other ones If the value the navigator has entered does not correspond to any available contour the safety contour will be the first deeper contour The value depends on the ship s features On the other hand the display of the line depends on the available safety contours Safety height 2 ee cae Shallow contour Safety contour Safety depth a ms sek Deep contour Safe chart scale Default Values Figure 121 Safety contour Safety Depth All depths strictly superior to the value of this field are displayed in grey The depths that are inferior or equal to the value are displayed in black 150 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Figure 122 Safety depth Shallow Contour Represents the shallow waters value in medium blue Figure 123 Shallow contour Deep Contour Represents the deep waters value in white and pale blue ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 131 C X E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES i
254. hted Click the Past track tab This tab operates in the same hierarchical way as the other tabs Track Symbol Label Pasttrack vectors Miscellaneous v iisible v SCAMIN v ECDIS representation 100000 Duration min b Time tag rate min 1 OK Cancel Apply Check Visible if you want the past track of the default mobile to be visible e f you have not checked Visible you will not be able to see the mobile past track e f you have checked Visible Select ECDIS representation or not depending on whether you want the display of your mobiles to follow or not the ECDIS standard representation e f you have checked ECDIS representation the past track will be represented in black e f you have not checked ECDIS representation the past track will be represented in grey Configure the Duration min field to indicate the time represented in the past track and Time tag rate min field to indicate the interval between two time tags If you check the Long time tags box hour minutes are displayed for each tag whereas if you uncheck this box only minutes are displayed In the above dialog box the past track will have a new tag each minute during 15 minutes The time will be indicated with minutes and hours Click the Vectors tab and check the Visible box depending on whether you want to display or not the vectors and the headline ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X3LU Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSI
255. ick the Charts menu and then Show Updates A mark is displayed in front of the submenu showing you that the option is enabled To install an update CD Action Follow the same procedure as the chart CD installation by clicking System menu selecting Import Charts and then Chart Disks clicking the browse button zt and then selecting in the explorer the update CD Click Install CD The CD is installed on your hard drive in the DATA folder you have created to load ARCS charts It is also added to the list of disks in the Installed Disk s pane End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 169 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 3 2 4 Using ARCS Charts You can display several resolutions for the same main view You can decide e To choose on your own your desired chart resolutions The and ba icons of the toolbar allow you to skip between these charts e f the E998 icon is enabled you can display a chart with an even better resolution Likewise if is enabled you can display a chart with an inferior resolution e To display automatically the chart with the best resolution When charts with several resolutions are available for the centre of the screen the chart with the higher resolution is automatically loaded To select this option click the Display menu select Charts Chart Display Mode and then click Automatic Loading In addition as ARCS chart are raster typed
256. ide Appearance Configuration Bearing Range Line Start Track Figure 17 Object information window Those buttons are not identical they depend on the selected object For example a route will be the only object with an available button called Planned Route this button allows to select the route as the one to be monitored List windows The list windows e g list of user objects allow you to manage lists that are sorted out in a hierarchical way Generally they consist of e A menu bar above e Atree that gathers all the folders of the lists on the left e he contents of the element which is selected in the tree The contents of these kinds of windows are more likely to fit across widthways That is why they default below in the screen 1 3 1 8 Information about Chart Cell Information about the chart and or the cell can be found in the bottom right side of the screen Erem e Click on this area to display the whole message e Click again to close the whole message 1 3 1 9 Pop up Menus A pop up menu is a menu that appears on the screen when you right click and whose options correspond to the current clicked object When you right click the main view on empty area a pop up menu displays this menu includes some commands such as the ability to change user Other pop up menus can be displayed depending on the part of the screen in which you have clicked e g in the Channel window or circumstances right
257. ientation menu e Use the shortcuts for that see section 1 2 1 page 6 IL 3 Alarms Alarms are used to draw the user s attention to an abnormal modification in the system status and or its content Alarms aim at alerting you when e The system has been altered e Data have been modified e Information has been taken into account All alarms are gathered into three main categories depending on their effect on the use of the software General information e g when Gecdis starts amp Warnings e g when no Own Ship is defined e Errors This kind of message is displayed when a malfunction has occurred e g if an error has occurred on a communication port These alarms can be displayed e Inthe Alarm window e Inthe black box 1 5 1 THE ALARM WINDOW The alarm window is resizable and it is located by default above the screen You can see this window as the first alarm is displayed the last received alarm is constantly displayed This alarm blinks as long as the user has not clicked above 15 07 01 Input Output TCP1 error ML al Li Fa List of alarms 15 06 44 Route Monitoring The heading gap with the P e 7 bi ig 15 06 42 4 Track Keeping Autopilot in manual mode Button that allows EUIS you to check all E alarms 15 06 44 A Route Monitoring The heading gap with th V ACK KA H ay d Alarm counts The last warning Button that allows you to check one alarm Figure 54 The Alarm W
258. indow EI See section II 6 page 37 for further information on how to configure the alarms to be displayed in this window ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 63 C X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To check the last alarm Step Action 1 Click ACK button in the status bar or press F11 shortcut see section 1 2 1 page 6 2 Dothe same thing as many times as there are alarms Warning messages are the first messages to be removed error messages are the second ones and information message are the last ones 3 End of procedure To check all alarms at the same time Step Action 1 Click the window that displays the last alarm 2 Click on Check All Alarms button 3 End of procedure 11 5 2 THE BLACK Box 1 5 2 1 Overview The black box is a database that stores all alarms and other events for informative use As it offers a history of the software use it will mainly be used to analyze its behavior if a problem occurs Z Black Box 284 69749 Type Ge Date Receipt Date Id Source Title Text User a Information Mo 01 07 2013 15 18 00 40008 IrxMIomabile Own Ship Blue DR 50 59 a28 N 001925394 E zw sa4 vali Administrator Information Mo i 07 2013 15 17 00 40008 IxMIoMabile Own Ship Blue DR 50 59 912 M 001925384 E lt WiGsed gt vali Administrator Information Mo ij zf2013 15 16 00 40008 IXMIoMabile Own Ship Blue DR 50 S9 896 N 01 25 394 E zW aS
259. ing to launch the recording of bathymetry data Archive Current Record to record all acquired bathymetry data in one database Empty Current Record to delete all acquired points Be careful the operation is irreversible Display Points to display points acquired during a recording operation Select Points to select bathymetry measuring points acquired during the recording operation Delete Selected Points once selected you can delete these points This option is very useful to delete absurd values Configuration to select the data to display There are two types of data data acquired in real time and data saved in a database ISD M 038G EN September 2014 29 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To start recording bathymetry data Step Action 1 Inthe Bathy menu select Bathy database EE d Recording Display Points select Points Configuration 2 You can select the data provider in the Source menu 3 To start recording click Recording The recording process starts immediately To stop the recording process check again Recording This unchecks the option e Once your recording is done save it with the Archive Current Record button e f you are not satisfied by the record you can delete it by clicking the Empty Current Record button 4 End of procedure To modify the record i e deleting some of the acquired points Step Action 1 Inthe Bathy menu
260. ing o em urc Z ER ARPA Range d Filter 1 7 ER ARPA Marker ET wolf Ant Band type B File type 4 k Add Delete Close Figure 82 Configuring File Stream ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 105 IX SL UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual t DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step To add and configure a FILE stream Action In System menu click Settings I O and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens On the nput Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box click Add Stream and then FILE FILE1 is then added to the list of streams in the left hand list of this dialog box On the Folder field of the File Stream tab the access path that will receive and read the positioning files is indicated The folder defaults to Gecdis Data Receiving Optionally change it clicking the Browse button browsing to your desired folder and clicking OK The folder you will specify must exist if not first create it in your explorer and be empty Optionally specify a comment in the Comment zone The comment you may have entered is displayed into brackets opposite to the name of the file in the left hand list Optionally scroll the File type list and select a file type Click Apply End of procedure IV 6 2 4 Spying Input and Output Data 106 Spying consists in saving in a file input and or output data in order to check its contents The files will be saved in the
261. ing or not the Backup only settings option box If you select settings data the duration of the backup can be long 3 Click cm button to select the directory to save the backup file The backup file will be saved in the folder you have selected The backup file name will be GecdisBack yyyymmdd hhmmss gbk where yyymmdd means year month day and hhmmss means hour minute second 4 End of procedure To restore a backup Step Action 1 Inthe System menu select Restore a backup and select the backup file to be restored 2 Click Open Once a backup file is selected to be restored Gecdis stops after you have confirmed you agree to exit the program The selected backup file will be automatically restored on the next Gecdis start 3 End of procedure 1 5 What to Do Before Departure The following describes some operations you should do before your departure and where you could find information about them in this manual ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 23 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 5 1 1 5 1 1 1 5 1 2 1 5 2 1 5 2 1 1 5 2 2 1 5 2 3 1 5 2 4 24 CUSTOMIZING Configuring your Screen Size Configuring your screen size is a very important step If it is not correctly configured objects of the main view may be disproportionate see section II 2 1 page 30 to configure your screen size Customizing Gecdis Screen You can customize some parts of the Gecdis
262. ion page 2 1174 5 3 2 x Hequested screen page 2 6 oe Readability g ES 62288 4 3 2 1 7 3 1 7 5 1 Screen size page 30 61174 5 8 5 6 7 3 2b Visibility at night Visibility at night page 55 Cont 61174 6 9 4b Twelve hour log wong uie elspay orte Se 2 of the Glossary page 311 Presentation library page 321 62288 4 10 4 5 1a Terms abbreviations symbols Mobile representation page 87 Vector representation page 72 Route representation page 200 Publications TI mme rm o mose o mw Woss o o J o oo 320 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C IX LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual C THE PRESENTATION LIBRARY CHART 1 C 1 Information about the Chart Display A B This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 INFORMATION ABOUT THE CHART DISPLAY 4 6 BEE NON EN Data an Display Over scale part of a Display EN DATA Figure 199 Chart 1 screen 1 This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 INFORMATION ABOUT THE CHART DISPLAY 4 6 and 5 52 Edition 3 4 Test symbol For size checking Test symbol Far calor checking Manual update deleted F e oe d No symbol exists in the symbol library Default symbol For WEWOBI Figure 200 Chart 1 screen 2 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 32 XBLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES C 2 Natural and Man Made Features C D E This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 NATURAL AND MAN MADE FEATURES C D E EE
263. ional Display 145 V 2 12 2 Detail Level of Chart ODieche annee nnns A nnn nsns nnns aaa nnn nnns 146 V 2 12 3 The Presentation Library eiiis sese ie esee seen nn nnne nn ann n ash a ash annua asas saa sanas a a aaa 148 e OCCU ee E 149 V 2 13 Danger Detection or Anti Grounding ccccccccsesececeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeaeeeessaeeeessaaeess 152 V 2 14 Consulting Information on an Object cc ceeeeceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeessaeeseeeeeeeeseaas 155 V 2 14 1 Consulting Information on a Cell 156 V 2 15 Universal Polar Stereographic Hroiechon 157 V 3 ARGS GCHAR TO ainn 162 V 3 1 PERG SOV UMEN 162 V 3 1 1 PTO CIO OU 162 V 3 1 2 Registering ARCS Charte 162 V 3 1 3 eelere EE 163 V 3 2 SI E 166 V 3 2 1 Ijg 1 7208 70 166 V 3 2 2 Installing Uninstalling Charts sees esses essen rne 167 V 3 2 3 upaalng e E 168 V 3 2 4 JSO ARCS e E 170 V 3 3 Consulting Information about Charts cccccccccsseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseeeeesaeeseeeeesaeeeeess 170 V 3 3 1 Chart Ee ee 170 V 3 3 2 Mariner s INO OS m 172 VI NAVIGATION E 174 VI 1 BEARING LINES AND BEARING RANGE LINES eee e eeeeeeee nennen enun nnne EEN 174 RE GLEARING LINES sec
264. is v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 5 2 1 Own Ship True scaled outline True scaled precise outline Sample Secondary positioning true scaled precise outline sample ECDIS simplified symbol when the outline is too small ECDIS simplified symbol with heading and beam lines ECDIS Secondary positioning simplified symbol with heading and beam lines ECS simplified symbol when the outline is too small IV 5 2 2 AIS and ARPA Mobiles Some mobiles are different from the others by their appearance and or function This is the case for the AIS and ARPA mobiles The AIS is an automated message exchange system between ships With it neighbour ships can have information on their journey Ke A mobile is considered as an AIS whenever it is associated with the MMSI piece of QJ information The difference in the representation between ECDIS and ECS mode only play on color Whatever the method a dangerous mobile will always drawn in red IV 5 2 3 ARPA symbols ECDIS C ARPA target To be followed query LE 88 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X aLLIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES ECDIS T3 T3 i IV 5 2 4 AIS symbols ECDIS ECS mode Dangerous X ES ES Mobile type AIS target Sleeping AIS target Lost sleeping X Sleeping with neither reported heading nor AIS target COG AlS target Activated AIS target Lost activated Ac
265. isplayed into brackets in the left hand list after the name of the network stream E 9 If you click input and output data of the remote machine is displayed For more details about this window please see section IV 6 2 1 page 100 10 Click Apply 11 End of procedure IV 6 2 2 2 The TCP Stream TCP is a protocol that allows you to connect a transmitter and a receiver This is a direct connection between two machines So the sentences that will be sent to several machines will have to be sent once for each machine The advantage of this protocol is that data is completely transmitted if data is missing or erroneous messages are transmitted once again TCP is then used if it is important to receive data To implement TCP you should enter a stream number Port field on which the server and the clients will be connected and exchange data and optionally the IP or the server s name Server Address field for client machines for the server this field must be empty EN System 4 TCP Stream Input Parameters Spying d COMI GPS SS NETI UDP TCP1 Comment SSServeur Es NN ER Input datum Pen on 0 E NMEA output eo XML output EZ File Emission r server Address 192 168 16 53 PR E uc E lf ARPA Ranae 4 Add Delete Close Figure 78 TCP stream client configured with an IP address ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 103 Step 104 IXSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual
266. ited Warranty Warranty service is F O B iXBlue France All shipping and insurance costs to iXBlue are paid for by the buyer shipping and insurance costs returning to the buyer will be paid for by iXBlue On site Customer Service and Warranty Repair may be provided by iXBlue at its own discretion Travel and accommodation including travel hours transportation lodging and meals will be charged by iXBlue to the Buyer at cost plus ten 10 per cent However actual labor hours to provide this service or repair will be free of charge to the Buyer This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the software or hardware has resulted from accident abuse or misapplication Any replacement software or hardware will be guaranteed for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty 30 days whichever is longer iXBlue makes no other warranties than the above limited warranties iXBlue makes no warranties expressed implied statutory or in any communication with you and iXBlue specifically disclaims any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose iXBlue does not warrant that the operation of the program will be uninterrupted or error free The buyer agrees that the responsibility without tort liability or the responsibility related to the warranty shall not exceed the price paid for the acquisition of the product To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law in no event shall iXBlue be liable for any dama
267. jects Open Objects List Define Objects Filter Start Campaign Set Current Folder Seleck and Do Create Mark Create Mark with Cursor Define Mark Define Event Create Predefined Mark k My type Create Predefined Event Create Area Create Line Create Spline Create Circle Create Sector Create Text 6 To insert the mark click the name of this template and insert it clicking wherever in the main view The mark is automatically selected You can then use the context sensitive buttons to manage it 7 End of procedure VII 5 2 CONFIGURING MARK DISPLAY OPTIONS By default when you insert a mark only its symbol is displayed You may want to display other elements like its depth Comments v Display comments vw Outline comments Hide symbol if a comment is set Depths v Display depths v Outline depths v Hide symbol if a depth is set Use large mark symbols OK Cancel Apply BE Figure 170 Mark display options dialog To configure the mark display options Step Action 1 Click Systems Settings User Objects and Mark Display Options 2 Inthe Comments area of the Mark Display Options dialog box do one of the following e Check the Display comments box if you want to display comments you may have ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 219 X LL E Gecdis v8 User s Manual t DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action entered while creating a m
268. k properly with Gecdis IIl 1 The Scales Gecdis gives you the possibility to change the scale of the main view which default ranges from 1 100 to 1 100 000 000 This range may change depending on the chart module Important IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU CONFIGURE THE EXACT DIMENSIONS OF YOUR SCREEN SEE 11 2 1 PAGE 30 IF YOU DO NOT CONFIGURE THEM THE MAIN VIEW AND ALL OF ITS ELEMENTS MAY BE DISPROPORTIONATE AND THE SCALE WILL NOT BE ACCURATE You can either change progressively the scale or assign directly a new scale 1 100 Best Scale Ckrl F3 1 250 Window Zoom 1 500 Zoom x10 1 750 Zoom F3 1 1000 zoom F4 1 1500 Zoom 10 12 500 1 5000 1 7500 1 10 000 1 15 000 1 25 000 1 50000 1 75 000 1 100 000 e 1 150000 11250000 1500000 1 750 000 1 1000 000 1 1 500 000 1 2 500 000 15 000 000 1 7 500000 1 10000 000 1 25 000 000 1 50 000 000 1 75 000 000 17100000 000 Figure 42 Default scales menu To change the scale you can e Use the Scale menu from Display menu directly to select the scale e Use the Display menu with scale command Q Best scale selects the most appropriate scale for the current chart QO Window Zoom focuses the view on a rectangle around the cursor equals to holding a left click holding the Shift key When the rectangle is visible you can change its size with the and keys Q Zoom x10 multiplies the display by ten 04 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 x LU
269. kA LA H A axis F2 00 GA OO Dm OD OO OD OD OO CO CO CO I oO UW CH A A OO Jon 01 VG GA hr 0o 000 1001 GA Po ES Ny VO N O N N N e A N N Aa W o d g OW UO N O1 O JO U On O OO C OO 01D CO OO CO D Om Oo CO OO OO On GA On JC NO J w OO k JO OO OO OO Ji OO i JO hN DECK 50 pts maxi P m A GA LA OO BD GA CH 1 3 OP POO C CO A OWA GV BONE k VO OO JO OU VG GA hr 000 Jo 0 VG GA PO S CO k MM XO XO XO XO CO CO C XO XO XO ONE CH Y ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 9 7 C be L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Index POTS eege 177 A gcc 73 97 Colour mode acquisition timeout ENEE 113 114 RS NNI m 55 Active windOW cesses nennen nnne nnne nnns 47 configuration cessere 30 adding COM port 100 piece Of information ooonnnesseenesseenessreresssreressreresse 112 adding and Confieurtng eee 101 UDP stream een 103 compilation scale oo eeeeseeceecesscescsececeesescesseeceaeeaeeaeeaeeees 312 Adding a COM DOM dE 101 Configuration adding a user 38 miscellaneous tab 43 Adding information to a mobile esses 111 CN dE 39 air CANE EN 98 configuring AIS ENER NS 88 UDP stream sessu uud 103 PRES RUE 110 Configuring a COM port 101 Alarm WIDOOMW s ccec c peni e
270. l Datum Depth Unit Height Unit Figure 137 General Information on ARCS Charts 2 Any systematic arrangement of Meridians and Parallels portraying the curved surface of the sphere of spheroid upon a plane Each panel is assigned a projection Projections are as follows e Mercator e Polar Stereographic e Transverse Mercator The scale of the panel that is currently displayed on the screen A specific scale is assigned to each panel depending on information and details to be displayed ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 171 IXSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Rotation Ellipsoid Name Horizontal Datum Depth Datum Vertical Datum Depth Unit Height Unit Gecdis v8 User s Manual Rotation of the panel if north in the chart is not oriented to the upper part of the screen This value makes it possible to display the north arrow in the same direction as north in the chart omooth mathematical representation of the geoid Many reference ellipsoids have been developed to adequately represent the surface of the earth on different continents at different locations Geodetic reference system of the panel Each panel is assigned a system in addition with Gecdis default geodetic system WGS84 To make both of them correspond you must configure Gecdis datum see The Datum Datum is unknown on several charts In such cases the following message is displayed in red in the upper centre part of the main view Warning
271. l as an update and e Chart objects which are objects already included in the ENC cell Clicking these two types of objects you can display their associated information When you select an objet the scrolling list of the Object information window allows to display all punctual objects that are located near the location where you have clicked If no point object is located at this location the list shows all lines in this area If no line is located near this position the list shows all the areas near the position This allows to limit the number of objects in the list So if you wish to consult a line or a depth area click in the chart in a location that is at least 1 cm far from any point object buoy wreck etc ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 199 Gecdis v8 User s Manual XBLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To display information on an object Step Action 1 Select the object in Centre mode Ctrl key clicking the object 2 Information about this object is displayed on the right of the screen in the Object Information window You can consult the other objects in the main view in the scrolling list of the Object Information window Cell FRALU1S8U Position 48 19 056 M 004 41 611 W Buoy shape can Category of lateral mark port hand lateral mark Colour red Object name Basse Beuzec Topmark Topmark daymark shape Annotate object cylinder can Mark as deleted Move object 3 End of
272. l clutter background of the radar image and make the probability of a detection typically measured by a target being brighter than a fixed threshold equal for all parts of the image Range It gives the distance radar capacities Gain It gives the video gain signal intensity which is the amplification given a signal by the receiver This control can be compared to the volume control on an audio amplifier The bigger this value the more noise will be displayed Gain values range from 0 to 127 STC Sensitivity Time This is a technique for reducing radar receiver gain automatically when Control receiving echoes or replies from close range where maximum sensitivity is not generally required allowing more gain to be applied to data from farther ranges where more sensitivity is desired This increases the possibility to detect small targets at longer ranges FTC The rain filtering Removes the echo from far noise Attenuation It changes the level of attenuation of the video signal before it is sampled If the radar s video signal is too strong the image saturates or it is difficult to control the gain you can set it with this option Heading offset If the head up orientation of the radar image doesn t correspond to the head up orientation of the radar it can be adjusted here This field ranges from 0 to 1024 Finding the optimal correction is a matter of trial and error Trigger Delay If the cable linking the radar transmitter and t
273. level you can customize the chart display by defining a filter and then save the filter assigning it a name You can save as many filters as desired So you can fastly change the display depending on your sailing habits Information to be displayed is arranged in a tree with branches that it is possible to expand and reduce So some categories such as Beacon includes a list of object in lower levels Beacon cardinal Beacon lateral etc Checkboxes are represented as follows e v The object is always displayed because it belongs to the basic mode e 4 Displays in front of the objects that represents a category Some objects of this category are displayed but not all of them 146 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 d E LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES AS Step e The object is displayed If the cross appears in front of an object that represents a category this means that all objects of this category are displayed e J The object is not displayed If this appears in front of an object that represents a category this means that no object of this category is displayed If you check the All box all boxes will be checked which is the same thing as selecting the Full display Select the information you want to display Base H Information about the Chart Display E El Natural and Man made Features Port Features Standard ai v Depths Currents etc EE Seabed Obs
274. ll no longer be able to change the date 7 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 2 57 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES X 5 Reference Station You can also set a reference station to have a reference tide displayed on map St Helier Jersey Channel Islands READ flatercc Note If the tide date is not synchronized with current time data will be displayed in colour The reference station choosen will be highlighted in white This reference station can then be used to set the Height of Tide information on your ship if no commercial data are available on your area X 6 Ship Height of Tide information Height of Tide information can be added on your ship through IO configuration Right Click on your ship Add Information Gg b Height of tide 240 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 LUE IX 3 SHARPER SENSES ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 Gecdis v8 User s Manual Choose Software if you want Height of tide automatically set with your commercial data Important If no commercial data is available for your area tide of reference station will be used 24 X 3 E LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XI WEATHER MODULE The weather module is a set of tools required to define weather parameters and display weather data provided by different data files Use this module to select different
275. log box click Close 4 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 71 I X 3 LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV IV 1 IV 1 1 S iniu a a Re E ur cu E c dd is Du uu Hr D i ad o Ru un a Re Rr a C m s E EE d Hn d m eee ee ee a far ea i SES gien ee E ENEE ek dt et EE T E KEE e T TEE EE EE GER MOBILES AND FLEETS Navigation MOBILES VECTORS A heading defines how the centre line of a ship is oriented compared with the geographical north It does not deal with drift notion a ship berthed has a course When the ship moves the heading becomes a course Course value may be quite different from heading one Two elements may change the course of a ship wind and current LT Wind We D Wind L Current Lv X e Ciwa track p GE Drin Figure 61 Ship s Vectors Leeway track Wind makes the ship drift and vary Wind drift is expressed with an angle i e leeway angle When added to true heading this angle is the angle of the route in relation to sea leeway track Course make good which is the movement of a ship in relation to the bottom of the water is the result of leeway track and the water that bears it the current drift So e Leeway track true heading leeway e Course make good Leeway track current drift L i Current drift Swaving vector Figure 62 ECS vectors representation Figure 63 ECDIS vectors representatio
276. lowing e Select the clearing line you want to delete and click the Delete context sensitive button on the right of the screen e Select the clearing line you want to delete right click it and click Delete in the pop up menu To move a clearing line Action Select the clearing line you want to move right click it and click Move in the pop up menu Drag the mouse which is located in the head of the clearing line to change its position and bearing The NMT no more than or NLT no less than values change accordingly End of procedure To rotate a clearing line Action Select the clearing line you want to rotate right click it and click Rotate in the pop up menu Drag the mouse which is located in the end of the clearing line to change its bearing End of procedure Geographic Calculations The Geographic Calculations module allows you to calculate the distance between two points You can get e The distance between two defined points Compute bearings and ranges option e The position of a point according to the coordinates of point of origin and a parameter of distance and bearing Compute B option ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 177 X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Bearing Range Calculations A 51 15 41568N 002 03 40058E ek Compute bearings and ranges B 50 4 7 25076N 0003 7 S0596E T Compute B Rhumb Line Great Circle Distance 60 95
277. lters 2 Choose a parameter in the Parameter scrolling list 3 For each line e Inthe To field enter a ending of the end limit of the range e Select the color that will represent the defined range mm Color Filters Sas h im Parameter Colours Rm From 5 0 kn Ke From 10 0 kn From 15 0 kn Sa From 20 0 kn KH From 25 0 kn Dess ae OK Cancel 4 Once all ranges are configured repeat the steps for all parameters you want and then click OK 9 End of procedure IN ECDIS MODE ALL USER OBJECTS ARE DRAWN WITH THE ORANGE COLOR SEE 1 4 2 PAGE 19 o 210 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual VII 4 4 DISPLAYING THE TRACK PROFILE The profile of a track gives you the evolution of this track depending on a range or on the evolution of a specific parameter To see the profile of a track Step Action 1 Select the track 2 Inthe context sensitive buttons right part of the screen click the Profile button The track profile displays in the lower part of the screen You can now choose to display a specific range or parameter eed ee eet see TENET EEE EEEE NEN A List of User Objects Black Box 381 1088 Whole Track gt Charted depth SE 3 End of procedure Title Bar Status bar showing the name of the tracked mobile as well as the creation date of the track First Scrolling List To display only a part of the track You can either display
278. m a system electronic navigational chart SENC with positional information from navigation sensors to assist the mariner in route planning and route monitoring and by displaying additional navigation related information Economic Speed Default speed assigned to a leg if no other speed has been assigned to it o Generic term to designate a device that displays chart data but is not intended to meet OMI s ECDIS operating standards requirements and check the need to import maritime charts ENC A database standardized as to content structure and format issued for use with ECDIS on the authority of government authorized Hydrographic Offices The ENC contains all the chart information necessary for safe navigation and may contain supplementary information in addition to that contained in the paper chart e g sailing directions which may be considered necessary for safe navigation A Estimated time that is necessary to reach a destination State of a target Situation of an ARPA target Lost To be Tracked or Tracked Event Isolated object that is inserted by the user to show an event in the location of On OMNE EW Size Indication that gives the distance between the more eastern and western OS mmm T Estimated time of arrival to the last wheel over of the route Folder Element of a data classification system that allows to arrange files BEN NMEA sentence that defines the geographical position Great Circle Route of a ship that co
279. me lag For example if the selected time zone is GMT 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris the letter will be B in summer and A in winter A 1h B 2h N 1h O 2h etc The position of the cursor when dragged over the main view or the chart overview If over a dialog box or outside the main view the position of the centre of the screen is specified The bearing between the Own Ship and the cursor in relation to the geographical north This piece of information is invalid if the pieces of information of the Own Ship and the cursor are invalid as well The distance between the Own Ship and the location of the cursor This piece of information is invalid if Own Ship s and cursor s positional information are invalid as well The Time to go Describes the time the Own Ship would take on the same speed as the current one to reach the position of the cursor This piece of information is invalid if Own Ship s and cursor s positional pieces of information and Own Ship s leeway track and course make good are invalid as well The height of the water level on cursor s position The depth on cursor s position To display this piece of information isolines bathymetry or 3D must be displayed The charted depth on cursor s position This piece of information is automatically added whenever the Depth Cursor piece of information is added If no height of tide is specified both of them have the same value t i SD M 0386 EN
280. ment module needs two libraries for type cable SMLs e Symbols library to view geographically or diagrams e Cable specifications library used for dressing a cable point to manage the display of a cable cut when querying Symbols The new library of symbols is managed by an XML file Its edition can change the content to define the symbols used by the module The symbols used are the existing bitmaps from MMS DOS and import this old library is possible via a menu System Import MMS Objects MMS DOS Library A pipeline has no symbol and should be displayed according to its type and state De Bn Jw a OO o ee je ma ES S NERL NN enl Eet In service a n ee NN Cables The new library reference cable is managed by an XML file associated with multiple image references 290 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 X 2LLLIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES files representing the cable cuts Editing the file can change the content to define the reference cable used by the module Import the old library of MMS DOS is possible via a menu System Import MMS Objects MMS DOS Library Reference management for pipeline is not provided XX 2 2 3 Cable Link and Pipeline Selection Memory loading a SMLs List 3 242 This is the counterpart of the user objects list but dedicated to the SMLs in order to e Define SMLs to load into memory for display e Manage the creation deletion export and pro
281. moves all displayed sentences from the window and displays the newly received or transmitted sentences e Test format Displays the sentences in text format An example of a sentence in text format is GPZDA 160044 12 12 2001 5B e Hexadecimal format Displays the sentences in hexadecimal format An example of a sentence in hexadecimal format is 24 47 50 5A 44 41 2C 31 36 30 30 35 38 2C 31 32 2C 31 32 2C 32 30 30 31 2C 2C 2A 35 36 OD OA 6 End of procedure IV 6 2 2 Adding and Configuring a NET stream Gecdis allows you to send or receive data via two types of network streams e UDP or NET e TCP IV 6 2 2 1 The UDP Stream UDP offers a connection faster than TCP with less reliability However this protocol allows you to broadcast information on several machines So the UDP protocol will be preferred with big sized sentences that are sent so often that it would not be important to lose some of them For any stream you must enter the port number input or output assigned to the machine that receives or sends sentences If you enter O as a port number transmission or reception will not be enabled If you enter another number you will be able to transmit or receive sentences provided the same number is configured on the machine that receives or transmits them So if 1001 is entered for an input port you will be able to read the sentences from the systems whose output port will be set to 1001 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 10
282. must have been added to compute the height of the conning Example 7 0000000 m The distance that is run on water This piece of information depends on the SOW If SOW is invalid this piece of information is also invalid If you select None as a source but you specify a calculation rate distance on water is computed again at any interval of this period Example 406 861178 nm The distance that is run on water The value of this distance can be reset in the same way as an odometer to do so click the Mobile menu and then Reset Daily Counters This piece of information depends on SOW Example 15 265778 nm The distance that is run on ground This piece of information depends on SOG If SOG is invalid this piece of information is also invalid You must specify a calculation period to specify the interval between each recalculation of the piece of information Example 403 252878 nm The distance that is run on ground and can be reset in the same way as an odometer to do so click the Mobile menu and then Reset Daily Counters This piece of information depends on SOG Example 14 238458 nm Meteo The true wind speed that is computed from Apparent wind that comes from wind vane anemometer opeed over ground drift The wind bearing in relation to true north The value of this piece of information is the one given by a fixed sensor The wind speed relative to a mobile that is moving The wind bearing in relation to the ship ISD M
283. n End of procedure Note that you cannot insert anything but mobiles into a static fleet To insert a mobile into a fleet click the name of this fleet and insert the mobile IV 6 4 ASSIGNING INFORMATION TO A MOBILE When opening Gecdis for the first time a mobile is created with the same pieces of information as default acquired mobiles see section IV 6 3 The pieces of information are as follows e Position e UTC of position reference e SOG e COG e SOW e COW e rue heading e Charted depth e Depth On the other hand when you manually create a mobile several default pieces of information are displayed that depend on the type of mobile you have added You can add information to a mobile depending on which type of information you can acquire with your sensors ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 111 C X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Position bow Position stern Input Out Leeway angle E My GPS e E Drift speed 4 urc Drift course Ti coc Auxiliary NE amp sov Shiphandling Ge 6 cor Weather EE Seabed x cha Target Buoy EL ixBlue Main Target Buoy AAA Skream k Or or on v r FF FTF F Property ALL AIS STATICS INFORMATIONS Mobile Fleet Figure 87 List of pieces of information that can be added to a ship To add a piece of information Step Action 1 In System menu click Settings O and Mobiles Input
284. n 72 Gecdis allows you to configure information about leeway track course make good and drifts L eeway track represents COW and SOW It needs true heading to be added Current set and speed generate current drift If both of them are not available current drift will not be displayed and will be considered as nil ISD M 038G EN September 2014 Ix 2L LIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Course make good s vector is generated by SOG and COG Swaying vector is generated by swaying course and speed information This vector is the lateral projection of the course make good Finally vectors will not be represented in the same way whether in ECDIS or ECS mode as described in the figure above IV 1 2 APPARENT WIND AND TRUE WIND True wind defines the wind that would be felt if the ship would be motionless on the ground Apparent wind is the wind that a person feels on a moving ship i e the wind that is acquired by an anemometer and a weather vane It is the result of two motions the real motion of the air true wind and the ship relative wind e Apparent wind True wind Relative wind o0 if a ship is motionless on the ground apparent wind is the same as true wind While navigating apparent wind is not so useful except concerning aircrafts the true wind is more important and is annotated in log books It can be computed in relation to wind as well as ships COG and SOG Relative wind
285. n C UPS Universal Polar Stereographic The Cursor coordinates in the Information pages will now be expressed in UPS coordinates 6 For displaying UPS coordinates for the Own Ship and the cursor in the information bar perform the same steps 2 to 5 but firstly by selecting Information Bar in the Windows area of the nformation windows dialog box Information windows Windows Information Bar Information Pages Critical Informations laa Ll 7 For displaying UPS coordinates for the Own Ship and the cursor in the Critical information perform the same 2 to 5 steps but firstly by selecting Critical Information in the Windows area of the nformation windows dialog box ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 161 XSLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 3 V 3 1 V 3 1 1 Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action Windows Information Bar Information Pages Critical Informations Click OK in the nformation windows dialog box End of procedure ARCS Charts ARCS OVERVIEW Introduction ARCS Admiralty Raster Chart Service charts have been developed by the UKHO United Kingdom Hydrographic Office to provide digitized nautical charts with notice to mariners updates iXBlue offers the ARCS Navigator licence type Two kinds of CD ROMs allow you to manage ARCS charts e Chart CD ROM There are 11 CD ROMs that gather the whole world charts Over 2800 charts provide coverage of the world s commercial shi
286. n S GEONET PTSAG GEONET PTSAL SIMRAD ITI TPT SIMRAD ITI TPR Warp length MARELEC MA MARELEC MA DD SIMRAD ITI WWL Submersion e DBS GEONET PTSAG S GEONET PTSAL SIMRAD PSIMP SIMRAD ITI TPT SIMRAD ITI TPR SIMRAD ITI DBS Horizontal spread GEONET PTSAG GEONET PTSAN SCANMAR TDS SIMRAD PSIMP SIMRAD ITI TDS Vertical spread SCANMAR HBF SIMRAD ITI HFB Lr temperature GEONET PTSAN CHAUVIN ARNOUX SIMRAD PSIMP Thermometer D 4 5 GEONET Trawl Net For the implementation select the NUEA PTSAG iXSea source in the properties of the trawl net relevant informations previously added namely e Position corresponding to the central position of the mouth of the trawl net this value is calculated from the ground cable length port and starboard positions decoded frames and its previous value which gives the impression that it takes above and improves its stability Note a shift set to the position reproduces the three values of the net positions center port and starboard e Submersion corresponding to the average of port and starboard submersions e Horizontal spread corresponding to the distance between the projected onto the perpendicular to the direction of the otter boards e Rolling calculated from the port and starboard submersions September 2014 335 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES AGA ETA Own Ship Cursor a Source Checki
287. n Ship is drawn in black white the secondary vessels in gray When launching Gecdis for the first time the Own Ship is created with a set of information position SOG COG SOW true heading depth configured on an automatic source Generally to receive data the stream where the sensors are connected must be added configured and checked Z Input Output Summary Basic mode Realtime Print Input Output Summary basic Calc System Value Source Stream SE UTC 19 06 2013 10 04 53 Software Distance Own Ship Cursor x xxxxNM Software Bearing Own Ship Cursor Se Software TTG Own Ship Cursor Se Software ETA Own Ship Cursor TEE Software CPA Own Ship Cursor x xxxxMM Software ixBlue value Source Stream Calc rate Position 5 58 a7M 01 26295E lt 4ubomatic gt Automatic S06 18 0kn Automatic z Aubomatic COG 116 8 lt Automatic lt Automatic SOW 18 0kn Automatic Automatic True heading 115 8 zAutoamatic gt Automatic gt Depth 46 3m z Aubomatic zAuboamatic rm Figure 18 Default Own Ship configuration 1 4 2 ECDIS AND ECS MODES By a single mouse click Gecdis allows you to skip from ECS Electronic Chart System which is a non ECDIS mode to ECDIS mode For this you can use the command in the View menu or use the default button sets in the horizontal toolbar The status of ECDIS mode is given in the bottom left corner of the screen ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 19 C 1 X aL LJ E
288. n can be modified by the navigator to match his or her needs The speed over water This speed is relative to the surface of the sea Swaying course The COG projected by the perpendicular line of the mobile and computed from Tee Swaying Speed The SOG projected on the perpendicular line of the mobile In other words this is the speed the ship moves on a virtual line that would be perpendicular to the ship This piece of information is useful when docking TCP Stream The protocol that allows to connect a transmitter to a receiver TCPA Time to closest point The time to the closest approaching point between two objects This time of approach defines the moment when two objects will be the closest the one from the other Tidal Amplitude The vertical distance indicated with positive values between the sea surface OS es Tidal Curve A graph that represents variations of sea level depending on time at a specific location In normal conditions the curve should look like a sinusoid Tidal Stream In a tidal wave the horizontal motion the speed of the particles of water Tide Gauge The device that allows to notice at any time the tidal amplitude The difference between the current time onboard and the UTC time TLL Target latitude and The sentence that acquires latitude and longitude of a target target number longitude name position and the time marker that is used in target tracking systems J10 ISD M 038G EN Septembe
289. n content measured from various directions Provides fish detections to Biomass module to be displayed in 2D 3D and a specific Sonar View Display Overview Bathymetry 2D 3D Hardness 2D 3D ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 271 Water column visualization inSTV STT SAT SAV and Echogram views R 250m P 50 FMH 10ms S dci geng G 15 Echogram view with triple echogram display 3 Echos Sonar view with fish detections C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual ANIL 2 Configuration XVIII 2 1 CREATING A STREAM DEDICATED TO SEAPIX COMMUNICATION Step Action 1 Under System menu I O and Mobiles click Input Output Mobile Configuration and create a TCP nertwork stream Note you must have first disable the simplified mode 2 Inthe Comment field enter a name for the stream SEAPIX for example This will help you identify the stream 3 Enter the port number 27000 4 Enter the IP address of SeapiX processing unit Refer to installator instructions Input Output amp Mobile Configuration TCP Stream Input Parameters Spying GER TCP1 SEAPIX A UTC SS Comment SEAPIX AB ARPA Range SS 2 2 ON ARPA Marker Port 27000 jf Ant Band type e E Ant Status Server Address 192 168 0100 d E Ant Mute tn EM Cursor position nf Distance Own Ship C Add 9 End of procedure Ri When the SeapiX is connected and is transmitting data S
290. n the black box If a new type of event occurs after the filter has been configured this event will be displayed by default in the black box You will be able to remove it from display later To select a level of event display In the Black box dialog box click the desired level in the Display group zone To customize the display level of events Action In the Black Box dialog box click the Filter button Id Source a 30027 IxMIoMobile 30028 IXMIoMobile 40002 IXMIoMobile 40006 IxMIoMaobile vw 40008 IxMIoMobile 40016 IXMloMobile 40017 IXMIoMobile 40022 IXMloMobile 4nnes TYMTaAM abil Display Select All Base Unselect All Standard All OK Cancel 7 Fier Select the events to be displayed Click OK End of procedure For example if you want to control the geographical positions of the last 12 hours you can filter the events required by ECDIS standard to do this Action Deselect all the events by clicking the Unselect All button Check the box corresponding to the event 40008 of the IXMloMobile source see the window displayed in step 1 of the above procedure Click OK End of procedure ISD M 038G EN September 2014 Gecdis v8 User s Manual Ix B f DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Black Box 238 72828 Type Do Date Receipt Date Id Source Title Text User bei Information Mo O2f0F 12013 06 24 00 40008 IXMIoMobile Gwn Ship Blue DR 51 01 130
291. n the left and Sedi display hardness on the right Important The display of sediment data in 3D view implies that you have activated the option in the 3D view parameters right click in the 3D view 2 To stop recording click again on Start Record 3 Seabed data acquired in real time temporary database can be archived on a permanent basis via the command Archive Current Record Store New Recorded Data e Real time recorded data will be imported in a Wassp database You can type the name of a new database to create it Store data in database M The new database created with the recording in progress is listed in the Settings dialog box 4 You can delete or export a stored database by selecting it and by clicking the button corresponding to the action you want to carry out 282 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action CR 9 To delete points of a database displayed on the screen e Select Display points zoom in on the zone until you can see the row sweep points or grid points at the lowest level e Choose Select points and define the rectangular zone of points to be removed e Click Delete selected points the points disappear from the screen Important This procedure is not reversible WEE E EEGEN a D Before deleting on the left after deleting on the right 6 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN
292. nce the display depends on the scale e REM comments or notes indicating the source file This line is then ignored by the compiler You can add comments notes or empty lines to space out the document anywhere in the file e Unit reference unit for the values Three possibilities meter fathom and foot Repect the syntax e Sensor one position of the conning This position is expressed according to the marker s couple of points 0 0 e Stern rear track not used but must be present e Depth sensor position not used but must be present e Point for event mark not used but must be present e HULL defines the different vectors of the ship s hull Be sure the shape is closed by repeating the first point into the last point e DECK different vectors defining the ship s deck Be sure the shape is closed by repeating the first point into the last point You don t need to define the points for the deck but the key word DECK must be written e END end of the source file Be sure you have not forgotten this key word since it is used to delimit the DECK oee below an example of the file The drawing is the representation of the values given in the file ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual REM Nom du navire Unit metre fathom foot metre Y axis REM Sensor one Stern rear track Depth sensor position Point for event mark O O O O is HULL 100 pts maxi A
293. nclude to generate the surface v Realtime recording database wi test To delete points of a database displayed on the screen e Select Display points zoom in on the zone until you can see the row sweep points or grid points at the lowest level e Choose Select points and define the rectangular zone of points to be removed 262 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C9 X3LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e Click Delete selected points the points disappear from the screen Important THIS PROCEDURE IS NOT REVERSIBLE Before deleting After deleting 20 01 2014 10 48 01 Reference 2 57m_ ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 263 XVI XVI 1 264 IX aL UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step 3 SIMRAD ES70 Gecdis Simrad module has been designed to store and display acoustic data provided by a Simrad single beam echo sounder Raw data protocol SeaXpert module supports all the range of Simrad Ex60 ES EK EQ60et 70 The module receives the stream provided by Simrad software via BI500 protocol Simrad module enables to e Record in continuous the last hours of acoustic data provided by a single beam or split beam sounder of the range Ex60 70 water columns echos seabed echos geographical position specific timestamp e Display the data graphically with echograms e Geo localize each ping and create a mark directly from the echogram e Focus and
294. nd DMS Representation of the position in degrees minute second example 43 36 35 109S 007 15 54 122bE e UTM Standard m Representation of the position in UTM example 29L 388780 8374767 e UTM Signed northing m Representation of the position in UTM signed northing example 29L 388780 1625233 You can select a default zone for formatting positions in UTM coordinate In this case Gecdis will format any angle to a zone rapport in the specified area Outside this range the coordinates are expressed with the area assigned to the position a If you select Automatic in Distance distances will be measured in meters until w reaching 1 nautical mile ISD M 038G EN September 2014 33 1 4 34 2L LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES The Datum Step 6 The datum is a science that offers amongst other things constants that define the relationship between a coordinate system and the real Earth the geoid There are many different geodetic datum systems depending on the country or region in the Earth That is why you may receive data symbols routes etc with another geodetic system than your traditional system You will then prefer to change the datum to have a perfect representation of the position of this object By default Gecdis uses the WGS84 The acronym of the selected datum is indicated in the main view title bar To change the datum Action In the System m
295. nformation on a cell Click a cell to get several types of information on it e IMPORT NO1A3000 Edition 1 Update 0 on 08 26 10 at 15 05 11 This means the NO143 000 file has been imported on the 26 of August 2010 at 15 h 05 mn 11 s This is a new edition update 0 which has been replaced by the former one e IMPORT GB5X01SW Edition 1 Update 1 on 12 14 05 at 15 00 07 The GB5X01SW 001 file has been imported on the 14th of December 2005 at 15 h 00 mn 7 s This is an update update 1 that changes the 1 0 cell Edition 21 Update 0 that used to be in the chart database When an update is applied the line below is followed by the list of modified objects with the type of modification There are several kinds of possible changes D Insertion INSERT CO Modification MODIFY the modification can change either the geometry of the object or its attributes O Deletion DELETE V 2 6 RESETTING THE DATABASE To reset database In the Charts Database dialog box click Reset Database to restart with an empty database The current database is thus sent to the recycle bin ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 133 C I X ES LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 2 7 CENTRING THE CHART AREA ON A CELL To centre the chart area on a cell Step Action 1 In the Charts tab of the Charts Database dialog box click the cell you wish to centre on and then click Center on Cell or double click the cell 2
296. ng Corrections Filtering M CPA Own Ship Cursor lf Ant Length Offset olf Ant Beam Offset SEI Trawl net ae e Position HMEA PTSAG Sea Calculation rate D s e EN UTC of position referent 4 M Position port side Stream z amp utematic Specific header L A Position starboard echt i Warp lenath ba w Checksum Acquisition TimeOut min US 4 k Add Delete Clase Figure 211 GEONET Trawl position configuration In addition certain information must be present or recommended e Position port side necessarily software and required for proper operation e Position starboard necessarily software and required for proper operation e Eccentricity necessarily software this information corresponds to the deviation from the ship s route e SOG necessarily software e COG necessarily software e Vertical spread estimated for a representation in the 3D view Normally the time stamp in the sentence is not present the information is then stamped with the UTC time Gecdis when decoding Do not forget to configure the trawl particularly ground cable length gd System A Mobile Sizes EINE Trawl met if Position S ER Position port side L Length E Position starboard X E ER Warp length iE c D T SE ek G Ground cable length 50 00 m ON soc G L of Submersion Warp length adjustment 10 002 Add Delete Close Figure 212 Trawl net sizes configuration On
297. ng GPS and dead reckoning data e Mobiles in a fleet Contrary to the mobiles that represent your ship these mobiles do not necessarily represent ships They define any object liable to move buoys targets etc and consequently needing to be followed Before creating them you should create a fleet ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 109 110 X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step e Specific mobiles i e independent mobiles that do not belong to a fleet that not necessarily represent your ship You can create a mobile in different ways depending on specific navigation circumstances that is why different pieces of information are assigned to each of them when creating them You can create up to three different types of mobiles e Dead reckoned mobiles e Acquired mobiles that are intended to receive pieces of information by a sensor e The AIS pilot that allows you to acquire information about the NMEA AIS VHF Own vessel VDO sentence To create a mobile Action In System menu click Settings UO and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens In the left hand list of the nput Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box select the fleet you want to add to the mobile if a fleet has already been created or click System if you want to add a mobile representing your ship Click Add select Mobile and then sele
298. ng stoping the track is done by using the toolbar icon or via the Mobile list 2 Click Mobile and Open the mobile list 3 n the dialog box that displays select the ships or fleets for which you want to start a track and then click Start The tracks start 4 To stop some of the tracks or all of them click Mobile open the list of mobiles select the mobiles for which you want to stop a track and then click Stop 9 End of procedure VII 4 2 TRACK TEMPLATES To configure a track template In the System menu Settings Tracks and then Own ship Track recording Check parameters to record in track Parameter Sampling V Position V UTC of position reference 1min 00s O True heading 010 0 Charted depth L sow Enter sampling threshold for selected parameter Minimal distance between two points Figure 168 Track parameters dialog ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 209 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VII 4 3 TRACK COLOR FILTERS Color filters allow you to assign colors to scale values for each possible parameter of a track The colour of the track changes in the screen with the selected parameter l TO ASSIGN THE TRACK TO THE COLOUR FILTER OF A PARAMETER YOU MUST HAVE PREVIOUSLY e SAVED THIS PARAMETER FOR THE TRACK TEMPLATE YOU ARE USING To configure a color filter Step Action 1 Inthe System menu click Settings Tracks and then Tracks Color Fi
299. nned speed for each leg is displayed in a little square ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 201 C X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Figure 163 Highlighted alternative route VII 3 5 4 Planned Route that is Highlighted The planned route is displayed with a thick dotted red line Each waypoint is represented with a circle around the waypoint A square encircles each waypoint A plain and thick line represents the lane The heading route of a leg is displayed in the middle of this leg See EEN oe ooo ae eee ot Oe Oe oe Ll eee eee A EE 22 1 3 L2 32 1 e ML m a mmm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm ui LPPPP A AA Figure 164 Highlighted planned route VII 3 6 SWITCHING IN ROUTE MONITORING When you launch the route monitoring mode on a planned route the Pilot window opens giving several useful pieces of information about the route While in route monitoring you can still change the properties and planning of the route Along the route monitoring several alarms may occur e When you reach a wheel over the following message displays in the Alarms window Wheel over Waypoint x reached where x represents the waypoint number e f your ship exceeds the XTE the following alarm displays Max exceeded x nm where x represents the distance from XTE di
300. nsists in following in the Earth an arc of a Great Circle i e the shorter distance line to go from one point to another 214 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 ap T I L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES HASP Key Key that is connected on the parallel or USB port of the computer and allows to use the software Also it makes it possible to use a specific configuration on another computer without any enabling In such a case it acts as a mobile licence configuration HDT HeaDing True Sentence that defines heading information Heading to Steer Heading that should be followed by the ship to reach the next wheel over or waypoint This value refers to the geographical north and moves in the same way as the Own Ship s heading Head up Chart orientation that depends on the Own Ship s heading and is always turned to the top of the screen Vertical movement of the ship on water surface Height of Tide The vertical distance at any moment between the water level and chart datum Horizontal Datum An area of uniform horizontal datum IHO International Organization created in 1948 by the United Nations This is the first Hydrographic Office international organism only devoted to maritime issues OMI mainly tries to improve maritime security and prevent from maritime pollution provoked by ships Isobath A line on a map joining points on the bed of the sea or other body or w
301. nt Position area check Enable and then enter a value in Maximum distance between ships ELP Check Periodic Report 30s to generate an alarm each 30 seconds in case of inconsistent positions Click OK End of procedure Inconsistent Depths Inconsistent depths allow to show when there is too much difference between an acquired depth and the depth that is computed with bathymetry and is relative to the position of the ship To do so you must enter an ELS Ecart Limite de Sonde Maximum difference between depths in meters or with a percentage If the value is specified in meters an alarm is generated when the difference between both depths is superior to this value if the value is specified in percentage an alarm is generated when the difference between both depths is superior or equal to in percentage the acquired depth The first time this occurs the following alarm is displayed Inconsistent depths difference x where x is the difference in meters or in percentage depending on the selected option between ship s and chart s depths If you have chosen to display this alarm each 30 seconds Periodic Report 30s check box the Inconsistent depths alarm is displayed the other times For example if the acquired value is 50 meters and the computed value is 55 meters the alarm is generated when there is an allowance of 10 the alarm is generated because the difference between both values 5 meters is exactly equal to 10 of
302. nt data e Personnal data e Official sediments ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 245 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Personnal data includes data provided by a sensor such as WASSP SeaScan Roxan etc Sediments Settings Personnal Data Official Sediments Data to display Presentation mode WASSP D All available records Hardness Current record only Data point extension 10 00 m ei Beam angular coverage H d 30 degrees Area extension factor al D 1 1czrealsize Transparency level ke v Use high quality display for multibeam sounders data slower Related settings for sediments data acquisition Single Beam Settings WASSP Settings To configure the display of sediment data provided by a sensor Step Action 1 In Sediments menu click Settings 2 Inthe Personal Data tab click Data to display and select your sensor 3 According to the selected sensor the visual representation options may vary Sediments Hardness and Roughness 4 Then select the data point extension the beam angular coverage the area extension factor and the transparency level 9 End of procedure To configure the acquisition of sediment data when using a sensor Step Action 1 Inthe Sediments menu click Settings 2 Inthe Personal Data tab click Single Beam Settings if your sensor single beam or WASSP Settings if your sensor WASSP sensor 3 n case of
303. o indicate one of the ETA or the date of departure You can also decide to fix an ETA or a leg speed so that this piece of information remains unchanged To plan a route Action Right click the route you want to plan then select Planning context sensitive button Click OK in the message box You must set at least one ETA that appears The Planning dialog box opens Indicate at least one estimated time of arrival ETA Check one of the boxes of the ETA column click the cell and enter an estimated time or use the up and down arrows to select a date ETA and leg speed for each leg are automatically calculated according to the ETA you have indicated in the previous step If you have entered a date without checking the cell the date will not be taken into account by the computation You can enable any constraints to your route checking boxes of the ETA or Leg Speed fields and entering in front of the boxes your desired ETA for the waypoint or leg speed for the previous leg ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 199 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action Mame Route Comment Waypoints M Name Position ETA Leg Speed Comment fT SUADDZZN oan E td 11 07 2013 08 08 10 Io a Z 50 38 132 N 000 35 650 E 11 07 2013 08 18 28 18 0 kn 3 50 37 661 N 00 30139 E iij 7 2013 08 30 19 18 0 kn 4 50 35 855 N 00 19175 E 141 0712013 08 54 22 a E od OK Cancel 9
304. o select a custom display Action In the Display menu select Charts then point to Chart Display Under the separator that follows the three default level displayed there is the list of the other filters you have created Click the desired filter When you select a filter a check mark is displayed in front of it End of procedure V 2 12 3 The Presentation Library 148 Gecdis uses official S52 presentation to draw ENC charts Used presentation library is replaceable but this feature is only intended to be used by qualified service personal and type approval authorities As a user you can get with the used presentation by browsing IHO ECDIS Chart 1 which is included into Gecdis Note that it behaves as any ENC chart and it follows your selections The presentation library is the list of symbols defined in the ECDIS standard that is considered as the reference for symbols It contains 12 screens which are shown in the appendix C of this manual To open the presentation library in the Display menu select Charts point to Chart Information and then Chart Legend Chart 1 After a few seconds a new program is launched ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X ES E LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual P INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES ECDIS Chart x RM This system supports 5 57 Edition 3 1 1 INFORMATION ABOUT THE CHART DISPLAY 4 B Ki l PA o a i O NON EN Data on Display Over scale part of 4 Display
305. o this product and documentation iXBlue reserves the right to revise or make changes or improvements to this product or documentation at any time without notify any person of such revision or improvements In no event shall iXBlue be liable for any consequential or incidental damages including but not limited to loss of business profits or any commercial damages arising out of the use of this product Trademarks Microsoft MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks and Celeron is a trademark of Intel Corporation ii ISD M 038G EN September 2014 Ki Grant of license Restrictions Copyright Maintenance Data update Extended Maintenance Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Software license agreement PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE BY CLICKING ON THE ACCEPT BUTTON INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT CLICK THE DO NOT ACCEPT BUTTON AND THE INSTALLATION PROCESS WILL NOT CONTINUE RETURN THE PRODUCT TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A FULL REFUND iXBlue grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable license to use the enclosed iXBlue software in the manner provided below e the number of software users depends on the licenses agre
306. obile and then Open Mobile List To hide a mobile Step Action 1 Click Mobile menu and then Open Mobile List to open the Mobiles list 2 Inthe left hand pane select the category to which the mobile you want to hide belongs 3 Inthe right hand pane select your desired mobile 4 Inthe menu bar click Hide 9 End of procedure a You can hide all the mobiles of a category selecting the category and clicking Hide ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 7I 8 w j C LA E LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To centre a mobile Double click a mobile in the right hand pane The mobile is then centred on the main view Would it had been hidden it had become visible To sort out a column On the right hand pane click the column header of the piece of information you want to sort out An up or down arrow indicates whether the column is sorted out in descending or ascending order IV 4 Alarms IV 4 1 OWN SHIP SPECIFIC ALARMS IV 4 1 1 Anti Collision Anti collision allows to compute how lucky the Own Ship is to strike other mobiles that belong to fleets and react from this Several notions are implied by anti collision e Allowed Closest Point of Approach Allowed CPA which is the minimum distance from which the captain lets the officer of the watch pass from a ship if sea traffic or proximity of dangers makes it impossible to operate to respect the Allowed CPA the officer of the watch gives noti
307. occur only in the cells with the best scale otherwise if you select this option the check will occurs in all cells whatever their scales are e Select Check for No ENC of sufficient scale option if you want to be informed when the selected ENC scale is not precise enough with respect to the safe chart scale see section V 2 12 4 page 149 End of procedure To configure the danger detection option Step Action 1 Click the System menu Settings and then select General Configuration 2 Inthe Configuration dialog box select the Security tab 3 Doone ofthe following e To set a distance limit click the Maximum distance to danger nm and then 194 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action select a value e Toseta time limit click the Maximum time to danger minutes and then select a value e To define a perimeter around the ship enter a value for the Angular width of sector to watch angular width 4 Click OK 9 End of procedure See section II 8 page 41 for more information To activate the danger detection option Step Action 1 Click the Navigation menu and check Danger detection item 2 Select again Danger Detection to deactivate the option 3 End of procedure V 2 14 CONSULTING INFORMATION ON AN OBJECT There are two types of ENC related objects e Updated objects which are objects created by the mariner and included on a ENC cel
308. oint g ograp 47 44 700 N 005 50110 W 0 37417 117 081 3 896 0 38828 117 529 BJ IR8 47 44 450 N 005 52 420 W 2 91388 119 995 3 896 3 02377 120 53 DAD 2 sub RP 3 ter 47 44 455 N 005 52 450 W 0 03849 120 034 DAAD 2 sub r paration 8 47 44 445 N 005 52 498 W 0 06303 120 097 55 2 BJ BR8 47 44 440 N 005 52 520 W 0 02847 1204125 55 2 0 01276 J D4Al1 2 sub BJ FR8 47 43 710 N 005 53 190 W 1 58879 121 714 D4Al1 2 sub boucle 47 43 710 N 005 53 190 W 0 121 714 Fin sable et gra 47 43 883 N 005 53 679 W 0 68835 122 402 D but dunette 47 43 883 N 005 53 679 W 0 122 402 D but enfouiss 47 44 033 N 005 54 104 W 0 59802 123 P P P P o Px WW U WH coed Figure 183 List of positions window This page shows the list of the old MMS DOS positions by presenting SML elements as a list Consulting the list offers the possibilities e To focus the geographic view on an item e To filter the content because of the focus control to be consistent with the old version e Access to the modification elements course of the underwater line with another control window Only one item is selected in the list The header of the list shows the main properties of the SML see key properties above with some extra indications e The edition number e The revision number of the edition e Geodesy for an expressed list with geographic coordinates with an indication of calculation on a sphere or ellipsoid
309. olbars e The upper toolbar horizontal with functions for navigation and security navigation e And the lateral toolbar vertical displaying the main functions for fishing operation and the access to optional expert modules As for specific requirements the skipper or the operator when installing the application can create modify the commands for each toolbar Important WHEN THE MENU BAR IS NOT DISPLAYED E G IF A GUESTS TYPED USER IS LOGGED ON YOU CANNOT CLOSE THE TOOLBAR 1 3 1 6 Information Windows Critical information The banner with critical information enables to display data types that have been previously selected They are related to the ownship or to the cursor and are provided by the sensors or computed To display the critical information window you must select the corresponding command in the View menu When a piece of information is not available incorrect or nonexistent the corresponding field is filled with red character Information is displayed with different colors depending on their accurateness e High and normal quality information is displayed in green e Invalid information is displayed in red e Undefined information is displayed in gray ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 13 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES The information bar Information pages XX XX XXX KX NK OK elc BEAR XXX X SOG DIST x xxxx NMI AALA SS amd d 2 iur Su W
310. ollow the mobile and Fleets Name Age DOG E Ships lt P PeO NEDLLOYD S 7 05 17 5kn a5 S PAMTOKRATORAS imin O 1kn Arpa JY PALILA 8 0s 8 1 kn PETER FABER 3min O 0kn lt PHILIPP ESSBERGER 5 05 13 4 kn lt J PRIDE OF AQUITA 6 05 15 2 kn 4 Figure 46 Centre command in mobile list e other e In the main view if the mobile is displayed select it with right click Then click on the Centre button in the Object Information window This case is particularly interesting to follow the mobile 1 1 AIS JO KASHI Position Dist Bearing from Own Ship CPA TEPA Ground vector Navigation status True heading ROT Collision risk gt Additional Information gt Parameters gt Track Appearance Send Message Delete Appearance Bear ing Range Line Information 51 07 341 N 001 33 108 E 2 690 MM 310 89 2 67 NM 1min s 17 1 kn 227 09 Under way using engine 230 09 0 00 min Mull ix Position Hide Configuration Start Track Figure 47 Centre command in the Object information window of the mobile Motion Control manages how the main view follows a mobile Own Ship or any mobile When centering on a mobile is activated the motion control of the main view has too You should know that the motion control is configurable see section 1l 2 3 page 31 for more The motion control keeps the mobile in the main view Two modes are possible Relative motion In this
311. on Display Scale The ratio between a distance on the display and a distance on the ground DPT Sentence that allows to acquire depth i e the depth that relates to the transducer and the offset of the transducer A positive offset indicates the distance between the transducer and the waterline A negative offset indicates the distance between the transducer and the keel Dead Reckonning abbreviation Draught Vertical distance measured between the waterline and the lower part of the keel in the section of the ship that is considered about ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 d C X z3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual ECDIS Electronic Chart Electronic Chart Display and Information System When provided with Display and Information adequate backup devices this system is considered as the equivalent of an System updated maritime chart in accordance with the V 20 regulation of the 1974 s SOLAS Convention It allows to display the selected information from a navigation electronic chart SENC and the positional information provided from navigation sensors to help navigators to plan routes and monitor them If desired the system also allows to display additional information that is related to the navigation The navigation information system which with adequate backup arrangements can be accepted as complying with the up to date chart required by regulation V 20 of the 1974 SOLAS Convention by displaying selected information fro
312. on You can create different types of mobiles or fleets You can also configure them We remind you that a fleet is a group of mobile elements buoys targets etc and a mobile can either represent your ship or a mobile in a fleet IV 5 1 DEFINING A MOBILE APPEARANCE First you have to configure the general appearance of mobiles The appearance you will define for mobiles will be later considered as the default one for any mobile you will insert except if this mobile is included in a fleet Track Symbol Label Pasttrack Vectors Miscellaneous v Visible SCAMIN v ECDIS representation 1000000 v Display Radar Antenna w llze outline OK Cancel Figure 73 Configuring the Appearance of Mobile and Fleet Symbols 84 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To define the mobile and fleet general appearance Step Action 1 Inthe System menu click Settings I O and mobiles and then Appearance The Mobile Appearance dialog box is displayed You have to use it in a progressive way Indeed you will have to check or not boxes and each choice you will make will have consequences on your future choices The following is an example of the complete thought you may have 2 Inthe Symbol tab click Visible if you want your mobile to be visible in the main view e f you have not checked Visible you will not be able to see the mobile e f you have checked Visible 3 Select ECDIS re
313. one is selected Only if the information is configured on an estimated source ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES N LA 1 2 2 ENTERING TEXTS Text can be entered to define several elements e A position e Numerical characters heading speed distance date e Free text In some cases text is entered in a controlled way So when a specific kind of character is to be entered it is not possible to enter another one For example if the character should be a number it is not possible to enter an alphabetical character Likewise while editing a heading you will not be able to enter a value which is superior to 359 9 8 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual l 2 2 1 Geographic Editor As this editor allows you to enter a position in any format the validity of characters entered is not monitored in real time but at the end of the entry The geographical editor is special because it has a button with a cross to use the mouse in a geographic view to set the new position 50 51 97633N D01 1h 92413E e Figure 4 Geographic editor It also has a contextual menu to initialize the text in another format Cursor Copy gl a66z fee M 00191987555 E SO S 197635 N 00171192413 E 5 51 58 580 M 001 11 55 448 E S1U 373247 5636500 Figure 5 Geographic editor contextual menu 1 2 3 TH
314. ontents of the Comment field will be displayed nearby the symbol of the mark Once configured the mark click OK ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 ak X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action 4 f you select the mark you have just created the Object Information window gives you the details of the mark and allows you to edit it with context sensitive buttons Obiect Information X 1 1 H Mark MARK 2 Mame MARE d Folder iXxBlue Date 2013 07 11 10 01 45 Comment PF Position 50 38 716 N 000934118 E Charted depth 0 000 m Submersion 0 000 m Colour e Symbol i d Dangerous d 9 End of procedure If you know that you may use many times a mark with special characteristics you can define it so you will not need to create it whenever required To define a mark template Step Action 1 Click User Objects Marks and then Define Marks 2 Click New button Defined Marks Close Define Mark Mame My type Colour ei d Symbol EL Cancel dH 3 In the new dialog box enter a Name compulsory choose a Colour and a Symbol and click OK The name of the new mark is displayed 4 Click Close 9 Click User Objects and point to Create Predefined Marks to display the label of the mark you have just created 214 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 e LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action User Ob
315. or Settings Association esp ces couleurs V Afonsmos nei V Anglerfishes nei 7 Atlantic cod I Atlantic horse mackerel v Atlantic recfishes nei V Black cardinal fish V Black scabbardfish Black seabream Slackspot red seabream v Blue ling Brill v Catsharks nursehounds nei V Common dab I Common mora V Common sole Cuckoo ray V Edible crab I European conaer 2 Assign a color to each species 3 Click Apply 4 End of procedure To display all pie charts in the main view In the Statistics menu check Show all 286 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C xSLL Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XX CABLE AND PIPELINE MANAGEMENT MODULE XX 1 Presentation Hereunder is a brief summary of the functions that are included and those which are not included from the original reference MMS DOS version 4 11 XX 1 1 PROVIDED FUNCTIONS XX 1 1 1 SML Management Database This management is comparable to the functionalities offered by the MMS DOS version SCHEISSEN Selective loading of one or more SMLs system network e Focus on one element of an SML e Rules for displaying SML e Query cable cut consultation Management Creating a SML data leg event and environment e Modifying a SML e Removing a SML e Symbol library management e Cable reference library management EES Import SML from the old MMS DOS format e Importing a S
316. ort 18050 La Bearing Own Ship Cu S TTG Own Ship Curso i D Server Address 127 0 0 1 0 9 Distance Own Ship C Add Delete 9 End of procedure When the Wassp software is launched and is transmitting data SeaXpert stream control module magnifying glass icon checks that binary data has been received XV 3 Configuring Wassp module Step Action 1 Inthe Wassp menu click Settings 2 Open the Data tab Select the stream you have previously created in our example TCP4 WASSP The Wassp mobile is automatically created once you have validated this step Do not select Acquire the position only during recording if you do so the Wassp mobile will only move if the bathymetry recording has been started kl Databases Data Biomass WASSP stream TCP3 Wassp v Apply tide correction to WASSP data Acquire position only while recording Acquire rolling and pitching 3 n Gecdis toolbar select the Wassp menu and click Settings Click the Databases tab Check the Real time recording database option This enables to view the database while it is being recorded It is also possible to display a base that has already been stored by checking it 258 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action among the list that displays below the Real time recording database option x 4 En
317. ose which one you want to display on the screen You can thus display objects having close similarities User Objects Filter From 18 04 2012 00 00 00 r1 To 20 04 2012 00 00 00 Annual period Apply Position Centre 43 32 51463N 007723 74841E A Range Umm Apply Figure 156 User object filter window To configure the filters In the User Objects menu click Define Objects Filter IMPORTING USER OBJECTS When importing an object to Gecdis this object is converted into Gecdis format BE CAREFUL THE AMOUNT OF DOWNLOADED DATA MAY INTERFERE WITH THE SPEED AND FLOW OF THE SOFTWARE TO DISPLAY DATA FURTHERMORE KEEP IN MIND THAT THE NUMBER OF MARKS IS LIMITED TO 1 MILLION ISD M 038G EN September 2014 IX 2 U DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual VII 2 4 1 TurboWin Turbo2000 Import Step You can import user data provided by TurboWin It can be marks areas routes and tracks with or without parameters Once the data is downloaded it is displayed exactly like in TurboWin position of the objects parameters related to each object their colour To import a TurboWin Turbo2000 user object folder Action Inthe System menu click Import User objects and then Turbo 2000 Directory Click to browse the database or the folder with the user object s In the Import area check the boxes corresponding to the objects you want to import the number o
318. otational motion of a ship about the longitudinal axis Example 002 000000 The rotational motion of a ship about the transverse axis Example 001 000000 The depth between the seabed and the keel of the ship This piece of information is displayed if the Depth and Draught pieces of information have already been added So Depth below keel Depth Draught If Submersion has been added then Depth below keel Depth Draught Submersion The distance that is measured between water level and the keel Example 5 000000 m The distance between the water level and the upper point of the ship For this ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Bridge height software Log distance on water software time acquired Log daily software time dead reckoned acquired Run distance software time Run distance daily Software time dead reckoned True wind speed dead reckoned software acquired True wind bearing dead reckoned software acquired Apparent wind speed dead reckoned software acquired Apparent wind bearing dead reckoned software acquired Gecdis v8 User s Manual piece of information to be computed draught must be added Example 8 0000000 m The difference between the Hp parameter in relation to the keel it can be configured clicking the mobile and then the Heights tab and draught So this piece of information
319. our sensors will certainly not be located exactly at the same location as the conning position and the conning position is taken into account to locate the position of the ship For a mobile the corrections will be used especially for the depth and position parameters For a fleet the corrections may concern radars This tab is only available when the Basic mode button is not pressed ER My P523 4 Source Checking Corrections Filtering 8 Position L UTC of position reference L Se e E j 4 Position CN coc Positioning adjustment conning pos 6 sow On the length L 15 0000 m On the beam B 0000 m ps5 ER True heading On the value e M zu TN value sensorw O0 00 00000N aant OU OU Ren charted dept H iBlue Add Delete Close Apply Figure 90 Applying Corrections to a Piece of Information 114 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 AY C x 2L LIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To apply corrections to the depth parameter Step Action 1 In System menu click Settings O and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens 2 Inthe nput Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box click Depth then the Corrections tab 3 Onthe On the length L and On the beam B fields of the Positioning adjustment conning pos area enter the length and beam differences between your sounder and the conning position
320. our display mode and the four colour mode and also allowing anti grounding warnings to be generated ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 317 C LA ES LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Term Definition The isobath above which the ship cannot navigate safely SCAMIN scale minimum The minimum scale after which an object mobile fleet etc is not displayed Sector The object that is inserted by the user to which it is not possible to assign an alarm SENC System Electronic A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by ECDIS for Navigational Chart appropriate use updates to the ENC by appropriate means and other data added by the mariner It is this database that is actually accessed by ECDIS for the display generation and other navigational functions and is the equivalent to an up to date paper chart The SENC may also contain information from other sources Shallow Contour The isobath that gives the limits of the areas that are not as deep as the other ones A part of the seabed in which depth is shallow compared with the surrounding points As this contour is shallow it is considered as dangerous for navigation Equal to Shallow waters SOG Speed Over Ground The speed of the ship over the ground Standard display The information that must be indicated when a chart is displayed for the first time The level of information provided by this display for route planning and verificatio
321. our fire modes are available on SeapiX STV STT SAT SAV Modes can be activated simultaneously leading to successive interlaced fires Each fire mode has its own dedicated acoustic view swath content Important EACH VIEW IS ALSO USED TO CONTROL THE FIRE WHERE FIRE PARAMETERS CAN BE MODIFIED THROUGH RIGHT CLICK SEE BELOW STV mode Sonar Transversal Vertical Specificity Vertical fire like a classical multibeam sounder Used for 276 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual e Bathymetry Hardness recording e Echogram construction e Fish detection User Control Right Click in STV swath view STT mode Sonar Transversal Tiltable Specificity Fire with Front Back adjustable angle Used for e Fish detection e Obstacle detection User Control Right Click in STT swath view SAT mode Sonar Axial Tiltable Specificity Fire with Front Back adjustable angle Used for e Fish detection e Obstacle detection User Control Right Click in SAT swath view SAV mode Sonar Axial Volumetric Specificity Fire with Left Right adjustable scanning Used for Dynamic fish detection User Control Right Click in SAV swath view XVIII 3 2 SEAPIX MENU AND DEDICATED TOOLBARS Module functionalities are available through SeapiX menu and or SeapiX dedicated toolbars if SeaXpert package was installed in SeapiX Mode in SeaXpert setup
322. ource To display data provided by a Netradar you must have previously configured it This means you must have selected the type of Netradar you are using and filled in the configuration fields The NetRadar source source must be configured through the menu Radar Source Configure NetRadar e Main parameters of the Server tab Configuratio Server NetRadar JRC 1 2 JRC 2 2 RTM 1 2 RTM 2 2 4 gt Server settings NetRadar 1 Y Server NetRadar NetRadar JRC NetRadar Selesmar RTM NetRadar Consilium SRT Server IP address Data Port Control Port LAN IP Address Streams with Master Slave s Input From Master Output To Slave s Server played Server Cancel Figure 173 NetRadar settings Server tab 222 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Server settings Server IP address Data Port and Control Port Server played Gecdis v8 User s Manual If several NetRadar boxes are present allows you to select the NetRadar to configure Allows you to configure where to read the radar Port where the data are read Data Port and where the commands are sent Control Port The values of both fields mus be equal If the value of the Data Port field is false no radar image is received If the value of the Control Port field is false no command can be achieved With the Ping button you can validate the connectivity with the radar antenna Important after
323. ouse cursor is inside the area if the cursor is on an area point or border the tooltip will be displayed independently of this parameter v re 2 Area Folder ixBlue Date 2013 06 25 07 51 25 Comment EW Size 4 375 NM e NS Size 1 391 NM e Closed shape v Delete Objects Filter Insert Point Move Point Delete Point Figure 37 Tooltip with commands 46 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 X aL LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Display commands in tooltips parameters e Never commands are never displayed in the tooltip e When mouse is inside commands are displayed in the tooltip when mouse is inside the tooltip e Always commands are always displayed in the tooltip 1 10 2 GENERAL PARAMETERS 11 10 2 1 Active Window In the Windows environment there is always only one active window at any given time This is the window that receives events such as pressing a key or moving the mouse In Gecdis as there may be several windows displayed at the same time it is advisable to set the automatic activation of the window under the mouse cursor by checking the box Activate window under cursor Otherwise the last active window will remain as the operator will designate a not clicking Important THE CONCEPT OF ACTIVE WINDOW IS IMPORTANT FOR MANAGING KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS PARTICULARLY WITH DEAD RECKONING CONTROLS ON A MOBILE THAT ARE IN
324. permits you will have to repeat the step 1 4 End of procedure CU For any further details on your ARCS vendor please contact iXBlue s sales AL department V 3 1 3 Launching ARCS Module Before launching the ARCS module for the first time check that you have the ARCS licences and ARCS chart CD ROMs The first launching of the ARCS module allows you to indicate the location in the hard drive in which charts must be loaded and to install ARCS permits This will be made either when launching Gecdis if the ARCS module is configured as the default chart module or when launching the ARCS module in the software Later you will have to enter your PIN code when launching once again the ARCS module Chart Permits Licence Type Licence and permits altered or nat User Permit available Load the original media Licensee Vessel Mame Host System Mame Fixed Site Figure 129 Chart Permit Installation Dialog Box Before Being Installed To launch the ARCS module for the first time Step Action 1 Launch Gecdis and do one of the following e If SoArcs is the default chart module skip to the following step e f SoArcs is not the default chart module once you have launched Gecdis click the System menu point to Settings Charts Chart Provider and click ARCS Charts ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 163 C X L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action 2
325. perties of a SML e Then from SML properties manage D Consultation Modification LJ SML list of components E Refocusing on the geographical part of the SML L Graphs and profile edition Any SML loaded in memory is displayed in the geographic and in the 3D view if modules layers and SMLs layer are checked in the 3D view configuration List of SMLs The list is managed with a display window this window is non blocking it may be floating or docked to an edge By default it is docked on the lower left edge lt consists of several parts e A title bar including the number of SMLs loaded e Acontrol bar to manage actions of the current selection e A header list organized in columns and used for sorting e Content of the list Hide Select Proximity All Create Edit gt Delete Centre on Cable In service 17 04 1997 6086 46 km TAT 13G TAT 13 MASTIC BEACH PENMARC H Cable In service 04 03 1997 157 892 km TAT13H Cable In service 04 03 1997 5620 35 km TAT 08 TATS D1 TUCKERTON BU Cable In service 15 01 1998 532965 km TAT 08 TAT8 D2 WIDEMOUTH BU Cable In service 03 05 1988 358195 km TAT 8 D3 Cable In service 04 03 1997 252 925 km TAT 09 TAT9 F1 PENNANT POINT BUL Cable In service 04 03 1997 1087 31 km TAT 09 TAT9 F2 MANAHAWNKIM BUT Cable In service 04 03 1997 1340 3 km TAT 9 F3 Ib e omm ome moa ER Fa Et EIN denn oe Figure 179 SMLs list The color of a line depends of its current load e In black SML displ
326. ppearance Track Symbol Label Dr tr rg rett P TELELE L PERI Ok Gecdis v8 User s Manual 1000000 Cancel 3 Check or uncheck the Uses default appearance box depending on whether you want to use or not the default appearance that you have defined for the mobiles see section IV 5 1 page 84 e f you have selected the Uses default appearance box The appearance that have been defined in the sub menu Appearance Mobiles gt Appearance Symbol tab will be defined e lf you have not selected the Uses default appearance box 4 Click Visible if you want the default mobile appearance to be visible e f you have not checked Visible you will not be able to see the mobiles contained in your fleet e f you have checked Visible 9 Select ECDIS Representation or not depending on whether you want the appearance of your fleet to follow the ECDIS standard representation e f you have selected ECDIS representation the mobiles of the fleet will be represented as defined in the ECDIS standard e f you have not selected ECDIS representation 6 Select a color and a symbol clicking on the arrow of these fields and check the Expanded box if you want the fleet to be expanded its size will be twice larger HB 8 Aloly L lle mL d CHE en 0 WW eis 12 amp KAI 7 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 91 x LIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP C LL SENSES The list of symbols is as follows D e DEE D M
327. pping routes main ports and harbors at a wide range of scales e An update CD ROM that contains all updates managed by the UKHO These updates are cumulative i e every week a new CD ROM is produced with new updates from the past week At regular intervals the chart CD ROMs are brought up to date with updates resulting in a new edition ARCS Navigator is fully compatible with a wide range of Electronic Chart Systems ECS and Electronic Chart Display amp Information Systems ECDIS V 3 1 2 Registering ARCS Charts 162 When buying Gecdis with ARCS option iXBlue sends you a user permit made up of 16 alphanumerical character and a PIN code made up of 4 numbers To annually subscribe to ARCS charts you must tell your vendor which charts you want to order and give him your user permit Then you will receive two files The first one gives information about the user and the second one deals with the charts that have been licensed to the user Those files will allow you to register your licenses Note that you will also receive the chart CD ROMs ISD M 038G EN September 2014 X aL L E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To register ARCS licenses Step Action 1 Send your ARCS vendor your user permit and the charts you wish to order 2 Your vendor will send you two files allowing you to install permits Now you can launch the ARCS module see section V 3 1 3 page 163 3 df you buy other ARCS chart
328. presentation if you want the mobile to be represented as indicated in the ECDIS standard e f you have checked ECDIS representation the mobiles will be represented as indicated in the ECDIS standard e f you have not checked ECDIS representation 4 Select a color and a symbol clicking on the arrow of these zones and check the Expanded box if you want your mobile to be expanded see section IV 5 2 page 87 Note SCAMIN is the abbreviation for scale minimum When you check this box you indicate that the mobile or fleet will not be displayed after the scale that is defined in the zone below this check box For example if 100000 is indicated you will not be able to see your mobile or fleet if the scale is inferior to 1 100000 9 Click the Label tab This tab operates in the same hierarchical way as the Symbol tab Track Symbol Label Pasttrack Vectors Miscellaneous v AMisble v SCAMIN v ECDIS representation 100000 OK Cancel 6 Check the Visible box if you want the label of your default mobile to be visible in the main view e f you have not checked Visible you will not be able to see the label of your ship in the main view e f you have checked Visible ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 85 C X E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step ip 86 Action Choose whether you want your label to be transparent or not if you don t check Transparent the label will be highlig
329. procedure V 2 14 1 Consulting Information on a Cell To display information on a cell Step Action 1 Select an object of the cell 2 Inthe Object Information window click on the area corresponding to the cell 3 End of procedure Producer Name of the hydrographic organism that provided the cell If the first two letters of the cell s name does not correspond to any of the identified organisms the window displays the following comment Non official data Edition Issue Date Update application Date Usage Compilation Scale Vertical Datum Sounding Datum 156 The number of publication and update of the cell The date of publication Usage of the cell Overview General Coastal Approach Harbour or Berthing This is the default scale of ENC charts Data is compiled with this scale The compilation scale is different from the scale that is only relative to the display So the value of the field does not change whereas the value of the Scale field may change if you zoom in or out on the chart Chart datum level to which elevations and heights are referenced An arbitrary reference plan to which heights of tide and depths are referenced ISD M 038G EN September 2014 IX 3L Li DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual V 2 15 UNIVERSAL POLAR STEREOGRAPHIC PROJECTION Labeling conventions UPS conversion examples UUU Optionally universal polar stereographic projec
330. quipment Ship s heading measurements devices e Gyro compass one or two e Magnetic compass e GPS gyro compass e Inertial unit Speed measuring devices 26 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 Ix 2L LIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e Single axis speed logs e Dual axis speed logs e Radio navigation equipment e Satellite navigation equipment 1 6 3 3 Manual Correction User inputs corrections for the position to adjust the position of the antennas relative to conning 1 6 4 STEERING MODES Steering includes all the different operation modes for steering in order to turn the ship through planned voyage harbor to harbor e Hand steering e Trackpilot steering e Waypoint approach mode 1 6 4 1 Hand Steering Hand steering mode e Steering wheel 1 6 4 2 Trackpilot Steering e Operator sets the required heading of the vessel e Turn radius is also set by operator e Turn is initiated by operator e The navigation system displays required heading radius rate of turn and predicted turn 1 6 4 3 Waypoint Approach Mode e The system will follow the planned track to next waypoint e When reaching the next wheel over the system alerts operator e The system performs the turn at planned radius 1 6 5 MONITORING Monitoring is a continuous check of navigation data user actions and performances of the system Part of the monitoring is also the display of electroni
331. r 2014 i Z Yd P WW DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Term TM True Heading True Wind TTG Time To Go TTG to wapiti TTG au wheel over TTM Tracked target message Turn radius starboard Update User Object Filter UPS CO lt lt JJ Vertical Datum lt g VTG Waypoint Waypoint ETA Wheel over Wheel over ETA XTE Cross Track Error ZDA Gecdis v8 User s Manual Definition True Motion abbreviation The heading relative to geographical north which is the angle resulting from the crossing of the geographical north axis and the ship s headline The wind vector in relation to the earth s surface For a moving object it is the vector sum of the apparent wind and the velocity of the object The time value used to reach either a waypoint or a wheel over The time estimated to reach the next waypoint The time estimated to reach the next wheel over The sentence that allows to acquire data associated to a tracked target relative to the Own Ship The radius of the circle of a ship when turning starboard e g to reach the new leg of a route Update enabling management of the display of cartographic objects This option lets the user create new point objects create new chart areas annotate cartographic objects delete cartographic objects relocate point objects cancel updates by erasing them The operation that consists in selecting user objects wi
332. r s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES VIIL 4 CUSTOMIZING RADAR DATA DISPLAY ccsssscccssssecccssseeensseeeceeseeeeusnseecensseeenesseeeessesenasesees 228 VIIL 4 1 Choosing Ihe Ree CC 228 VIII 4 2 Adjusting the display in the view 229 VIIL 4 3 Controlling Radar Data Display 229 VIII 4 4 Optimizing the Radar Video Display 230 IX REPLAY MODULE rosii etian Dessus te ea che eaciu sons a ecd U sur edus su EOD Ee isa DEDE USUS 232 IX 1 CONFIGURING LAUNCHING THE REPLAY MODULE eene rennen nnn nnne nnn 232 X TOEF MODULE 42 22 m ntnisdu duca eee eens eee ism ee lesu eee eee 234 X 1 CONSULTING TIDAL GAUGES AND TIDAL STREAMS eere inna arua nnda 234 X 2 TIDAL CURVE S eae TT 235 X 3 CONFIGURING THE TIDAL STREAM DISPLAY 2 cccssssecccssseecccsseeeceeseseceesseeeeenseeenansessneesseseoaas 237 X 4 CONTROL OF TIDAL STREAM DATE e eene nnn anna anneau RR RR RR ERR R RR RR RAN RR RR RR DRAN RR 4 Ran maa dA 238 X 5 REFERENCE STATION MT E 240 X 6 SHIP HEIGHT OF TIDE INFORMATION sssccccssseeccssseeeceeseeecesseeeenenseeenenseeeceseeeeenseseunsessnoasees 240 XL WEATHER IO Eege 242 AL DATA DOWNLOAD E 242 RUZ PRES SUPE csse EEEn EEEE ene EE nE ERENER 242 POS WIND WEE 244 XII SEDIMENTS MODULE ccsccsccssccecnsscnccecnssnuscnscnscnscnscnsensensensenssnusausauscusensenssnesnessuss 245 MIRNEE LUE E 245 XII 2 ere lel ATION Mc 245 XIII BATHYME
333. r the edge of the view e Geographic scrolling to the north west when the cursor is near the edge of the view a Geographic scrolling to the south when the cursor is near the edge of the view a Geographic scrolling to the south east when the cursor is near the edge of the view nm Geographic scrolling to the south west when the cursor is near the edge of the view m Geographic scrolling to the west when the cursor is near the edge of the view ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 L C X EL LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES ECS ECDIS mode mode Window zoom in by pressing Shift key amp Zoom out by pressing Ctrl Shift keys UsiNG VIEWS Gecdis screen includes three default locations for views and windows above on the right and below When you display a view or a window for the first time it is located by default on one of these three locations You can then move and resize it in order to match with your needs displaying specific views on specific locations You can locate two views side by side or one above the other In the latter case the first view is displayed above the second one This window management is handled by the display contexts in View menu see III 7 page 69 and all positions of the windows are saved To move a view Step Action 1 Click the blue title bar of the view you want to move and drag it holding down the left button of the mouse 2 If you
334. ra aas 76 IV 3 THE MOBILES EE Ee 76 IN A ENT 78 IV 4 OW Ship Specific Alarms wiccccsccescixeciascsenedexedsasssncabaraneedtucanececnsdenchenedseawbaesseccbucauseeesedescdedes 78 IV 4 1 1 Posee EEN 78 IV 4 1 2 Inconsistent POSITIONS 0 cccccccccccccccecccececececccecucueueneneeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeneneneneuensuensnsuansnsnsnensnenanans 79 IV 4 1 3 Inconsistent Depths 80 PE E KE et EE E 81 IV 4 2 1 mileleizio ico mM 82 IV 4 2 2 PAIS TIC OCH ON EE 82 IV 4 2 3 AIS Message Filierimg e eiisseiiiesseiisesee sese nnus n annuas a sha assa aaa ASA A RR ARAS Ra Asa saa asa 84 IV 5 REPRESENTATION oia 84 IV 5 1 Defining a Mobile Apopearance nennen nnn nn nnn nnns 84 IV 5 2 Standard Hepresentaton nennen nennen nnne nnns nnns ann nn nens 87 IV 5 2 1 E ere ener 88 IV 5 2 2 AIS and ARPA Bee 88 IV 5 2 3 PAS VOC eg 88 PF SY E 89 IV 5 2 5 PROV NCO EE 90 IV 5 3 Defining a Specific Appearance for a Mobile or aleet 90 IV 6 CONFIGURATION ER RUE 94 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 IX Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 6 1 Jett un Le EE 94 IV 6 1 1 EE ere ge 94 IV 6 1 2 Mobiles Jntormmaton nn ahhh snna nnns snas ann nsns nana 97 WO E 100 IV 6 2 1 Adding and Configuring a COMMUNICATION Port 100 IV 6 2 2 Adding and Configuring a NET etream enne 101 IV 6 2 3 Adding and Configuring a FILE Stream
335. rea of the window to be shown when viewing other tabs in the SML list of issues profile and diagrams e Filename SML filename must be defined and unique for system e Type depending of SML type D For cable Coaxial or Optical QO For pipeline Gas Oil or Water e System Name system official name e Segment name system segment name General Properties These properties are located in the left part of the general description page e Landing country n 1 the country s initial landing or tip 1 e Landing country n 2 the country s initial landing or the tip 2 e Cable ship name of the cable ship which did the link e Laying date The date of the link installation Also used to determine the SML status e Starting date The date of the connection ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 295 az LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual e Withdrawal date withdrawal date of the bond also used to determine the SML status e Initial length between stations initial cable length between stations e Initial length between extremities initial cable length between ends or up link points ranges e Repeater count e Equalizer count e Specific gear count e Recovery operation end indent marker of cables e Armoured length armoured initial length cable e Buried length buried initial cable length Transmission properties These properties only useful for cable type SML are located on the right side of the general description page e Power feeding current remo
336. reate a point object e Create an area e Annotate an object e Mark a chart object as deleted This is a specific kind of annotation e Move a point object of the official chart This object is then marked as deleted and a new identical object is created on the new position To consult an existing chart object You should select it on the chart by clicking right on it or by clicking on it while holding the Ctrl key in Centre mode The Chart Information window shows in its lower part several buttons The list of buttons varies if the object is from the official chart or has been manually created Cell fB200000 Position 4gesa sn3 N O05 23 985 W Buoy shape pillar Colour red white Colour pattern vertical stripes Fog signal Category of fog signal whistle Light Light characteristic long flashing Colour white Signal group 1 Signal period 10 Radar transponder beacon Category of radar transponder beacon racon radar transponder beacon Signal group iB Radar wave length 0 03 x Move object Annotate abject Mark as deleted Depth area x Cell fB200000 Depth range value 1 100 Depth range value 2 200 Depth area x Cell GB200000 Depth range value 1 s0 Depth range value 2 100 Local Chart Information x Compilation scale Ssooo00 Vertical datum Mean high water springs Figure 111 The chart information window ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 139 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT S
337. ring and or a radar range e the second one displays information about the fix the bearing range between the reference position of the Own Ship and allows to perform several operations Fix point opecifies in a graphical way a specific position at a specific time of the fix point Whenever you click the button UTC is displayed in orange Observed point at current time Observed point at a specific time Removes all bearings and radar range circles that have been added with the Piloting Fix dialog box Other bearings made with the Bearing option for example are not removed Locate the ship in the fix point Bearings are removed 180 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Piloting Fix E x New line of position Landmark position Je Cwnship position 51 43 1 4 N 004 05 041 E UTC of measure 07 10 03 Pip v Bearing line Add Range marker Fix point Bearing Fix Pott Range Seb EP Reset Clase Figure 145 The Piloting Fix Dialog Box To make a fix point Action Click the Navigation menu and then Piloting Fix The Piloting Fix dialog box is displayed the Own Ship Position field indicates the coordinates of the Own Ship Click Pip when you want to measure Do one of the following e To make a bearing check the Bearing box e To measure a radar range check the Range marker box Click Fl and then
338. rm on mobile inside or outside an area aN Alarm on mobile crossing a line User Objects rac You E 1 E y Ww ow OK Cancel Figure 27 Configuring Alarms To configure alarm display Step Action 1 Click the System menu click Settings and then General Configuration 2 Inthe Configuration dialog box click the Alarms tab 3 Check the alarms you want to display in the alarm bar 4 To go back to the default configuration click Default button 9 Validate and close dialog box by clicking OK or just validate by clicking Apply 6 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 ER a E DE Il 7 1 7 1 38 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual 4 EP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES The Users Gecdis can be used by many different kinds of users each one having specific needs By default four groups of users are defined Administrators Captains Navigators and Guests On one hand the Administrators group can use all Gecdis functionalities without any limitation On the other hand the other groups are associated to specific access rights you can configure with a checkboxes system The three groups have different access rights to commands So when you will assign a command to the Supervisor group only this group will be able to use it However if you assign one of them to the Navigator group the Supervisor group will also be able to use it and assigning one of them to the Guest group will allow the Captain and
339. rocedures Icons GE The Note icon indicates that the following information is of particular interest and should be read with care Important THE IMPORTANT MENTION INDICATES THAT THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION SHOULD BE READ TO FORBID OR PREVENT A PRODUCT DYSFUNCTION OR A FAULTY OPERATION OF THE EQUIPMENT The Caution icon indicates that the following information should be read to forbid or prevent product damage 4 The Warning icon indicates that possible personal injury or death could result from failure to follow the provided recommendation vi ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 W je P S DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual Table of Contents l GETTING STARTED E 1 Li EE 1 l 1 1 Requested Configuration enema nnn nnns nnns nnns 1 m NE ee E 1 EM FOCI E 2 l 1 2 AS aa O ra IMIS tala WOM BEE 2 1 1 3 Launching and Closing Gecdis cccccccseeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeceeeesssuaeueeceeeesssaaaeeeeeeees 4 1 2 HOW TO USE THE EQUIPMENT ee eege eegen 6 EN The Keyboard KE e Tute CC 6 12 1 1 Gecdis Standard Ghortcuts sessiles esae nn naar nnns nsns aa aras nnns sana 6 l 2 2 miae c T 8 221 Geographie el EE 9 1 2 3 TRE Oe EE 9 1 3 GECDIS e TT 10 1 3 1 baten mu m 10 1 3 1 1 The Main View 10 EO INEMU BD ETE E m H 11 CON B 2 E E X 12 PORE TS ecd
340. rpolation limit 10 00 m v Maximum precision 0 00000 m OK Cancel To configure the reception of bathymetry data Action In the Bathy menu select Bathy Data The Bathy Data dialog box displays so you can choose the provider of bathymetry data You can also fix the limit of interpolation and the maximum precision End of procedure Xill 3 Database 290 Bathymetry visual representation done with colored surfaces uses information provided by user databases User databases gather all sounding points acquired by your devices You can thus create your own databases Note that a database requires at least one sounding point to be created ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual e Commercial databases are used to display existing bathymetry data i e acquired sounding points Both types of databases can be used as bathymetry data providers for 2D and 3D display You can choose to take into account or not the sounding points of each database The Database configuration window is the following Charts Acoustic Analyses Weather Radar Sedirr v Surface v saline Unsafe Area E Bathy Display Settings Bathy Data Bathy Database Source Recording Display Points Select Points Pa Configuration Source to choose the data source for the recording in many cases this source will be your ship Record
341. rted E5400488 000 Ed 3 0 issued by ES Magnetic variation Deleted Imported E5400488 001 Ed 3 1 issued by ES Depth contour Inserted Imported 5400488 002 Ed 3 2 issued by ES Magnetic variation inserted OSES d Depth ar Inserted Imported E5400488 003 Ed 3 3 issued by ES Dac a 2ueited Imported E54004838 004 Ed 3 4 issued by ES Underwater awash rock Inserted Imported E5400488 005 Ed 3 5 issued by ES Underwater awash rock Inserted Imported ES400488 006 Ed 3 6 issued by ES Underwater awash rock Inserted Imported E5400483 007 Ed 3 7 issued by ES Imported E5400488 006 Ed 3 8 issued by ES Imported E5400483 009 Ed 3 9 issued by ES e Status of the import Details of the cell content Imported E5400483 003 Ed 2 3 issued by ES Qualitv of data Deleted Coverage Deleted Navigational system of marks Deleted Quality of data Inserted Coverage Inserted Navigational system of marks Inserted Underwater awash rack Deleted Underwater awash rack Deleted Underwater awash rack Deleted Depth area Deleted Magnetic variation Deleted Depth contour Inserted Magnetic variation Inserted Depth area Inserted Depth area Inserted Underwater awash rack Inserted Underwater avwash rack Inserted Underwater avwash rack Inserted Figure 106 Import report To display the detail of a cell select a cell The list of the cell s user objects display with the action that has been performed on each object The action can be e Inserted the obje
342. rts E The available sub menu System Settings Charts Chart Provider allows you to control the cartographic modules installed and possibly change the module to use e The modules performing various tasks ranging from database management to the management of I O mobile navigation tools special views etc Unlike the cartographic modules Gecdis can load as much as the license allows Some are dependent on the other such as Route module does not load if the User module does not The vast majority of Gecdis menus are built entirely by these modules UU The About Gecdis window allows you to check the number of modules used by clicking Miss in the window and using the mouse wheel 1 4 6 BACK UP The backup functionality allows you to backup into your desired location the hard disk a removable disk etc Gecdis settings and data Important SOME FILES ARE EXCLUDED FROM BACKUP e THE LICENSE FILES e BATHYMETRIC DATABASES IN USE FOR RECORD OR DISPLAY This backup may be useful in the following cases e For a specific reason Gecdis suddenly stops and configuration data have not been saved e A unit into your hard disk has a breakdown 22 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual To run a backup Step Action 1 Inthe System menu click Run backup The Backup window opens Backup data in Backup only settings 2 Choose to backup only the settings or settings data by click
343. rview toggle command This view is the perfect complement to the main view to geographically locate The context menu for this view can make it on the main view or ship and set its scale respectively relative or absolute System Display Mobile Navigation User Objects Bathy Charts Radar View Mobiles List Arp Display Hide Appearance Configuration Track Start Stop Colour i Select with cursor Realtime sort 7 ixXBlue l System l Pilot l Position passerelle 51 03 863 N 001 19 371 E Vecteur fond 18 0 kn 192 9 Vecteur surface 18 0 kn 192 9 Cap vrai 192 9 22 0m Profondeur D 5 fart Uvervicw Warning You didn t chaose to detect all tt Nam Age 50G COG CPA TCPA Postion Le Os CibleO1 3 0s SC H er deno dob 51 04 894 N 001 20 365 E Cible02 2 0s 31 0kn 199 4 1 22 Os 51 04 508 N 001 20 957 E Che 1 0s 35 0kn 194 7 1 23 Os 51 03 962 N 001 21 295 E Cible04 12 0s 40 7kn 200 2 1 18 Os 51 03 552 N 001 21 169 E Cible05 11 0s 42 6kn 200 2 1 07 Os 51 03 169 N 001 20 630 E A Cible06 10 0s 42 2kn 194 8 1685m Os 51 03 050 N 001 19 903 E A CibleO 9 05 32 4kn 196 1 1352m Os 51 03 176 N 001 19 029 E Cible08 ER 32 0kn 187 7 1296m Qs 51 03 532 N 001 18 428 E L Cible09 7 0s 29 8kn 195 3 1500m Qs 51 04 053 N 001 18 098 E 4 gt gt 1 14 27 12 B 51 03 863 N 0
344. ry voltage DEN X X Submersion Altitude e X acquired value e C computed value e num numeric value D 3 3 X AIS VDM Complementary Information Table Here is a summary of the different information from only the sentence AIS VDM D 3 4 IXMloFormatEx Module Information Table Here is a summary of information from different formats supported by IXMloFormatEx module C Pa NA ADOC TNI C al anaha OA b VA lt x NI kan EA EA Cyr enr Zi J Vi U0 U d Al WILT IW e Lan aL LU I JU I O O E V sel K KILKE IJ Vc ZU f C X i E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual P INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES ARGOS ARGOS AUSSAGUEL DSNP FURUNO LHG SATLINK BAP DR Pos report Syletrack FAR2000 Pos rep BAP num num num num num num mowie mowie mobie target mobie buoy SOW e x acquired value e CG computed value e num numeric value This chapter presents the different equipments for managing system own ship and trawl net informations The tables summarize the different possible sources of information The ranking of sentences indicates the priority if multiple automatic reception For software column here are the abbreviations e c calculated value e e estimated value e m maintained value at a regular rate e s software value The software only informations are not presented here ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 391 C A L_ LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT
345. s Sometimes a chart might not have a panel whose Panel Number is 0 In such cases the chart gathers independent charts So there is no main panel Chart List EI Ember name sk ton Pal it Panel inf 93 Cabo de Santa Maria to Cabo Trafalgar RCI 16 03 2 Cromer Knoll and the Outer Banks Centre 53 16 977 N 001 46 882 E 99 Entrances to Rivers in Guyana and Suriname UP 25 05 2 Sec 75000 05 Cromer Knoll and the Outer Banks Ta 17 02 21 e 106 Cromer to Smiths Knoll DC 28 10Jat 53 04 022 N 001 11 886 E o Q 91 1 107 Approaches to the River Humber RC1 30 09 2 ay E GE 108 Approaches to The Wash RC1 21 10 26 53 04 022 N 002 21 878 E 109 River Humber and the Rivers Ouse and Trent RC1 22 06 2 110 Westkapelle to Stellendam and Maasvlakte RC1 23 12 21 111 Berwick upon Tweed to the Farne Islands RC1 28 11 21 112 Terschellinger Gronden to Harlingen RCI 14 09 21 115 Moray Firth RCL 30 12 21 118 Ports in the Gulf of Genoa RC4 23 12 19 xl d i epes zcckese ba Ir egen nA 27 nnio 4 ot Open Figure 131 Charts and Chart Panels To open the Chart List dialog box Click the System menu select Settings Charts and then Chart Catalogue To sort a column in the list of charts Click the name of the column you want to sort In the column you have just sorted an up arrow is displayed in case of an ascending sort and a down arrow is displayed in case of a descending sort 166 ISD M 038G EN
346. s the information bar the information pages etc Most gathered in the View menu This menu allows you to choose to display or not each one of them TIE Close Ctrl F4 Chart in Full Screen Fiz Display Contexts k Toolbar 1 Toolbar 2 Black Bax w Chart Overview Chart 2 Channel view Sonar View Critical Information k Custom Information a Filok view Figure 58 The View Menu ISD M 038G EN September 2014 67 68 IX aL LIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Here are the main commands SeaXpert Station SeaXpert Folder iXBlue Close allows you to close the window that has focus except for the main view Please note that this command cannot be the desired result when the software is configured to automatically activate the window under the mouse cursor see section II 10 2 1 page 47 Chart in Full Screen allows you to maximize or restore the size of the main view toggle command Display Contexts allows you to display a configuration of Gecdis display that has been previously set see section Il page 69 Toolbar 1 allows you to display close the horizontal toolbar toggle command See section 1 3 1 5 page 13 Toolbar 2 allows you to display close the vertical toolbar toggle command Black Box allows you to display close the dialog box toggle command to check the event history See section III 5 2 page 64 Chart Overview allows you to display close the chart ove
347. s Database dialog box The dialog box lists all updates and offers you to accept or reject them Note that the report area is available only when importing data and remains displayed during all the session Charts Database ES Charts History Permits SA Certificate Last Import Name dition Usage Scale Issue Date Application Center on Cell BESVLBNK Coastal 1 90 000 26 03 2010 Approach 1 45 000 26 03 2010 Harbour 1 22 000 06 07 2010 Harbour Harbour ES300474 Coastal 1 90 000 25 06 2010 Step 06 04 2009 06 04 2009 12 10 2009 Harbour Approach Approach Harbour General General General General Coastal Coastal Coastal Coastal Coastal Coastal Coastal Coastal Coastal 1 12 000 1 12 000 1 4000 1 4 000 1 45 000 1 45 000 1 12 000 1 700 000 1 700 000 1 700 000 1 700 000 1 90 000 1 90 000 1 90 000 1 90 000 1 90 000 1 90 000 1 90 000 1 90 000 1 90 000 17 05 2010 Q2 09 2009 12 02 2010 23 03 2010 05 07 2010 06 07 2010 06 07 2010 07 07 2010 22 04 2010 25 06 2010 26 05 2010 12 07 2010 12 01 2010 14 06 2010 20 05 2010 14 06 2010 18 06 2010 02 06 2010 29 07 2010 09 08 2010 01 10 2008 02 09 2009 12 02 2010 23 03 2010 05 07 2010 06 07 2010 06 07 2010 24 06 2008 12 08 2005 09 07 2008 28 07 2008 28 05 2010 22 09 2009 04 04 2008 26 11 2008 19 05 2004 21 05 2004 27 10 2008 16 12 2008 22 11 2006 Import Commercial Exchange Set Import Cataloque
348. s for a modification see Modification of the course and elements Important AFTER VALIDATION OF SML TYPE THIS TYPE CANNOT BE CHANGED XX 2 2 8 SML removing From the SMLs list see List of SMLs or a query see XX 2 2 5 the Delete button removes the SMLs selected A confirmation window is used to prevent unwanted deletion Figure 196 SML removing validation window XX 2 2 9 SML shifting From a query see XX 2 2 5 the Shift button shifts the selected SML Offset parameters are entered in a separate window v Latitude Longitude Bearing Range Figure 197 SML PL shifting window 306 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 AVi C x dl UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XX 2 2 10 SML export From the SMLs list see List of SMLs or a query see XX 2 2 5 the Export button exports oMLs in different formats The exported files contain informations regarding cable bodies i e repeaters bus joints SML export in Each SML is a file exportable in Microsoft Excel Microsoft Excel file To avoid any risk of inconsistency the text csv Character Separated Value is used RTF files Each exported SML corresponds to a RIF file The RTF file is composed of the same data than the previously mentioned CSV file meaning that the data is arranged in character separated columns inside the document DXF file Each exported SML corresponds to a DXF file representing the geometry of the
349. s passed the following alarm is generated only in the black box 78 SD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Collision risk avoided with x CPA y TCPA z Where x is the dangerous mobile for the Own Ship y is the CPA and z is the TCPA between the Own Ship and the former dangerous mobile Own Ship Specific Alarms Target AIS Alarms S0 06 N reser EES Ee le misa piin 9000 5 7 v Enable Minimum Distance to Pass DMP 1 00000 NM DMP Timeout TDMP 3min 00s M ov Start target track on anticollision risk HIRTEN 27n nonataigerous DEER Inconsistent Position o peaareen A Enable d Maximum Distance between ships ELP 200 00 m A A Inconsistent Depth i i er pas Enable 1 i i i 20 00 m SO U4 N EE i Si E j i 10 00 I j e i Dangerous AIS Periodic report 30s 3 OK Cancel Apply lr DR roi on0 05 00w o00 02 50wW oo0 00 00 000 02 SO0E 10 15 49 B 50 04 158 N 000 04 322 W 08 13 37 A Own Ship Collision risk with Fleet 01 Dangerous AIS CPA 641 m TEPA 2min 50s V ACK M Figure 68 Anti collision alarm To use anti collision Step Action 1 Inthe System menu click Settings UO and mobiles and then Alarms The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Own Ship Specific Alarms tab 3 In Anticollision are
350. select Bathy Database and then Display Points 2 Once all the points are displayed click Select Points in order to check those to delete 3 Once the points are selected click Delete Selected Points 4 End of procedure To configure bathymetry data to display Step Action 1 Inthe Bathy menu select Bathy Database and then Configuration and check the options to display 2 Click OK 3 End of procedure 204 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 XSLUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To import bathymetry data Step Action 1 In TEXT format e Inthe System menu click Import and then Bathy Data e Click Import From Text File 2 In Turbo format e Inthe System menu click Import and then Bathy Data e Click Import From TurboWin 3 End of procedure To visualize the bathymetry data you have imported perform the procedure described in section XIII 2 to activate the database and then the procedure to configure the bathymetry data to display see above ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 293 In SeaXpert the 3D view is a representation of the screen taking into account depth values 3D view representation lies on all available depth spots in the chart given by sensors marks and tracks for which a depth sensor must have been defined 3D view Bathymetry x E wy 10m Range at z 0m Bmax 30 7m ba 2x 1 1 0 4738NM 1 120NM luin mmm Iy Toolbar
351. sh to put the centre of the sector Drag the mouse to make a circle As you drag the mouse sector s radius and angle are displayed Click and do one of the following e Forthe angle to represent the first angle of the sector move the mouse clockwise ISD M 038G EN September 2014 2L LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action e For the angle to represent the last angle of the sector move the mouse counter clockwise 4 Click once again and drag the mouse to define sector s width 9 End of procedure To create a circle Step Action 1 Click the User Object menu and then Create Circle then click in the main view where you want to insert the circle drag down your mouse to create a circle and then click The properties of the circle you have just created are displayed in the New Circle dialog box 2 Inthe General tab enter a name for this circle in the Name field a date in the Date field the position of the centre of the circle and the radius 3 Select a Colour a Pattern and a Line and if you want enter a Comment 4 If you want to assign an alarm click the Alarms tab 9 When the circle is defined click OK 6 End of procedure VI 8 Text To create a text Step Action 1 Click User Objects menu and then Create Text and then click in the main view where you want to insert a text 2 The Text dialog box looks like a typical text editor In the blank
352. sign several mobiles to your ship e g the one representing your GPS and the other one dead reckoning The Own Ship with upper cases is the main representation of this ship that will be taken as the reference For example when a mobile is defined as the Own Ship you will only be able to create an event for this one To assign a mobile as the Own Ship Important YOU CAN DEFINE SEVERAL MOBILES FOR YOUR SHIP BUT ONLY ONE MOBILE WILL BE DEFINED AS THE OWN SHIP Step Action 1 Click Mobile menu and then Open Mobile List 2 Inthe list of mobiles select a mobile then click on Own Ship 3 End of procedure To set the parameters of your Own Ship Important IT IS IMPORTANT TO SET THE CHARACTERISTICS OF YOUR SHIP Step Action 1 Click System Settings I O and Mobiles and then Own Ship Characteristics 2 Inthe Own Ship Characteristics dialog box set the parameters to change the default information with information relative to your ship 3 End of procedure IV 2 1 SIZES The Sizes tab allows you to configure the size of the Own Ship If you click Outline Filename a list of example files is displayed An example file can define very accurate measurements for your ship You can change an outline file C If you want to create a ship s outline refer to appendix E page 338 that describes the A m fields parameters to enter in order to create an outline 74 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 iv C N
353. signed to the largest arrow 4 You can click Auto if you want the arrow width to be calculated according to the streams visible on the main view The largest value is assigned to the largest arrow of the main view 9 Inthe Type scrolling list select your desired display for your desired display for the tidal stream and choose a colour in the Colour field 6 When finished click OK Set Default allows you to go back to the default values 7 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 Z3 X 3 m LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES X 4 Control of tidal stream date The date control allows you to control the date that is taken into account to display the tidal stream and tide gauge on the screen So when this date is modified the arrows and gauges used to define the tidal stream and tidal gauge change accordingly EI January 2014 14 15 56 Automatic Refresh 1 January 2014 date specified for the tidal stream display UTC 14 15 56 z UTC specified for the tidal stream display To display information one hour before the current displayed date To display information 15 minutes before the current displayed date To reset the date and time When you click this icon the system date and time are displayed P To display information 15 minutes after the current displayed date To display information one hour after the current displayed date Automatic Refresh When checke
354. splay Hide 2X Delete Export New Folder Created Centre H Ship cari Line 22 01 2009 15 10 41 51 07 526 N 001 21 489 E 0 amp O Marks 4 e Clearing Line 22 01 2009 15 10 19 51906 255 N 001 20 023 E P iud e Clearing Line 22 01 2009 14 57 30 51 08 292 N 000 52 517 E o Bae y e Clearing Line 22 01 2009 14 57 23 51907 442 N 000 58 384 E e Bo rod e Clearing Line 20 01 2009 15 58 27 50 58 764 N 001938247 E Cl Deleted Objects Spe e Clearing Line 16 01 2009 16 20 35 50 58 287 N 001 28 406 E e Sector 16 01 2009 15 28 52 51900243 N 001 23 476 E End of procedure To edit a clearing line Action Step i Do one of the following e Select the clearing line you want to edit and click the Properties context sensitive button on the right of the screen e Select the clearing line you want to edit right click it and click Properties in the pop up menu 2 9 4 In the Clearing Line dialog box enter a position in the Position field and enter a bearing in the Bearing field Position Ei OU S6208N 001 1 44190E H Bearing 047 40 1 3217 NM OK Cancel Click OK End of procedure 176 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 VI 3 IX LL DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Step Gecdis v8 User s Manual To delete a clearing line Do one of the fol
355. ssigned to a mobile that inherits information from another mobile which includes this piece of information it will be inherited in the first mobile as well To inherit information from a mobile Step Action 1 In System menu click Settings O and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens 2 Inthe left hand panel of the nput Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box select the mobile you want to inherit information 116 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 Gecdis v8 User s Manual e xaLue DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action 3 Inthe Parent mobile scrolling list select the mobile from which you want to inherit information 4 End of procedure WS Some route or AIS system informations are automatically inherited the Own Ship IV 6 7 SENSOR SYNTHESIS The nput Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box allows you to configure system information streams that allow to receive information from sensors and mobiles and fleets The configuration may be complex and numerous It is not possible to display all of them at the same time in the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box that is why it can be useful to sum up all of them in the same location i e an HTML based synthesis Basic mode Realtime Print Input Output Summary basic System Value Source Stream Calc rate UTC 09 07 2013 10 42 27 Software Distance Own Ship Cursor xX XXXxX
356. stance expressed in meters up to 1852 meters and then nautical miles e When the last waypoint is reached the following alarm displays Waypoint x reached 202 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X3 UE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES To switch in route monitoring mode Step Action 1 Inthe Navigation menu click Start Track Keeping to display the route monitoring information To do so the ship must be inside the lane of the route 2 If you want to stop the route monitoring click Navigation and then Stop Track Keeping 3 When you switch to monitoring mode the Pilot view is displayed 4 End of procedure VII 3 7 THE PiLOT VIEW This view includes the following items e TO name destination waypoint name e TO NEXT course next leg course Corresponds to the Route field of the Route Properties dialog box This value is also indicated in red colour in the middle of each leg it is corrected to the nearest whole number e NEXT name next destination waypoint name e Heading to steer heading to steer to follow the selected route This value takes into account the drift e XTE current cross track error from Own Ship position to the route lane This value can be preceded by lt lt if the ship must steer to the left to reach the route or gt gt if the ship must steer to the right e WOD wheel over distance from the current Own Ship position to the wheel over line e WOTTG wheel over time to
357. standard is considered as an exchange format especially by the institutions that have defined it and it is strongly recommended to use another format to get the required performance This standard is an exchange format and also an independent format for the platform being used Moreover the user can profit by a presentation of his cells because the data import is accompanied with a data sorting structure ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual V 2 1 1 Launching the ENC Module The first time you launch the ENC module no chart is loaded and you have to import a set of charts Import k Print Settings General Configuration Log OFF Administrator Chart Provider w Planisphere Exit LO and Mobiles k Projection k ARCS Charts User Objects k Charts Catalogue Tracks k Figure 101 Launching the ENC Module To launch the ENC module Step Action 1 Click the System menu select Settings Charts and then Chart Provider 2 Click ENCs 3 End of procedure V 2 1 2 Default Configuration Some commands of the ENC module allows you to choose between several options and other commands can be edited Some default values or options are configured If you change them your modification will be taken into account until you change them again Safety Contour and Background Colors Chart Objects Raising Alarms Sesto nets sk t 30 m Fafe mode Unsafe mode Shallow con
358. t is given by way of a barometer and is expressed in kilopascal The information level at which no data can be eliminated from the display This information is required in all geographical areas and in all circumstances It is not enough however to guarantee completely safe navigation Azimuth in which a seamark is located Navigational aid that allows to display the relative heading and the distance A geographical area containing cartographic data Each cell has a separate unique name Hydrographic Offices divide their responsibility area into the cells which they publish Consistent Common Reference Point see Conning position Assignation of a display context to the leg of a route Part of the screen that displays navigation chart data Gecdis screen is made up of a number of sections that may or may not be displayed ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 311 C ix L LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Chart type A cell may be compiled to six different scales according to navigation purpose The different chart types are as follows and Settings All Users gt 1 2 500 Harbour gt 1 75 000 Approach gt 1 260 000 Coastal gt 1 700 000 General gt 1 3 000 000 Overview gt 1 15 000 000 Charted Depth Altitude above or below a level of reference of a point in Earth that is in NN constantly or periodically submerged Checksum Numeric value that allows to check the validity of a received or
359. t terms all rights of the license and the use of software will be terminated without prejudice to any legal action iXBlue may carry out against the defaulting party The Buyer will be obliged at its own expense and risk to return to iXBlue all copies of the software under license in its possession together with physical protection keys or to confirm in writing that all software copies under license in its possession have been destroyed iXBlue reserves the right to proceed to all the necessary verifications in order to be assured of the buyer s observance of the aforementioned conditions Both parties will do their utmost to bring an end to disputes relative to the interpretation and or the execution of this document by settling an agreement between their respective management If an agreement has not been reached within three months the dispute will be decided by the Paris tribunal jurisdiction Se z M 038G EN September 2014 Warranty period Customer Remedies Limitations Liability Dongles Ix dl UIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Limited Warranty iXBlue guarantees that the software will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of twelve 12 months from the date of shipment iXBlue s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be at iXBlue s option repair or replacement of the software that does not meet iXBlue s Lim
360. ta End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual Finding the IP Input Output amp Mobile Configuration L d Address of a Maching Si System 4 System Network Parameters AIS Fl gem iXBlue e iXBlue DR EB Position a z ER Position reference gt E UTC of position referent IP Addresses 40 0 2 15 Computer name vb winsp Add Delete Close Figure 81 Finding the IP Address of a Machine To find the IP address of a machine Step Action In System menu click Settings I O and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens In the Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box click the System object in the tree to the left 3 Click the Network tab The addresses of your machine are shown in the field IP Addresses 9 End of procedure IV 6 2 3 Adding and Configuring a FILE Stream Gecdis allows you to receive data with a file When you add a file as a stream you ask Gecdis to analyse the sentences contained in this file The system reads them and use them directly Important AFTER PROCESSING THE FILE INSERTED IN THE RECEPTION FOLDER IS DESTROYED 4 System a File Stream Input Parameters Spying d COMI GPS pe SR METI LIDP Le 2 St TCP1 SSServeur AE EUREN ME FILE E NET e Input datum Folder C Program FilesstsBlue Seaspert dataXH ecerv
361. tance between the selected waypoint and the previous waypoint This distance is expressed in nautical miles Remains Distance that remains to run in the route The first cell of the Remains column is equal to the last cell of the Total Range column Total range Distance from the departure to the selected waypoint The last cell of the Total Range column is equal to the first cell of the Remains column Max XTE Cross Track Error Distance on each side of the route that the ship shall not pass If this occurs an alarm is generated This field is not filled for the first waypoint Turn radius This field corresponds to the turn radius starboard System menu ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 m LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Settings I O Mobiles and Own Ship Characteristics Navigation tab It is not filled for the first waypoint and the last waypoint e Comment Comment of the waypoint VII 3 2 3 The toolbar Commands In the lower part of the dialog box there are several icons allowing you to manage the waypoints dh Adds anew waypoint after the selected waypoint x Deletes the selected waypoint Shows the properties of the selected waypoint and allows you to configure some of them Moves the selected waypoint up in the list of waypoints Moves the selected waypoint down in the list of waypoints Inverts the route so that the first waypoint of a route becomes the last one the second one the last but
362. te when selected e Pilot window Customization e Information windows allow to display your desired pieces of information e The toolbar allows you to insert the buttons that correspond to your needs ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 29 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES 1 6 2 2 Route Calculation Route calculation for voyage planning includes the following e Calculation of the profile of the route a Distance between consecutive waypoints D Course between waypoints L Wheel over calculation D Total distance Q Estimated time for voyage e Check of the route Q Check of the dangers of the route e Voyage optimization Q Time table optimization Q Optimization based on economical factors a ECDIS processor calculates optimum speed and course between each waypoint and the ETA following specified data l 6 2 3 Chart Planning e Loading of new ENC charts e Updating existing ENC charts e User generated safe water areas 1 6 3 POSITIONING Positioning is the way to calculate and keep updated the position of the ship during a voyage The calculation of the position of the ship is based on available navigation sensors e Direct positioning of sensors e Dead reckoning e Manual correction 1 6 3 1 Direct Positioning of Sensors Satellite navigation systems e GPS navigator e GPS navigator with a differential correction facility DGPS 1 6 3 2 Dead Reckoning E
363. te power supply current e Power feeding voltage n 1 remote power supply voltage at the end n 1 e Power feeding voltage n 2 remote power supply voltage at the end n 2 e PFE redundancy level number of redundancy to ensure the remote supply e Transmission band system system maximum frequency e Capacity number of simultaneous calls on the link e Signal specific treatment compression processing and concentration DCMS e Number of circuits number of lanes minimum allocable unit owner ship At the end of the topic an unalterable indicator transmits the system state This condition is automatically deducted based on installation and removal dates Here are the possible states e Planned no set date e Inservice installation date entered date of withdrawal empty e Abandoned date of withdrawal entered The condition affects the default display colours near diving line in the geographical view IA ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X KE LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual List of positions 8 SML Properties B Filename TATE Type System name TAT8 D3 Segment name General description Position list Profile GSLD i Issue Geodetic WGS84 Sphere Revision Ir Correction date 03 05 1999 13 12 i Comment Position Depth Burial PGL km CGL km Slack PCL km CCL km Cable reference point g ograp 47 44 830 N 005 49 880 W 0 47646 116 707 3 8 117141 p
364. terfalls Restricted and v Sand Waves Prohibited Areas dg ne v Do not limit Depth checks to the cells of best scale v Check for No ENC of sufficient scale Select All Unselect All Apply e Inthe list displayed on the right check the object s to which an alarm is assigned ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 193 XSBLUE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action Gecdis v8 User s Manual Safety Contour and Background Colors Chart Objects Raising Alarms Dangerous Features Natural and Man Made Features Specific Areas Restricted and Prohibited Areas v Do not limit Depth checks to the cells of best scale v Facilities v Inland Buildings v Lakes Rivers and Canals v Landmarks v Roads and Railways v Silo tank v Slopes v Technical and Administative Stations v Vegetation Select All Unselect All v Check for No ENC of sufficient scale Apply If one check box is unchecked the following text is displayed in the bottom right corner of the chart view when clicking on the Information chart area ENC 05 Warning you choose to not detect all dangers In case of the danger detection option is not selected see section II 8 the following text is displayed in the bottom right corner of the chart view when clicking on the Information chart area 3 For both last types 0s EGPT e f you do not select Do not limit Depth Checks to the cell of best scale option the check will
365. th specific criteria Universal Polar Stereographic defines a conformal azimuthal projection and grid coordinates system used for both the northern and southern polar regions The sentence that indicates the speed on ground and on water Geodesics applied at water level 30 different types of vertical datum The sentence that indicates stream s speed and heading The sentence that indicates the over water speed and true heading The sentence that indicates the on ground speed and heading Waypoints are used to define the points through which a route goes Estimated time of arrival to a waypoint Geographical position of the wheel over to reach the new leg A wheel over is computed in relation to the turning radius Estimated time of arrival to a wheel over Alarm that is enabled when the mobile is outside the lane A sound signal is associated to this alarm to inform the user of the danger The sentence that allows to acquire date and time UTC day month year and local time lag ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 317 C X L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual B ECDIS INFORMATION MANDATORY This appendix lists the various particulars required by the standards to find them easily B 1 Links Table enen Spee ue 61174 4 6 1 6 8 12g G 17 5 6g CCRP CCRP configuration page 114 61174 4 10 6 6 9 7k Piloting fix page 179 Version page ii 61174 4 16 6 10 F 7 1 Information on the application Applied standards page 320 Installat
366. the acquired value 50 meters ISD M 038G EN September 2014 2L LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Inconsistent Depth wv Enable Maximum Depth Difference value ELS 20 00 m Maximum Depth Difference Percentage ELS 10 00 Figure 70 Inconsistent depth alarm parameters To use inconsistent depth Step Action 1 Inthe System menu click Settings I O and mobiles and then Alarms The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Own Ship Specific Alarms tab 3 In Inconsistent Depth area check the Enable box and then do one of the following e To enter a difference in meters click Maximum Depth Difference Value ELS and then enter a value in the corresponding field e To enter a difference in percentage click Maximum Depth Difference Percentage ELS and then enter a value in the corresponding field 4 Check the Periodic Report 30s box to generate an alarm each 30 seconds when there is an inconsistence in depths 9 Click OK 6 End of procedure IV 4 2 TARGET AIS ALARMS A page allows configuring specific alarms to mobile AIS and ARPA targets Important NOT TO BE HAMPERED BY AN EXCESS OF ALARMS BUT ONLY THE MOST RELEVANT THESE ALARMS DO NOT APPLY TO SLEEPING MOBILE ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 81 C LX 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual EP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Own Ship Specific Alarms Target AIS Alarms High Speed
367. thor Administrator Created 09 07 2013 15 54 49 Move object Annotate object Remove Annotations n the chart In the Object information window click Delete object button This button appears in the Object information window only if the object has been created manually End of procedure Select fixed cell loading mode If you are using the automatic chart loading mode before creating an object you must first select a cell in the Fixed Cell dialog box ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual To select fixed cell loading mode Step Action 1 Open the dialog with Display menu and select Charts Chart Display Mode and then click Fixed Cell Display Centre on Own Ship Fz Orientation k wv Relative motion Ctrl F2 Centre an Place Scale d Best Scale Ctrl F3 Window Zoom Zoom x10 Zoom F3 Zoom E Zoom 10 Chart Display Mode a Automatic Chart Informations Fixed Usage k Chart Objects Fixed Cell Colour Mode Erde Mode Hide All User Obj w True Vectors of Planisphere In Background User Objects Groups V 2 Select a cell and click Select SE O E Name Edition Usage Scale Issue Date Application Last fsB100001 EIS Overvieny 1 325 000 5 12 2005 o2 03 2004 fab 1 00002 12 12 Overview 1 325 000 05 12 2005 16 12 2003 2 6 Overview 1500000 01 08 2005 oz 03 2004 6104011 3 0 Overview
368. tibeam sounders data slower Related settings for sediments data acquisition Single Beam Settings WASSP Settings Cancel To get more information of the Sediment module see the document describing the A EE SEDI module in details XV 5 Using WASSP Mobile Step Action 1 In Gecdis menu select System menu Settings I O and Mobile and click Input Output amp Mobile Configuration A Wassp mobile must be displayed Information about the mobile must not be modified it is either external or software The red exclamation mark indicates that data has not been received yet 260 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X L E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action Input Output amp Mobile Configuration ei WASSP Mobile Sizes Heights Navigation AIS D b E Postion i UTC of position referenc bs n COW A True heading Ls e Filling EM Heaving i Final ETA Aia Final destination TT 2 n Mobile menu click Open Mobiles List 3 To make the Wassp mobile the main mobile make the modification so that the screen is centred on the Wassp mobile Mobiles List 3 Display Hide Appearance Configuration Track Start Stop Colour v Select with cursor Realtime sort Fleets Name Age Position conning SOG COG SOW True ROT Depth UTC Acoustique 36mi oe oe xxkn oxx xxkn xax xoxm 20 01 Q ais iXBlue 36mi oo een xxkn oxx xxkn xxm 20 01
369. ting a command highlights it in blue When it is not possible to use a command this one is grayed example Best Scale The menu bar includes the following menus oystem mainly manages the configuration print user change and exit application Display allow you to use some ECDIS main functions zoom colour modes etc Mobile manages the main controls for fleet of mobile Navigation manages navigation elements and autopilot User Object creates and manages the user objects ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 11 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 4 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES e View enables the display of the different windows on the screen and allows you to configure display contexts e displays information about the software Some other menus may be added depending on the current Gecdis version These menus are as follows e Radar allows you to use Gecdis as a radar e Bathy allows you to configure and display the bathymetry You can display a colored layer representing charted depth and also isolines e AMLs presents the commands required to use additional data layers that have been designed to satisfy maritime defense requirements e Weather allows you to display wind and pressure parameters at a particular day and time e Tide allows you to display and configure the display of tides Important THE DISPLAY OF THE MENU BAR DEPENDS ON USER RIGHTS LOGGED ON FOR EXAMPLE BY DEFAULT NAVIG
370. ting an element When the edition is finished the software returns to the SML element position window to insert another point if necessary Editing a point After clicking on the point edition button the point to edit must be selected For this the user should use the mouse in the geographical view of the relevant SML After the point being validated the sequence is the one described in Editing an element Deleting a point After clicking on the delete point button point to delete must be selected For this the user should use the mouse in the geographical view of the relevant SML The command is validate with delete validation window ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C x 2L LI Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Profile Delete validation P Are you sure you want delete point EP 29 0419 km Rp1 Figure 190 Delete point validation window After this validation another point can be deleting To exit and return to the SML Edit window press Esc key or the right button mouse Deleting a section leg To delete a section the user should select the extreme points of the section by using the mouse in the geographical view of the relevant SML After two points selected the command is validate with delete validation window Delete validation a Are you sure you want delete all points between WS 721 904 km JP and 93 8022 km Rpl Figure 191 Delete section validation window
371. tion In the dialog box click the Add button point to Stream and click the stream you wish to use COM if you wish to recover data from your GPS After configuring the stream click System Import User objects and then select Route from NMEA As far as information about routes are not received the Waiting NMEA sentences warning message is displayed The import report is displayed into the Report window So if the import process has failed you can know why Finally the main view is centred on the route you have imported The import process cannot be carried out towards file streams End of procedure To export a route Action Select a route that is not currently used and in the object information window click Export Select an output stream i e the stream to use to export the route Click OK You can check transmitted data by clicking the magnifying glass icon of the Stream Configuration dialog box Then select Output in the contextual menu of the grey window that displays End of procedure ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Vil 4 Tracks VII A 1 STARTING STOPPING A TRACK It is possible to start stop a track for any mobile To start stop the Own Ship s track Step Action 1 Click Mobile and then click Start Own Ship Track 2 To stop the track click Stop Own Ship Track 3 End of procedure To start stop any mobile s track Step Action 1 Starti
372. tion can be used with ENC charts The Universal Polar Stereographic UPS projection is a conformal azimuthal projection similar in both the northern and southern polar regions The UPS coordinates system uses a metric based cartesian grid laid out on a conformally projected surface e Inthe Northern polar region the UPS projection is not enabled if the latitude is below 84 N e Inthe southern polar region the UPS projection is not enabled if the latitude is below 80 S The coordinates are expressed in meters and are preceded by a letter idenfying the zone see Figure 126 e Y West zone and Z East zone at the North pole e A West zone and B East zone at the South pole ka 180 NORTH POLE 0 SOUTH POLE NORTH POLAR SOUTH POLAR AREA AREA Figure 126 UPS coordinate systems The origin of the UPS coordinate system is the pole north or south where X 2 000 000 m and Y 2 000 000 m The X axis lies along the meridians 90 E and 90 The Y axis lies along the meridians 0 and 180 e N85 00 00 0 W45 0 0 0 Y 1 607 232 mE 1 607 232 mN e 85 00 00 0 E45 0 0 0 B 2 392 767 mE 2 392 767 mN This projection is not available if ECDIS mode is selected To activate the UPS projection In System menu select Settings Charts Projection then e Foranavigation at the North Pole select UPS North e Foranavigation at the South Pole select UPS South ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 197 X 3 L LJ E Ge
373. tivated with neither reported heading nor COG AlS target Real AIS AtoN S Off position Real AIS AtoN On position Virtual AIS AtoN Off position Sisi LI XP XXX Virtual AIS AtoN On position AIS AtoN Lost off position AIS AtoN Lost on position ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 89 x LIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP C LL SENSES ECDIS Activated AIS with true scaled outlines ECDIS mode Activated AIS with true scaled outlines ECS mode Lost activated AIS with true scaled outlines ECDIS mode Dangerous activated AIS with true scaled outlines IV 5 3 DEFINING A SPECIFIC APPEARANCE FOR A MOBILE OR A FLEET The appearance of a fleet is configured the same way as the appearance of a mobile To define the appearance of a fleet you must first access to the x Appearance dialog box x defining the name of your fleet Ba This option is only possible in ECS mode To do so you have two possibilities Step Action 1 Either click Mobile Open Mobile List select the fleet whose appearance you want to define and then click Appearance and select Symbol tab 2 Orin the System menu click Settings I O and mobiles UO and mobile Configuration select a fleet in the list click the Appearance button then select 90 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 a 2 UE DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Action Symbol tab WXBlue DR A
374. to pause the list Any new events will not be displayed which can be useful when analyzing when events are added e Allows you to print the black box with the events and the order of presentation on the screen To open the black box In the View menu select Black Box 111 5 2 2 Configuring the Display of the Events The black box has three levels of event display that have been previously set e Base level displays the ECDIS type events such as chart databases or position report e Standard level displays the base events alarms and some particular events such as Gecdis launch autopilot mode user log on etc e Full level displays all events Using them allows you to display only a part of all events that have been generated while using Gecdis to print only interesting events for example Display Base Standard All Filter ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 65 C I X 3 L_ LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step Step 66 Figure 56 Levels of event display However if none of them meets your needs and you want for example to display some additional events of the Full level but not all of them you can customize the display of events To do so you need to check your desired events and uncheck the other ones In the Filter dialog box events are displayed as a list For each of them the ID and source are indicated You can only select the events that have already appeared i
375. tour 2 m z Safety contour 30 m Safety depth 30 m Deep contour 30 m Safe chart scale LI 40000 Default values OK Cancel Apply Figure 102 Default configuration To display the options In the System menu select Settings Charts and then Objects Detection ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 127 X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES V 2 2 CHART DATABASE PRESENTATION The Charts Database dialog box is lockable unlockable and allows you to manage the cells of the chart database Charts Database x Charts Catalogue Charts History Permits SA Certificate 7 Name Edition Usage Scale Issue Date Application Last Manual Update AU210140 1 4 General 1 1 500 000 25 11 2005 10 06 2005 4U210150 loil General 1 1 500 000 25 11 2005 10 06 2005 Import Commercial 4220140 1 3 General 1 1 500 000 30 09 2005 10 06 2005 Exchange Set AU220150 1 0 General 1 1 500 000 10 06 2005 10 06 2005 AU230140 1 0 General 1 1 500 000 10 06 2005 10 06 2005 Import Catalogue AU230150 1 0 General 1 1 500 000 10 06 2005 10 06 2005 AU314145 4 0 Coastal 1 90000 07 01 2005 07 01 2005 Import Cells AU315146 4 0 Coastal 1 90 000 07 01 2005 07 01 2005 AU318147 2 0 Coastal 1 90 000 07 01 2005 07 01 2005 Reset Database AU319147 2d Coastal 1 90 000 11 11 2005 07 01 2005 Figure 103 ENC Chart Database Charts Lists all available cells with a set of information Name name of the cell An example o
376. tructions Pipelines Full H w Routes and Tracks H El Special Areas H Buoys and Beacon Lights Fog Signals Radar H services and Small Craft Facilities H E Texts Save As H kl Inland Presentation Close Revert Figure 118 Configuring ENC Chart Display To select a default display In the Display menu select Charts point to Chart Objects and then click your desired level When you select one of the default display a checkmark appears in the menu in front of the selected level To set a customized display Action In the Display menu select Charts point to Chart Objects and then click Custom The Custom Display dialog box opens In the tree the currently checked objects are those that are currently displayed on the chart Add or remove types of objects displayed by checking or unchecking the boxes in front of their name You can first take a default display by clicking Base Standard or Full If desired you can save the current setting by clicking Save As When you save a filter it is added to the custom ones in the Chart Objects menu Click OK to save this filter End of procedure IF YOU SAVE A FILTER WITH A NAME THAT HAS ALREADY BEEN ASSIGNED TO ANOTHER FILTER THE NEW FILTER WILL REPLACE THE FORMER ONE YOU CANNOT ASSIGN BASE STANDARD AND COMPLET TO CUSTOM FILTERS ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 147 IX SJLLLIE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Step T
377. ure the information bar see the Information bar and pages see Information pages displayed on the screen To access the dialog box that allows you to modify them Step Action 1 Right click in the information bar or in the Information pages then select Customize information A RUE System Piot Position conning 50 56 908 N 001 41 941 E Ground vece Water vector S krr7 055 True heading 055 3 Depth 9 20 m Customize The Information windows displays Information windows Windows Information Information Bar Label Parent Information Information Pages Position conning OWN SHIP Position conning Critical Informations Ground vector OWN SHIP Ground vector KEE Water vector OWN SHIP Water vector 9 True heading OWN SHIP True heading Pee e Depth OWN SHIP Depth Pilo 2 End of procedure The Information Windows dialog box allows you to change the information you will display in the information bar and pages You can add several types of information about the system or a specific mobile The information is organized by category identified by a symbol e main information e auxiliary information e ship handling information e E weather information e EZ seabed information e target buoy information ISD M 038G EN September 2014 51 32 LX 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SE
378. ursor s piece of information e When the cursor is outside the main view in a dialog box or one of the bars cursor s pieces of information are displayed in red and are considered as undefined except the position which is considered as invalid and indicates the position of the centre of the screen ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 79 d 4 E LJ Ee DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Gecdis v8 User s Manual System s pieces of information are as follows UTC software acquired Time lag Dead reckoned software acquired Local time Software Cursor position Software Bearing Own Ship Cursor Software Distance Own Ship Cursor Software TTG Own Ship Cursor Software Height of tide Cursor Dead reckoned Software Depth Cursor Software Charted depth cursor Software 96 Universal Time Coordinated This corresponds to Greenwich time in England This piece of information is dependent to time lag The lag between the UTC and the local time time of reference that it is possible to configure If time lag is generated from a software source the time of reference will be the time lag of your system If time lag is acquired it will be defined by the time lag entered on the GPS sensor This piece of information is displayed whenever time lag has been added Local time is the sum of the UTC and time lag A letter is specified next local time This letter allows to reference the ti
379. ute see Inserting a point e After capturing the point to edit from the SML edit window see Editing a point ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 297 300 X aL Ll E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES SML Element Properties Symbol Comment Cable reference Slack previous pt Partial cable length 0 976 km Cumulative cable length 100 465 km w Fixed cumulative cable lengths Date 21 07 1993 13 51 Depth 127 m Burial Position Note and picture e o Figure 186 SML element properties Positioning an element By cumulative length Geographic 99 975 km Cable 100 465 km Figure 187 SML element position The positioning of an element is accessed from the window property but also when inserting a new point see Inserting a point This positioning is managed by a window that defines its geographical position from e Akeyboard input or mouse cursor e A geographic cumulative distance e Acable cumulative distance not for pipeline As in MMS DOS only the cable points are used to define the underwater link Event points and environment are projected on the cable route This rule has direct consequences when a change occurs on the course cable when inserting deleting or moving a cable point In such cases the software automatically recalculates the moving EvenEnvi points whose position is evaluated by the rule of three from intermediate geographic
380. ute precision up to five digits In reality this precision equals to 1 8 cm e Datum Defines the datum for the position of the sentences EN System A Output Parameters Sentences ka transmit ef COMI GPS SS NETI UDP E ae e iem NMEA output on NETI D etailed description of NMEA output ABA XML output ZDA e AMC OSD WOR e TTM i i vec zm File Emission vw DRT GLL y ROT YH TLL ES TCP1 55Serveur v GGA HDT VEM v VT EBA FILE 001 CN Input datum Z 4 b Add Delete Close Apply Figure 85 Selecting the Sentences to Transmit To transmit sentences Step Action 1 In System menu click Settings O and Mobiles Input Output Mobile Configuration The Input Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box opens 2 On the nput Output amp Mobile Configuration dialog box double click the stream that will transmit sentences and click NMEA output 3 Onthe Output Parameters tab define the parameters that are best suited to your needs 4 Click the Sentences to transmit tab 9 Check all the boxes that represent the sentences you want to transmit 6 Optionally check the Detailed description box to display in the window an explanation for all sentences 7 Click Apply 8 End of procedure 108 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 E LJ Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES IV 6 2 6 Checking Transmitted Sentences You can check the sentences transmitted by a stream at the same time they ar
381. visualize and if necessary customize the settings STC attenuation gain range see the description of the fields in the tables above The displayed data correspond to those of the radar source selected in the Server field of the Server tab Enter the radar antanna location in the Radar antenna position tab using the buttons to move along the various tabs 9 If several Netradar have to be configured redo steps 3 to 7 for each NetRadar that you will enter in the Server settings field 10 End of procedure ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 227 IX 3L Li E Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES Vill 4 Customizing Radar Data Display VIII A 1 228 CHOOSING THE COLORS Tha radar data display can be configured with several color modes e ECDIS w display with 2 colors e Gradual ECDIS MEE display a gradation between both shades of green of ECDIS color scale e ARPA display of a gradation that you can change as much as you want e HEAT ee display of a range of colors from dark blue to white Non editable For each of these color modes it is possible to define a Threshold expressed in percentage defining the display level of the radar data By increasing the threshold value you will display less radar information The Gain allows you to increase the level of the signal emitted by the radar The Brightness allows you to configure the brightness of the rad
382. wind information This data is available via weather data files Once selected received data is analyzed and displayed in Gecdis The visual representation is as follows O Circle from O to 2 5 knots One barb 10 knots Half barb 5 knots Wind direction A One triangle 50 knots S West wind at 15 knots To display wind information Step Action 1 Click Weather and then Weather Display 2 Click Wind 3 End of procedure 244 ISD M 038G EN September 2014 C X3LUE Gecdis v8 User s Manual DEEP INSIGHT SHARPER SENSES XII SEDIMENTS MODULE The Sediments module has been designed to display or hide sedimentary zones silt sand rock gravel etc according to data from official maps or data acquired from the sounder you are using This data can be displayed in the main 2D view as well as in the 3D view XIl 1 Display Sediments are displayed on the map in transparence a pig DS e EE wi H A E z 1 e ZA z M e J EEL Roum umg To display sediment data Click Sediments and Show official Sediments if you have sediment charts To display data records Step Action 1 In the Sediments menu click Show All Available Records This action enables to display all your records 2 Click Sediments and then Show Current Record Only if you want to display only the current record 3 End of procedure AL 2 Configuration There are two types of sedime
383. wv Enable Alarm iF speed over 20 00 kn AIS Detection w Enable Import TvswIISI ini MMSI Mame Comment 1193046 AKADEMIKIS VAVILOVS 209345000 ALMADIEP 211204950 211265320 JACOB BECKER 412151000 AURIGA 212715000 PANTORRATORAS 219100000 PETER FABER 219354000 k vw Enable 415 Messages Filter OK Cancel Apply Figure 71 Target AIS alarms page IV 4 2 1 High speed This alarm is intended to alert the user to a mobile above a set value speed A hysteresis of 1 is applied to stabilize the state to a value close to a threshold To enable high speed alarm Step Action 1 Inthe System menu click Settings I O and mobiles and then Alarms The Mobiles Alarms dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Target AIS Alarms tab 3 Check the Enable box in the High Speed area 4 Set value in the corresponding field 9 End of procedure IV 4 2 2 AIS Detection This alarm is intended to alert the user that AIS mobile identified by MMSI was detected during the acquisition Operation The principle is simple just check the numbers in the list to detect moving up the base and ensure that the Enable box of AlS Detection area is checked The selection of mobile monitoring is stored in database and is persistent i The management of the AIS alarm detection needs a Gecdis internal database In fact this database is used to provide AIS static information in the first reception of the dynamic information of the mo
384. you have not already installed any chart CD ROM on your hard drive the Chart Disks dialog box is displayed To install a CD click and then in the new window select the folder in which there are the charts you want to install Click Install CD 164 ISD M 0386 EN September 2014 C X 3 L LJ E Gecdis v8 User s Manual Step Action Chart Disks Install CD ARCS charts to import Dri ind Install Installed disk s Uninstall 7 When launching the ARCS module the Pin entry dialog box is displayed Enter your PIN number in the the blank field and then click OK 8 End of procedure To launch the ARCS module for the second time When launching the ARCS module either when launching Gecdis or from the System menu the PIN entry dialog box is displayed Enter your PIN number in the blank field and then click OK ARCS PIN e Fixed site Enter your PIN code TORRE Sodena Licence type Navigator Service 30 Avenue de L Arnir al User permit C23CD4D01F02464A Marly le Roi Licensee Marie Claude Flechais France 7o160 Vessel name SHORE Host system name IR This licence is only valid if the chart permits on this system are licensed to the person or compagny named above Ir vou are nok the named person or do not represent Ehe named compagny you may be in breach of Ehe licence conditions relating to Ehe use of these charts IF in doubt please contact your nearest ARCS suppli

Gecdis v8

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents